Arabic Grammar

METHOD GASPEY-OTTO-SAUER.

ARABIC

GRAMMAR

OF THE WRITTEN LANGUAGE

REV. G. W. THATCHER, M. A., A. D. WARDEN OF CAMDEN COLLEGE. SYDNEY, NEW SOUTH WALES, AUSTRALIA. FORMERLY SENIOR TUTOR, MANSFIELD COLLEGE, OXFORD. SECOND EDITION.

LONDON. NUTT

OAVI

DULAU &

(A. O. Berry), 818 Shaftcebury Avenue, W. C. 2. CO., U4 36 Margaret Street, Cavendish Square Wl.

5EW YOBK: BRENTANO'S, Fifth Avenue and 27th Street. THE INTERNATIONAL NEWS COMPANY, 83 and 85 Duane Street. G E. 8TECHERT & CO., 161166 West 26th Street. E. 6TEIGER & CO., 49 Murray Street. BOSTON:

G.

REUSCHEL,

110 Tremont Street 128 Tremont Street,

8CHOENHOF BOOK COMPANY,

HEIDELBERG. JULIUS GROOS. 1922.

The Gasper- Otto -Saner Method has become sole property by These books are continually revised. All rights, right of purchase. especially those of adaptation and translation into any language, are reserved. Imitations and copies are forbidden by law. Suitable

my

communications always thankfully received

Juliu

Heidelberg.

B

-.

.

j]

Ill

Preface. During the last ten years of my teaching of Arabic have often found that my pupils had received much 1 and have been help from Harder's Arabic Grammar I

,

asked

When

whether there was a similar work in English. I was asked by the firm of Julius Groos to write

such a work using Harder to any consented,

many

and

trust this

students of Arabic,

The

present work

has been and

is

is

written.

extent,

I

gladly

Grammar may be useful to who cannot read German. a grammar of Arabic as it The spoken language varies

Egypt, Syria, Morocco etc. but the written language is the same for all; the chief difference between the modern and ancient literature consisting in Arabia,

new words to meet the requirements of advanced knowledge. , Each lesson should be thoroughly mastered before

in the introduction of

the next

is

studied.

Each

exercise should be carefully

worked and compared with the key. In the supplement only a few extracts from older books are given, as the Koran and other works of this class

can easily be obtained.

Special attention

on the other hand to selection from modern journals and correspondence.

To classical

is

given

novels,

who wish to study the grammar of the Arabic further I would recommend the last

those

1 Arabische Konversations-Grammatik mit beeonderer BerQcksichtigung der Schriftaprache von Ernst Harder. Heidelberg, Julius GrooB, 1898.

2G11C

IV

Preface.

edition of Wright's Arabic Grammar published Cambridge University Press.

The various

styles of Arabic

handwriting

by the niaj"

be

studied in the Specimens d'ecritures Arabes (with key) published at the Imprimerie Catholique in Beyrouth.

A handy guide to Arabic literature "Arabic Literature" London 1903. Sydney (New

is

M.

C. Stuart's

South Wales), September 1910.

G.

W.

Thatcher.

Table of Contents. Pages

m

Preface

*

Introduction

Alphabet Vowels 5.

Madda

1.

Pronunciation

Nunation

13.

7.

Syllable

Abbreviations

4.

Sukfln

Classification of Letters 4.

Tashdld

8.

Accent

14.

15.

8.

Hamza

Numerals

9.

15.

16.

17

Exercises in reading

First Part. Lesson

*

Article

2.

Feminine.

3.

Number

4.

6.

Broken Plural Broken Plural

6.

Declension.

7.

Genitive (continued)

44

8.

Pronominal Suffixes

49

9.

Demonstrative Pronouns

53

10. >

23

1.

11.

25

Collectives

29 33

.

36

40

Genitive

Adjectives

57

Verb

61

12.

Verb with

13.

Imperfect

71

14.

Moods

76

67

suffixes

of Imperfect

80

15.

Jussive

16.

Imperative.

Present Participle. G

=.

17.

Passive.

Particles

,..t

,

2

,..t

Verbal Noun

.

84

s c

and

,.,i

-

89

Table of Contents.

VI

Pages

Lesson 18. 19.

Derived Forms of Verb

Forms

20.

V. and VI.

21.

VII.

22.

IX. and X. Forms

28.

Classification of Verbs.

24.

Hamzated Verbs

25.

Hamzated Verbs

26.

Weak Weak Weak

27.

28.

29. 80.

94

.100

and IV. Forms

II. III.

Vm.

and

107

Forms

Ill

116

Doubled Verbs

...

121

129 136

....

Verbs.

A. Assimilated verbs

Verbs.

B. Hollow verbs

151

Verbs.

C. Defective verbs

167

Doubly Weak Verbs Verbs of wonder. Optative.

143

184

Quadriliteral Verbs.

The verbs

o

,

plo

,

Ji

,

j Jo

,

yX

and

its sisters

.

.

193

202

81.

Relative sentences

32.

Numerals.

33.

Numerals (Ordinals)

Dates.

210

Age

225

Second Part. Lesson 34.

Noun

233

35.

Nouns of Place and Time, Instrument, Dimi-

36.

Relative Adjective.

37.

38.

Proper names Feminine

39.

Number.

nutive

.

.

.

.

,

.

249 251

Broken Plurals

40.

Broken Plurals (continued)

41.

Declension of

42.

Use of Cases.

43.

Pronouns

240 244

Adjectives

256 268

Noun Emphasis.

274 Permutative

.

.

278 287

44.

Prepositions

45.

Adverbs

.

.

290

.

305

Table of Contents.

VII Pages

Lesson 46. 47.

Conjunctions Conditional sentences

48.

Interjections

48.

Arabic Verse

.

.

313 321

327 332 345

Supplement Arabic-Engllsh Vocabulary

381

English-Arablc Vocabulary

437

Arabic Index

449

English Index

.

460

Introduction Arabic characters are written from right to

The alphabet (sLs^

(op-

harf, plur.

hija)

consists

O

s> huruf), 3j

sonants.

Most of these

different

forms

letters

according

to

which

left.

of 28 characters

represent conare written in slightly all

whether they

1.

stand

are joined to a preceding letter or 3. are joined to a preceding and a following letter or 4. are joined to a following letter only.

alone or

2.

Arabic Grammar.

Introduction.

Note is

The

1.

used merely

ditions (see

a)-

10).

letter'

as a

or b)

I

(altf)

has no sound of

its

own but

support for hamza under certain conto lengthen a preceding a vowel (see 6)

Introduction.

or

c)

end Of 8^

at the

of verbs

plur.

(see

consonant of the Arabic alphabet

first real

Note

When

2.

of nouns or adjectives , JO5J is called K&*j v'j

tft

Note

4).

3 and

The 10).

used as the feminine ending written as ha () with two dots (s) and

the letter it i

is

tft

marbuta, the ordinary

tft

This

tawlla.

6,

* (see

if

tft

tft

being called

of the feminine ending

not pro-

is

nounced in modern Arabic except when followed by a word beginning with a vowel sound. The modern usage is observed 9-0-.

book

in the technical terms of this

hamza

e.g.

for

OJT;

hamzat

al-wasl for

Note

8.

Note

4.

In

NW.

Africa f

The following

y=

foreign words:

ch

T

p;

^ and q

written

is

are

letters (as

in

v_j.

sometimes used in

church),

<J?

=

v.

2.

can on ^y ^e joined ^ j j 3 These are called to preceding not to following letters.

The

yJLafcu

six

letters

u^jO-,

\

<*

hnruf munfasila O, s AJLai*

O

,

others

are

united

letters.

called

Among

i.e.

separate letters; .the

j t

^y^

huraf

muttasila

i.e.

ordinary combinations of letters iajgritingr

are the following:

f. bft-h&

g^

ha-jim-jim

^ or K

(joined to preceding

letter ^L) lam-alif

^ SF

^

ba-y&

s^ sln-ha

ta-h&

^

ta-ya

-^

5? jim-h&

j^ ha-jim

^ ^

sad-hft

'ain-jim

^ I

lam-h&

lam-mim

^? mlm-r>a

mim-mim

fa-h&

t

fa-y&

JP

^

a? ya-h&

S>

nun-yft

ha-mim

nun-ha

^ ya-mto.

Introduction.

4

3.

Pronunciation of the Consonants.

The v_

_

jirn

this,

3

j.

ra

o

b.

ta

j dal

=

r.

=

j

zai

=

shin

(jr

The s.

y.

u or

=

=

^=

i

fa

nun (3

like

their

th as in think.

dh

=

sin

z.

1.

to lengthen a preceding

tha

o dhal

shot,

lam

pronounced

&

t.

d.

= sh as in o = * rnlm = 01.^ waw = w. ya =

(jfc <$

=

ba

= j

are

following letters

English equivalents:

s

&

f.

=

=

n.

and ^5 are

vowel see

th as

kaf

ha

as in

in so.

= = h. k.

also used 6).

following represent sounds foreign to English:

hamza

is

a click produced by a quick com-

pression of the upper part of the throat.

ha

is

an h pronounced with a strong expulsion

of air from the chest.

kha is a guttural ch as in the Scotch "loch" ^ but. more from the throat. (Jo sad, (jo dad, >b ta and J& ga form a group of o t s, ^ d, emphatic sounds corresponding with z distinguished from them by the tongue being and

^

-

placed against the palate instead of against the teeth.

produced by comand expulsion of the breath. ghain has a hard sound between a snarling pronunciation of gh and r.

^

'ain ig a very strong guttural

pression of the throat

qaf

is

a k sound produced in

the throat, (like

the cawing of a crow). 4.

Classification of the Letters. 1.

Arabian grammarians divide the

alphabet

(z-&^l\

oJ=>

huruf

alhija')

letters of the

into

a)

those

Introduction.

* -

which

dotted

are

j.>

)

hurnf rau'jauaa) and

^j>

(iU^-

.

b)

which

those

are

not

dotted

(VdUg*

huraf

o^y>

muhmala). 2.

letters

,

^>

More

,

^

letters

division

5

AA

> 1

L>"> vA uf, o*, of the Article, and b)

into

a)

Sun

The

which

v5,

Moon

letters

alhuruf alqamariya), comprising the other

which do not assimilate the

the alphabet,

Lesson 3.

j,

the

o^2

letters of

(see

the

(iu,*Ajf cA>j3| alhuruf ashsharaslya) namely

assimilate fciytJuT

is

practical

1

I).

letters,

(LJ?

I

v-4js>

aljf,

^ wa\

hurQf

and'^ jj

al'illa)

are called

Weak

because they arc often

interchanged or dropped under the influence of other letters. Contrasted with these, the other letters of the alphabet are called Sound assahlha).

letters

(s^Waj

3

alhuruf

..

5.

Vowels.

Every consonant in a vocalised Arabic text is r provided ^ith a vowel sign or with a sign indicating the absence of a vowel.

The vowel i shukttl) 1.

sonant

signs (jXfe shaki, Plur. 3lXa! ashkal or

are three in

iLste fatha,

number:

a small diagonal stroke over a con-

=

a as in o da. 0,0, *f*S kasra a scroll diagonal stroke under a consonant = i as in o di. 2.

?.

&*/>

damma, a small

u as in o du.

3 above a consonant

=

Introduction.

6

The

sign indicating the absence of a vowel

It written above^a consonant. 6 -> i kun. or iJojs. jazma e.g.

called

is

is

-^

a yL* sukan

^

Note L

The

vowel signs above do not 'actnally the vowel sounds used in pronunciation for while it inclines to fatha preserves the & sound after ., -i, ,

represent

three

ail

g,

the sound of au in "taught" after the Emphatic letters yo, (_p, _b ? ^0, *, and is usually thinned down to the sound of S after G <" the other letters as in u-J$ kelbun. o.-..

Note

In Arabic. a vowel

2.

haraka) and ao a consonant

is either

provided with a vowel, vowel.

or.

i.e.

a "movement" (MJ>>

is called

"moved"

"resting"

(t^Sj^C* mutaharrik)

sakin)

(^Tu

without

i.e.

6-

Long Vowels and Diphthongs. a,

Jhe_long_vowels

b^the

I,'

a are^ expressed in Arabic

_L_ followed

signs

by

I,

^5, ^ (written

^S

without sukun), thus Ju malun "wealth", o

klsun

>

"a purse", j^b tulun "length".

The diphthongs as English a )>aitun

u

and

a house

Note

1.

ai

and au (now generally pronounced '

and

o) are written ^5 ',

ji-

khaufun

In a few words a

is '

as

.

^^1

"fear".

expressed by a short vertical

'

Mi dbalika !

stroke over a consonant as in "that",

^

Note

\0& hadha

lakin "bot", i'i allshu 2.

"God"

At the end of a word &

"this", etc.

is

often expressed by

_1_ followed by ^5 (without dot* or sukun), thus

rams "he

Introduction.

Q

threw",

ila

As soon as

"unto".

this

ceases to be final

^5

* * *

it

returns to the form

I

raraShu "he threw

e.g. sic,

-o-

The Arabian grammarians alif bisorat alyft'

this

call

the end of a word (whether

I

or

him". O

>

the &LJ!

<j?

The

the form of ya".

"alif in

,

^)

sign for a at G * 3, , o.

called

is

can be shortened" because it is shortened when followed by a word beginning with hamzat alwasl alif maqsflra

(see

"alif that

11).

Note

ii

In a few words ending in at an older form of 9 or xj occurs. These are aj-o- or writing them with 8j 3.

hayfttun "life",

O

.

8jLe or

'

s!^Lo sal Stun

9 lo-

.

-

"prayer",

or

S^j

o-

al^Dj zakatun "alms", *Jj>i or S^_^> tauratun "Torah"

(the

Mosaic Law).

Note

4.

An

I

written bat not pronounced after the

is

> *

with which some verbal forms end o

$

*

\^J==> katabu "they

e.g.

. -

wrote" \^>j ramau "they threw". The e in the word iuU mi'atun "hundred".

\

Is

also not pronounced

7.

Nunation.

At the end of nouns and adjectives, when indefinite, the three vowel signs are sometimes written double, ,thus

sign

JL,

_

This

is

fot

an

baban, aLif

_L and

,

are then

the so-called Nunation ,(

has

i

as

it

well,

cw

except

tanwln). after

B

an,

in,

The

e.g.

LL

khaltfatan.

When however an find

ronounced tw,

written

^JL

as

is

a contraction

^jsi hudan

(for

for

oyu

hudayun);

we *&.

Introduction

8

n contraction for

awun

is

it

or

written ^5

!_L as

c

J^tf.

uae^asan

or

(for

asa\vun). 8.

Sukun or Jazma. of a vowel after a consonant isjndi9-o , O cated by the sign __ called o yC* sukun or Xxp. jazma

The absence

e.g.

JJ3 qatlun "a killing", \&lzS katabat "she wrote".

letters ^ and ^5 take sukun when they form diphthongs, but not when they only lengthen__vowels

The

(see

6).

For the omission of sukun with the article see

lain of the

9.

o

A

vowelless consonant

"resting"

(

5,

note

is

said

to

be

sakin

^jfl**

2).

9.

Tashdld.

When a consonant occurs twice without a vowel sound between, it is written once only qnd the sign (called vXisX-iJ tashdld) is placed

over

it

e.g.

J

S-

marra "he passed by", ^U marrun "passing by". The consonantal sound however must be distinctly pronounced twice. Tashdld often indicates assimilation.

Thus the ^

when

the word to

of the Article 3! al

which

it is

The

is

(3

is

assimilated

prefixed begins with a Sun letter (see retained in writing but without sukun;

4). ajgtd^

Go* tashdld

is

written

over the following letter J

shamsun "sun" becomes with the shamsu "the sun";

Jo^

arrajulu "the man".

rajulun

Article

"a

J-^K

e.g. o

5

^^J-iJ! ash-

man" becomea.

9

Introduction. *

Again the

and la

^

c

of the words

"from what",

min

of assimilated to the J and ^

is

^

U ma "what" and

= an-la,

^

*an "that",

\

}

an "from"

"not",

^1 alia

o

"that not",

^

in

U* minima and

L*i 'aramfi

amman

"from him

^I^mimman and

=

"who, whom"

man

e

f.

. {

y4

who": so also ttt Sometimes the letters o, cy, o, o, <j>, JP," J& are assimilated to a following o. Here also the letter assimilated is left in the writing but without sukun, while a tashdld is written over the 'ilia

o

e.g.

co'.t aratta ^

'in-la "if not".

= arad-tA, d^ labittu = labith-tu. :

,

10.

Hamza.

Hamza

_JL.

(jl o

two kinds

>-

.,0,0

,h>^t

1.

be dropped and is

cf.

1,

hamzat

SJ^P

2.

Note

1

and

3) -is

of

o

aJ.P

Juo^J!

alqat",

hamzat

omitted under some circumstances

which cannot alwasl,

(see

which

11).

above (with JL- and _L) or one of the letters I, ^ but sometimes

It is generally written

under (with

_

)

^

independently. The following are the rules for writing it: I. At the beginning of a word it is always written O,o 9o Oo with amrun, a.^? ibratun, ..o5 'udhnun. e.g. i

II. a)

jA\

In the middle of a word: Preceded by _1_ a and i. followed by _I_ a or O

*

sukun 2.

it is

followed

ya'isa;

3.

written above

by

_

followed

ba'usa.

it

by

is

I

e.g.

JL.

written

_i_ u

it

is

sa'ala,

above

^

uw ?j ra'sun;

^

e.g.

written above 3 e.g.

Introduction.

10

_

Preceded by

above

^

i

it

is

written

Preceded by _i_ u

it

is

written above ^ followed by

b)

e.g.

Go

^

biruu. c)

followed by a or u, above

JL

yu'allifu,

^L

followed by

it

vowel,

bearer

hamza

If

e)

is

e.g.

^ joins the ^ III.

e.g.

b) After

when

^

J^ yab'usu.

t

maqru'atun;

if

preceded

written above the stroke that ;

k.L khatl'atun.

not affected by the vowel that follows it, afler _L over after over ^5 \j*

the

,

it

tjfij

yaqra'u, ^jo danu'a,

has no bearer

e.g.

3^> dau'un,

With the ending an the hamza

stroke

CLi

\

qara'a,

sukun

shai'un.

9^yi over

little

it is

I,

I

At the end of a word:

_

after

e.g.

or 3 of the long above the line without any

tasa'ala, fr^yu

written over

is

written above

to the following letter e.g. x

a) It is

but

when i,

followed by u, over

preceded by

written a

i3U4

is

ilLl yas'alu,

e.g., is

of long

by the

it

when

followed by _!., over 3

when

when

su'ila.

Preceded by sukun

d)

^

connecting the previous

is

written

letter

with

however the preceding letter shai'an; e.g. cannot be connected the is omitted and the hamza the

t

if

I

written without bearer e.g.

Hamzat

g>

juz'an.

alwaal.

fo some cay* the hamza at the beginning of, a word is no essential part of its form t but seems to 1.

11

Introduction.

to prevent a syllable from beginning with a vowel., In such cases, when it follows another word, the hamzals dropped with its vowel, a sign called*

b^written only

0- o

-

is put in place of the hamza and the two words are read as one. If the preceding word does not end in a vowel, jhen one is given to it in accordaoce with the rules below (4). TheHainza in these

wasja

cases

(iJLoj)

called Joo^I

is

reserved in_tbe

hamzat alwagl

aj+3>

writing,

The

oo^ abdu

^Jlill

sarafa (from vJ^oj^), 2.

The hamza

a)

In the Article

though

noljjronoanced. neither on Ihe'pron^anciatioiL e

Examples:

t,

is

^31

^

^yajlj wa'n-

'Iqadiri;

4otJ

ra'aitu 'bna 'lamiri.

harnzat alwagl:

is

f

3l al e.g.

abdu ^oUJ I Jvxc

'Iqadiri.

b) In the Imperative of the I form of the^Verb^

(Lesson 16)

e.g. vlutf?

viis qultu 'ktub "I said: write".

and Verbal noun of foimsoflhTYerb, (Less. 1 8)

c) IiX-ibe Perfect, Imperative

HLlYinnX e.g.

^i\a

and

X

fa'nhazama.

d) In the following eight words:

GO iyi\

6<0 idil

^ .-

9,0

ibnun "son".

'^-

t-

Jimraun ****

ibnatun "daughter".

Cjg

(

(Masc.).

(Fern.).

ru'un "man".

imra'atun "woman".

"two"

fithanatani "two" I

3J*l im-

^

si lot

Jitbnairi

\

or

-, 9

igmun

narae

,,

/

^^^

istun "buttock".

3. It 6. the wora d( If Jhe word preceding hamzat alwagl alwasl does precedmg a namzat not_end in a vowel, then the final congogant generally

Introduction.

12

?

akasra __,

receives

Jyaj!

e.g.

The

has already gone away". after

nsarafa

ruination also takes

The

u

he

_

Preposition Q, rnin "from" takes.

^

before the Article as jJ^Jl

other cases

the boy"; In iuli

qadi

it.

Exceptions.

_

J>i

^

mini

'biiihi

'Iwaladi

the usual

"from

_

e.g.

"from his son".

The Personal proDouns antum, the ending

mina

takes

it

"f

hum,

^

kum and

^

turn of the 2 nd Pers. Plur. Perf.

^

and the Preposition vX* mudh (= jcu mundhu) "since" take _1_ u before the hamzat alwasl verb

of the

e.g.

alJl

jJ^H

,*AJ^

If

or

^IiJ

^

la'anahumu

ra'aitumu 'Iwalada

pronounced short

^UJJ j If

^5

sukfm

"May God

"You have

curse them";

seen the boy".

the word preceding the hamza ends with 1, ^ which lengthen the vowels before them, then

although the writing

the

'llahu

is

(see

not altered, the vowel must be 13, 3) e.g. jjjlt

*Il

abu^lwaladi,

fi Mdcari.

however the word ends in ^5-' or ^-1., then takes __ and the ^ takes _i_ in place of the e.g.

y^ J.

of the king" ones of God".

*)JJ

j

ft

ainayi 'Imaliki "in the eyes

jaL&> mustafawu

'llahi

"the chosen

The conjunctions lau "if and ^1 au "or" follow the general rule and take __ after the .

^

4.

The hamzat

alwagl

well as the pronunciation:

falls

out of the writing ag

13

Introduction.

In the expression

a)

name

In the

In the word

b)

name

between the

f*o bismfllahi

Kf

-Mb)

(for

of God".

ibnun "son" when it cornea "" and that nf the

f

of the

{and not at the beginning of a line)

e.g.

'umaru 'bnu 'Ikhatt&b "Omar the son of Alkhattab". 9o If the

cr

o. is

j

predicative the

zaiduni'bnu 'amrin "Zaid In the Article Jl

c)

position l&

,3

"verily"

e.g.

Jo.yj

If the falls

noun

The

t

*- So."

the

man"

jJJIf

lalhaqqu "verily the truth".

(

.3,

then the

^

of the Article

(for xLJUJ)-lillailati "for

"God"

of the bamzat alwagl

the night".

formed

is

may

preceded by the Interrogative particle (for

>

^^ ^\ j^

preceded by the Pre-

"to

lirrajuli

Similarly from 2jf allah "to God". d)

if

al,

befflns^with

out also e.g.-iXjJ

e.g.

the son of Amr".

is

j^

lilwaladi "to .the boy",

preserved

or the strengthening Particle S

for")

ji_ "to,

is

{

!

Jl

lillahi

drop out, when

e.g.

5^Lt

abnuka

5Uln) "thy son"? 12.

Madda. If_a_ tEJBn"

bamza with fatha (a) is followed by a^ vowelless the hamza and vowel are dropped and one is

written, while

madda horizontally above)

above

(really

which

is

this is written a sign

the second alif written

pronounced

a,

e.g.

cr,T

14

Introduction,

aminun

(for

cr !!),

^

!

(for allj) ra'ahu,

o lyj

qur'anun

(for *,

Note.

In

"

is

vowel, e.g.

t\jP

many books

the usual

provided with this sign,

t

which lengthens the

when

it

precedes hamza

sahrfi'u "desert".

13.

The

Syllable.

1.

There are two kinds of

a)

Open, consisting of a consonant and a short

vowel

e.g.

b)

syllable.:

JJtf ka-ta-ba..

Closed, consisting of a consonant, short vowel nd and 3 rd e.g. the 2 syllables

and vowelless consonant ka-tab-tum.

Syllables consisting of a consonant and a long considered closed since the letters ~t\' Vs

vowel aje

are considered vowelless consonants e.g.

^b

da-ri.

A consonant followed Jjythe nunation is also considered as closed (as if the n were written) e.g. ;

!o

If

da-run. 2. No syllable can begin with a vowelless consonant. suclTa case arises from inflection in Arabic words,

a hamzat alwa?l with "write" (for >^jS ktub).

unchangeable hamza

e.g.

.

prefixed e.g.

Cof

I

'uktub

In writing foreign words an

(jJaiSf S}!P)

aflatQnu "Plato", or the

a vowel

is

{

first

faransa lljji

is

prefixed e.g. J,>bii!

consonant

(for fraiisa)

is

provided with

"France".

Introduction.

No

3.

sonants.

one (cf.

15

can close with two vowelless consuch a case arises from inflection, then

syllable

If

letter falls

also

6,

out

Note

j^S qnl becomes

e.g.

and

12

The only exception words in which these vowel are followed

qfll

"say",

this rule is in the case of

letters

-

I,

^

3,

lengthening a

by a doubled consonant

from

farrun, for

to

Jjj

11, 3).

e.g. Jli

farirun.

14.

Accent.

is

1. In words of more than one syllable the accent never on the last.

the last syllable but one i3_closed,

2. If

the accent

e.g. jls

q&la,

x-M ijtamd'na, 1/6 3.

Syb .yaqulu, *6*\

it

receives.

^Jo^> khayyatuna,

akhbarn&kum.

In words of three syllables,

if

the last but one

open, the accent falls on the last but two e.g. kataba. In words of four or more syllables the acce.nl is__carried back until it meets with a closed sllabi is

- - o . '

V.J&A inashwaratun, uUx^ tajannabata, mukatabatun. 1

e.g.

15.

Numerals.

In former times (and occasionally still in some forms of literature) the letters of the alphabet areused to indicate numerals. In this case the order 1.

artificial

of the 1 Dtters is that of the old Semitic alphabet, followed by the letters peculiar to the Arabic alphabet. This

alphabet

is

called

JsJ^T o^Js> huruf

al'abjad.

16

Introduction.

1.1 o

2. 3.

d

200.

30.

J

300.

40.

s o

4.

20.

500.

60.

5. 6.

L

70.

5

9.

Js

^ uX^?

800.

1000.

^

given in the following h'ne:

is

-

o

700.

o

100.

This order

600.

.

^

80.

7.

10.

400.

r

50.

c

^

1 \>

j^*iii'W

but that used in

,

NW.

The numerals

2.

t

i*

r

Africa differs slightly from this.

now

in general use

f

o

v

i

A

1

are:

.

34567890

12

These are read from

left to

right e.g. uiv 1897.

16.

Abbreviations.

A

stroke resembling a

madda

is

generally (though

not always) put above abbreviations e ila

akbirihi

The the

"and so

!

salla

forth" (literally "to

following abbreviations are in

names of llahu

certain persons

f

alaihi

him peace" used

g.

:

,**o

^Jl for s->7 its

end").

common

=

J.I

use after

JLLj ^IIr

^

&

!

jjo

wasallama "God bless him and give

after the c

Jtc

name

of

Mohammed.

alaihi 'ssalamu

"Upon him be

peace" used after the names of other prophets.

Introduction.

"May God

radiya 'llahu 'anlrn

be pleased with him" used Companions of Mohammed.

j

=

>

i

-e

after

names

the

of the

.

dJ!

rahimahu

*s>j

compassion on him" used

"May God have

'llahu

names of the dead.

after the

Exercises in reading. I.

^

vlj*

J?

JLi

tib

kul

qum

JJ

ft

vLi*

j

qul bal abun

harnun

yadun kai dum

jj

uam dhu khudh

wa

'an

J

o o

l!

ta

lam ma

bi

la sir

a.

g,

kullun dalla tibbun

madda lubbun wai

II.

farahun qatlun shariba hasuna fariha qatala kataba O 06-. -Go, G,, Oo,

ibilun O H,

.

4a r un

habluu o

ra'sun khifti

,

t,i

khafa Go-

t^la

G

-

husnun G o,

qumta mautun jarun baitun

hasanun

G

fllun

G

>

uurun

jara akala bikrin nahrin baLirin bukblun zahrin Arabic Grammar,

2

Introduction.

18

m.

6

s

VJ,^

o..

w~AJ

-o.

6-

LjJS

WOK

Q

haribun nafsan qulna katibun kitabun katabtu katabat

katabtum asasun

uj^Xo

aqtulu tadribu jaktubu

fattish fattasha

w^T

f&it<

Uoo

' 1

!>**)

^j^

maktubun sbu^hlukum kitabuhu takhruju ba'atha farihna G-o -oO -.o->, .o, l-^^ u-aXxir' 0^-7*" f^Jj^ C)^*" ^^^ J

>

(

'

1

takhtalifu

tarlqukum ta'banu saratanun jalisan miftahun

^,l5J

^^>1

li3^iJ.[

tadanika

ihmarrat

ittakhadhtuaa

Lulx.>^

<jixi-[

c

ijtama na ikhtilafun

akhidun akilun mu'oimun tatadhakkaru idtarabat O ,o o > j~j O- o-o ^

'ala ila .-

mu'allifuna

j

mu'akhadatun

istahlifinl

isti'nasun

IV.

ta'lifan

J^'

OS

mOsa

aijj

S

,

viL>

19

Introduction.

CT Jt> ,

)

,o

>

i .6-

S

-

8>uM JOLc

S-

0,0.0,

t

,

> .

y

JUc O.O

.,<

UiiJ I

J

-o;;

<

t=

>,

.',

Introduction.

fc*US

Xljl

W

Transcription and Translation.

alqutru The land

'Imigriyu the Egyptian

yukauwinu

'zzawiyata the angle

forms

'shshamallyata 'shsharqlyata min afrlqiyatin wayuqalu and it is the northern the eastern of Africa li'anna qismahu lahu aidan wadi'nnlli also the valley of the Nile because its part called baina silsilaiai jibalin 'IjanUblya waqi'un lies between two chains of mountains, the southern Tazlmu wayakhtariquhu nahni'nnlli the mighty. and cuts through it the river of Nile mllin masahatuhu jighraftyan arba'umi'ati alfi Its area (is) geographically 400000 square

murabba'in

wa

amroa masahatuhu

'Imuqasatu

and

the measured, as for its area mllin murabba'in minha 5736000 fahiya 65 alfa it of which 5736000 miles, (is) 65000 square c faddanin ardan zara lyatan. faddans (are) seed ground wayahuddu hadha 'Iqutra mina 'shshamali 'Ibahru And bounds this land on the North the sea miles

wamina 'shsharqi khattun yamtaddu 'Imutawassitu the Mediterranean and on the East a line which extends min khaui yunusa

c

ala 'Ibahri

'Imutawassiti

ila

Khan Yunus

on the sea the Mediterranean to 'ssuwaisi 'ala 'Ibahri 'rahmari wa 'Ibahru Tahraaru Suez on the sea the Red, and the sea the Rod;

from

wamina and on

biladu 'Ijanubi the South the district biladu barqata. 'Igharbi the West the district of Barqa.

'nnubati of Nubia;

wamina and on

Introduction. ;

wa And

nnllu the Nile

21

nahrun yakhtariqu (is)

a

river

mina

'Imisriya

the land the Egyptian 'idha fa wasla ila

(which)

cuts

through

'shshamali from the South to the North 'Jjanubi

ila

qurbi

'Iqahirati

and when it comes to the neighbourhood of Cairo, far'aini yaslru ahaduhuma ma'ilan 'nqasama ila one of them tending it divides into two branches, goes ila 'shsharqi hatta yasubba ila 'Ibahri 'Jmutawassiti to

it flows into the sea the Mediterranean wa Takharu yasiru ma'ilan dimyata the city of Damietta and the other goes tending hatta yasubba ila dhaiika 'Ibahri 'inda 'Igharbi

the East until

'inda at ila

to

madmati

the

West

until

flows

it

into

that

sea

at

rashlda. thaghri the frontier of Rosetta.

wayanqasimu

And

is

'li'tibari ila

way

into

'Iqutru

the land

divided

qismaini

'Imisrlyu the Egyptian

bihadha in this

au washamallyin janublyin a southern and a northern, or

two parts, wabahrryin

fa'lqismu 'Iqibllyu a southern and a sea-coast, and the part the southern, Tulya yamtaddu wayuqalu lahu 'ssa'idu au misru and it is called the Sa'ld or Egypt the upper, extends misra min akhiri hududi ila janftban from the end of the limits of Egypt (on the) South to ? nnlli tafarru'i nuqtati wa'lbahrtyu the point of the branching of the Nile; and the sea-coast, wayuqalu lahu misru 'ssufla yamtaddu min nuqtati and it is called Egypt the lower, extends from the point 'nnlli ila 'Ibahri tafarru'i 'Imutawassiti. of the branching of the Nile to the sea the Mediterranean. qibllyi.n

.

wayuqsamu

ila 'Iwajhu Ibahrlyu divided the portion the sea-coast into thalftthati aqsamin mutawassitin wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u baina three and it lies between divisions, a middle, far ayi 'nulli summiya waqad the two branches of the Nile, and it has been named

And

is

c

lidhalika

raudatu

on account of that the garden wayuqalu lahu aidani 'dhdhalta and it is called also the Delta

of

'Ibahraini two rivers

the

limushabahatihi account of its

on

Introduction.

22

biharfi

'dhdhali

'inda

to the letter

dhal

among

'lyunaulylna the Greeks, 'dhdhalta 'Iwaqi'u sharqlyi lies to the East of the Delta and an eastern, arid it "Ihaufu 'shsharqlyu wagharblyin wayuqalu lahu and is called the border the Eastern, and a western wahuwa 'Iwaqi'u ila gharblyiha wayuqalu lahu to the West of it, and is lies called and it hadhihi hiya 'lhaufu 'Igharbiyu 'aqsamu These are the divisions the border the Western.

resemblance

washarqiyin wahuwa

ila

.

c

"ttabi lyatu 'Imisrlyi Iqutri of the laud the Egyptian the natural. '

Tidariyatu ihe

administrative,

Tazmani. of the times.

'amma 'aqsauiuhu As

for its divisions

t'atakhtalifu

they

differ

bi'khtilafi

with

the

differing

23

First Part, First Lesson.

($7

is

<35

1.

There

2.

The

'addarsa 1'awwalu.)

indefinite article in Arabic.

definite article for all

which

^al

JJjLrf

no

is

is

prefixed to the

same time depriving

at the

it

genders and numbers

noun which

it

defines,

of the nunation (Intro.

7),

e.g. vi^yo baitun "a house"; y^jf 'albaitu "the house". The hamza of the article is hamzat alwasl (Intro. 11) and so when it follows another word is dropped with its vowel and in pronunciation the 3 follows

immediately jb

the

vowel

the

of

babilbaiti "of the door of the albaiti "the 3.

door

Jo

ijo

Ji?

j

o

>

o 3 } j when the word to which

is

is

^ it

ji is

'arrajulu

,j4-ls1

o s

man" ^.^-Ji ashshamsu

words the j

e.g.

bab-

assimilated

is

o o

attached begins with one of these 'the

ou

'

In pronunciation the J of the article 4, 2)

e.g.

vi>Jjf vjb

;

house"; vti**J!

(accus.) of the house".

to the Sun-letters (Intro. (jo

word

preceding

babulbaiti "the door of the house"

"the

In such

sun".

written without vowel-sign

and tashdid

placed over the Sun-letter. 4.

.Adjectives as qualify.

nouns they adjective

must have

attributes If the it

arldun u a wide river"; "the wide river".

also

are

placed

noun has the e.g.

^jojjt

after

the

article

th^

jfS

nahrun

c

t

oj T*jI lull

'annahruraridu

24

First Part.

5.

The_CQpula O

Arabic^ is

e.g.

"is" or "are"

is

not expressed in

Joss

*

\ja&f. jju]

'annahru 'artdun

"the river

wide". 6.

The personal pronouns 3

Gf

ana

of the singular are:

I.

'anta

Thou

saJt 'anti

Thou

ooi

'^s>

g

(masc.). (fern.).

huwa He. hiya She.

Vocabulary.

O

bahrun a

bustiinun a garden.

insanun a man.

sea.

j /qablhun :

{

graceful.

bad, dis-

25

Second Lesson. Exercise j

1.

G

>o

o

..

bUJ

^ojoS LX**J

J

-

^-^

I

1

G.,j ,s

G

-

8--

-

^^s- J^-Ji G

G

G

-

^- v^I,

-

-oS

J^

UU5

. >

>

y

,

*

O

O

JG-:,

-

j ,

O

-

-

-

t. '

>

t,

>*t.

v^ j^l

lit

J^>,

-

a

tf E

Transcription.

albustanu kablrun.

albustanu

al-

arrajulu hamaliarmllu nahruu.

insanun qablhun.

sanun.

'Ikablru.

mahallun hasanun.

baitu '^saghlru.

kun 'adilun. albahru kablrun. qasrunkuwaiyisun. khubzun taiyibun. alkhubzu taiyibun ani rajulun. huwa auta ta'banu. alqadl rajulun taiyibun. hablbun taiyibun. arrajulu huwa 'lhablbu 'ssadiqu. shshri'u 'ari^un. Exercise

2.

The house is large. The garden is a Thou art a good man. - - I am place.

The

beautiful castle

judge

is

art a

bad man.

and I

upright.

(^

wa) the wide

am an

The wide

beautiful tired.

river.

upright friend.

The Thou

street.

Second Lesson.

The Feminine. 1.

(for

Most feminine words take the ending

this

form of

t

see

Intro.

1,

Note

2),

_!_

e.g.

atun

^t

26

First Part.

O-o

"a

'ibrum

xut

son",

"a

'ibnatun

daughter";

kablran "great", feminine a-y^ kablratun.

The

2.

or

qualifies

adjective is

predicate

'Ikablratu "the big girl",

"the

girl is

to.

'LJ3\ iSif 'alibnatu

e.g.

{^

it

2ll .'alibnatu kablratun

big (or old)".

Some words

3.

with the noun which

agrees

are

feminine without

having_a

femimne"'ending.;

Nouns denoting females

a)

e.g.

O i,

mother", u^f. of a woman).

Proper names of lands and

b)

'urnmun

^5

JUP Hindun (name cities e.g.

(without nunation) "Egypt, Cairo", ^UJ! (always with article), "Syria, Damascus". c)

Names

pairs

._vc (

Jvj

O

e.g.

'ainun "eye"

Many

d)

yadun

"hand",

yax misru 'ashshamu

body which occur

of those parts of the ,

in

"a

o

'arusun "a bride",

o

Jo^

rijlun

"foot",

etc.

single

words,

among

the

commonest

being: O o (joi

O o *M-&

'ardun, earth.

shamsun, sun.

..

khamrun, wine.

.'j

namn,

fire.

O o,

,

tjarun, house. [

>

^V-AJ

G

>^

nh\ln, wind.

Note

1.

Some words

v^. are

nafsun,

self,

soul.

-*

siiqun, market.

used both

as masculine

and

feminine, (see Less. 38).

Note a'cr (see

2.

Other feminine endings are ^5 -- a and

Leas. 38).

*!

Second Lesson.

Note culine

Nouns ending

3.

K.JL>

e.g.

27

denoting males are mas-

in

khallfatun "a caliph",

^syb Tarafatu

(the

name

of a poet).

Collectives,

Many words

4.

singular in form have a collective 6

G--

meaning

e.g.

To

"olives". O

*""

^

Q ___

JL ending

is

_atun

to

appended

such words 5^

hajaratun "a piece of rock, a stone", "a (single) olive". 5.

JO-

hajarun "rock", o >jj zaitunun indicate a single object the feminine

Tnterrogat^yft

particles $J> or

s^

J^u; zaitunatun

apntyncea are introduced by the

The

f.

e.g.

j O->

latter

is

prefixed

to. the

first

word of the sentence. Vocabulary. -

"

Maddun \

Ihadirun present,

a grand-

father.

('ready.

a grand-

(jaddatun mother

9 j

f

salihun honest.

^*i

junainatun a garden.

na

am

aklmun

fqadlmun

2

muzillun shady.

old, ancient

(of things).

9

Jk hadimun i

.

*

ft

( man, f*^ physician. J& JL> tairuu a bird.

es.

UM sa'atun an hour.

\

strong,

violent.

.jLuLs>-

s hadidun

a man,

servant.

jadldun new.

(khadimatunamaid,

waladun

a boy.

I

servant.

28

First Part.

rauti'un obedient

malikatun a queen.

qahirun conquering.

(gharibun setting (of the sun).

nazifun clean.

(tuffahun apple

jiwazzun goose (

(

Jshajarun tree

maiyitun dead.

j

Exercise

name

(a

(collective).

(collective).

(collective).

3.

of Cairo)

jB

j3 jii

Transcription.

aljaddu kablrun.

alibaljaddatu kablratun. hali 'ijuuaiuatu salifrun. na atni 'ljunainatu kuwaiyisatun. kuwaij'isatun. sa atun hasanatun. addaru jadlalbaitu qadltnun. datun. 'arummu hasanatun. alwaladu hadirun. rlhun shadldatun. arrihu shadldatun. a'anta c ta'banu. na'ara aoa ta banu: hal anta 'Iqadi.

natu 'aghlratu.

ibnun c

c

-

20

Third Lesson.

alihatun. la hiya hal hiya ana 'lhaklmu. ashshamsu t&li'atuu. ashshajaratu alkhadimatu mutfatun. 'Imuzillatu. mi?ru 'Iqaal'iwazzu t^irun. hiratu. alyadu nazlfatun. la

qablhatun.

aFiwazzatu

'Iraaiyitatu.

Exercise

The mother

is

4.

A

present.

No, the garden

garden lerge? house is small.

The wind

is

great fire. small.

Is the

is

The new

violent.

Art thou

the grandmother? Yes, I am the grandmother. - The beautiful The king is just and daughter. The setting sun. the queen is beautiful.

(fern.)

*

,-*+

Third Lesson.

<>

9 "

Number. 1.

There are three numbers in Arabic: Singular

Dua|

(Oji* rnufrad),

muthauna

()j&*

or &AJ&J tathniya)

9.o *

and Plural (** 2.

^either

jam*).

The Dual masc. or

formed by adding to the wor4

is

fern.)

the tennination

o

aini for the other

ani for the

t

cases,,,

e.g.

malikun a king; malikani two kings glb> (noni.); o^

^IXL* " /

3JX*

queens

In

added.

two kings (other , ,

malikatun

(noni.)

Note. suffix is

raalikaini

a

^IHJU the

fern,

cases).

,

queen ,-,oXU malikatani two malikataini

the

a

is

two queens (other

changed to

o

whenever a

30

First Part.

3.

The

a)

The Sound

Plural

of two kinds:

is

formed by the addition of endings

to the singular.

(^u j-l

plural

word and in some cases with au ending Lessons 4 and 5).

The Sound

4.

plural masc. of

js_formed by adding ^3-

and ^j

_ ma

assalim)

'aljain

r

?

The Broken

b)

c

5^!

plural (jJl^Jl

aljam

as well.

nouns and

jana

the

for

almu-

for the other cases^ after the

adjectives.

nominative case-ending

pf the nominative singular has been dropped, e.g. Plural Nona.

Singular.

other cases.

Plural,

r*^

malikuna.

8

nialiklna:

'

kathlrun.

kathlruna.

The .Sound jglural JBg ot

_

-

of feminines ~~ ~

~,

ot_L

atun into

jitun for

the other cases,

J.tin for

>.

kathlrln'a.

formed by chang-

is

the nominative and

e.g.

Plural Norn.,

Singular. G,

'-'

^

khadimatun a maid-servant. OU^'L> khadimatun. Plural, other cases.

khadimatin. Note. 6,

Some feminine nouns

take a masculine sound plural, t

-

eg. ioLw sanatun

a year Plur. ...^-Lw sinlina; some masculine

nouns also take a feminine sound o

,

--

plural, e.g. ,;,!_***-

hayawanun

-

animal, Plur. Ou!_j-o> hayawanatun. 5.

gender

Adjectives agree with their nouns not only in "'(see

LTess.

2,

2)

but^alsojn niugoer^excepT

Third Lesson.

31

,-

when

the noun is injhe* Sound fern, plur.tbe. usually in the femT singular, though Tt'ig in thjB fern, plur. when persons are indicatedT ocrflgionftlly ^

ttdjective la

5)

Broken

'plurals being originally^Collectives, take, the.

jjdjectjreJn_JJie_fem.

sinft.

(see

Lessons 4 and

5).

Examples of the regular agreement: Ikhadimun hasanun a good |

-

:

.

-

^ L> -

-

fui)

(beauti-

servant,

fkhadimatun hasanatun a good maid\

servant.

Ikhadimani hasanani two good serIkhadimatani hasanatani two good I

maid-servants.

^is>- ^^-olA- khfidimuna hasanuua good servants.

Example

of exception a): :

(khadimatuu hasanatun good maid8ervauts>

or as the l>L*M^>

G.

noun

indicates persons

o'wcJL> khadimatun hasanatun.

The personal pronouns

^ -

,

huwa

he.

>

are:

Ihuma they two

>

^

(hum they masc..

hiya she. junta

thou

(masc.).

antuma ?

-.^f

(

7. y, (masc. and

rn..

5

fantum you

, |

antunna vou

em ^

.:*

(ana I (masc.

and

fern.

^

a^'

jnahnu !

I

we

(masc. and

fern..

First Part.

Exercise 5.

6,

Fourth Lesson.

33

Transcription,

alrnu'alliinu 'sgalihu. c al ainam 'llami'atani.

almu'allimnua salihflna. almu'allimetu hadiratun.

antum mabsutuna.

hal

lailatani

wanaharani.

la

nahnu

za'lanuna. na'ani

hali 'Iqadl inashghfllun.

alkhabbazuna mujtahidtina. huwa mashghulun. alibnatani gha'ibatani. alkhaiyatu wa'lkbaiyatatu inashghulani. alkhaiyatttna wa'lkhaijatatu muytahidana. almuslimtlna 'salihuna. waladani la'ibSni. alharatu nazifatun. Exercise

6.

clean. The teachers are present. Are you (two) inflashing eye. Are you vexed? dustrious? Yes, we are busy. The Moslem is pious. No, I am contented. They The beautiful tailoresses are (raasc.) are absent. The is industrious. The boy night is present. dark. The servants and maid servants are tired.

The quarter

(of the

A

is

town)

is busy. Two busy physicians. clean hands. Are the bakers idle? Yea, the carpenters are idle, they are tired.

The physician

Two and

Fourth Lesson.

The Broken

Plural.

Arabic words with few exceptions Explanation. (see Note) consist of three consonants called Radicals together with certain vowels and sometimes prefixes or To indicate patterns or type-forms of words suffix^. Arabian grammarians use the three consonants Jja the

o

representing the

and the ^ the to

third e.g.

be of the form

Go

first

G

radical,

olf

the

^

the second

kalbun "a dog"

is

9,2

said

S o*

O

Juts;

.^S of the form Juoe; Ji> (for

o

} ,

.>

c'f

of the form Jjii; *y\ 'ahmaru "red" of the form T : ;

^Ji

of the form

Arabic Grammar.

^^Ufc

J?^1U

of the form

,

8

34

First Part.

A

Note.

JJUs

few Arabic words have four radicals; The pattern

used for them.

is

There are 31 patterns of tbe^Brokeg,PJiiral (Less. 3, A complete list of theslTTs given in Lessons 39 and 40. Among the most frequently used are? 3).

.

t

I

3lJf

a)

ffr\ '

Q

"a

boy '*

....

'auladun plur. of jjj waladun

;

(j*5js!

o

'afrasun plur. of

,.

of

UujZ

same way are formed the

the

farasun "a horse";

^j -

'ashrafun plur.

J-af >

i1

e.g. ^5,5

1

sharffun

"noble".

In

plurals of J*ib tfflun "a

Go, baby"; ^lax matarun "rain"; .^i^ waqtun "time".

3ji

b)

e.g.

;

'usuduu

_^

buhurun

plur. of

jJJ

plur. of o

^ bahrun

'asadun

"a

lion";

o

.*

shuhndun

"sea";

j^Ui shahidun "a witness";

plur. of

o ^*

of/j^>haqqun "a

fyuqtlqun plur.

way G

4

O

In the same

are formed the plurals of JJbs qalbun "a heart"; 6

t,,

j^i> jundun "an army"; G

^

right".

JLS

c)

G

.

-

5JU malikun "a king". G c-

,

kilabun plur. of ^JLT kaibun "a

e.g. vjtki'

dog"; JL^, rijalun plur. of J^>, rajulun "a

formed the plurals of UU> jabahm "a mountain";

also are
rumhun "a d)

man"; so

.Us

e.g.

>, "a book";

..j^

spear";

j^

kablrun "great".

waf kutubun '

mudunun

of \J&3 kitabun ' '. o, of *JuJw madlnaftun

plur.

plur.

,

"a

city";

^^

sufunun

e)-jJts! e.g.

river";

'

^\

^J5

plur. of

'anhurun plur. of ^i nahrun "a

'ashhurun plur. of

J 'arjulun

w saftnatun "a ship".

y_'.^o

^&

plur. of J^L. rijlun '

shahrun "a month"; "a

foot".

36

Fourth Lesson.

Vocabulary. a word indicate that the Plural of the form given under that letter in this lesson. G o

The small

letters after

wasikhun a'bun

dirty.

hard,

diffi-

cult.

a way.

'ilmun

know-

j(b) \

ledge, science. c

nafi

-

un

useful.

galihun honest.

l(c)

u^ &??

sahilun easy.

pious,

$

^ JU* jb'o

harisun watchful.

the

->

oi ^ji Jalfuratu

Euphrates.

i

tarlquu

(d)

tawllun long.

Ju >

is

mukhlisun honest. sarfun swiftalmadl the past e

al att

(b)

the high.

saifun

qatiun

e"

,oS

9

^

O

a sword.

cutting.

First Part.

a

>

* C.2&S

Transcription.

huwa kitabun

c

kutubun sa batuu. wa'shshamu madlnatani hasanatani. almudunu arulumu nafituruqun eahilatun. kuwaiyisatun. ashshurutu sa'batun. 'atuD. huququn thabitatun. sa'bun.

raisru

huwa shahidun

shuhfldun silahun. alkilabu 'lharisatu. alqulubu sufunun sarfatun. al'afrasu hasa'linukhli^atu. natun. arauladu mutl'ftna. al'amtaru 'shshadldatu. alkalbu

salihun.

harisun.

al'auqatu 'Imadiyatu.

hurufu "rarabiyatu.

hum

'ikablratu.

aljibalu 'aliyatun.

nasun kibaruu. Exercise

The dogs cult

- The

are swift Difficult

way.

Arabic

manent

8.

and watchful.

ways.

The

letters are difficult.

An

rights.

al-

al'anhuru

assuyofu qati'atun.

It is a diffiindustrious boys.

They

are (^) per-

The high

honest heart.

mountains are beautiful. Are you great people? The No, .we are honest people. -- Useful books. Arabian cities are dirty. The Arabian sciences are The swords are long. difficult. The Nile and The past month. Euphrates are two great rivers.

The

little

babies.

Fifth

1.

Further forms of the Brpken Plural are: '

,f)

Vezir,

Lesson.

^las e.g.

minister";

9

-..

*!^j

wuzara u

*fy>!

plur. of

.

^

'umara'u plur. of

wazlrun -y*!

a

'amlrun

Fifth Lesson.

plur. of

sufara'u

"a prince"; *Jy --

87

"O

'usara'u

ambassador"; t\f*\

plur.

saftrun

^A^,

t>

"an

3

^!

of

'asiruri

"a

captiv".

This

form

a very

is

common

when they denote

^fjta

plural for words of the

persons.

-

iSUsi

g)

*SX*I

e.g.

'asdiqa'u

dlqun "a friend"; *llol 'anbiya'u

plur. of

"a prophet"; iL^J 'aqriba'u plur. of

^oy

relative"; *U*e! 'aghniya'u plur. of Js

o^*5

*

**a

O

ghanlyun

"rich".

^

,

fursanun plur. of ^.b farisun a-X G

buldanun

plur.

,,

of jjb

baladun "a

AL^ a 1

O

, o

oUxos

district";

qarlbun "a

>

o u-/

e.g. - o>

o t^b

rider";

*j

G -o

S ^oi h)

of

plur.

qudbanuu

plur. of <>.yC3i

qadlbun "a

rod, sceptre". 2.

Nouns with

four radicals (JJbe) have the follow.-

ing Broken Plurals: i)

JJL

e.g.

kaukabun "a

^^=\^=> kawakibu

star";

batun "an attempt".

y^'

tajaribu

In the same

j^>

office";

ijUS i

way

Cl-a

are formed the

jauharun "a jewel"; ~_~-^-+ maktabun

"a school, k)

plur. of iL?^' tajri-

.O-ci^

O_ti.,

plurals of

J***

plur. of ._*-*j^-~

x*xL maktabatun "a

library".

e.g.

fanajlnu

O*o from

Q^*

^ finjanun "a cup".

~ ,

.oU^> sanadlqu from -.

U*. khanazlru from

vjOx5 suudut^m "a coffer". O

o

J->

khinzlrun "a pig".

38

First Part.

In

same way are formed the

the

O

plurals

from

Jo-

sultanun "a sultan"; oyjCo maktubun "a

letter":

qindilun "a lamp"

This form .is used for tbe_ plural of all words^ of^ four radicals which have a long voweMjetween Ihe third arid fourth radicals.

e.g.

form used specially

AJJLs a rare

1)

6

for living beings

9

r

jo^Ljtalamidhatunpl.of js^Jij tilmldhun "a scholar"

The

3.

following words deserve special notice:

5o, ibnun

^[

'-

-

"a son

I^ur-

- os

,

QJ^J banflna or 2Luf

'abua'un.

'ibnatun or o^iJ bintun "daughter,

'akhun

"brother",

plur.

_jj>!

girl", plur.

'ikhwatun

or

'ikhwanun. *

O

o

&

{>

c^>t 'ukbtun 'Note

1.

"sister", plur.

Some nouns have two

, ~

$

o!^>t 'akbawatujQ. or

more forms of Broken

O

G , bahrun "sea" has j^^ buhurun, j^^- biharan, SKO -&Z abhuran and ^j^t abhSrun. j3R? Note 2. Some words have different forms of the Broken 6.0.

Plural

e.g.

1 -

^,

o,

Plural with different meanings

e.g.

c>uO baitun means "a bouse" o

or "a verse of poetry".

In the former sense the Plural

is

o

.*

buydtun, in the latter

oLoi

abyatun.

Vocabulary.

9

-

c,li farighun

empty. O

u*^

naftsun precions.

*

f*^=> karlmun noble. (Other words in the lesson.)

,1

Fifth Lesson.

Exercise

39

9.

Transcriptioii.

walwuzara'u gha'ibUna. annasu agdiqa'u mukhli^una. maalbuyutu- Taliyatu kuwaiyisatun. aghniya'u. kfitibu nafi'atun. arrimalju assalatinu kibaruu. basatmii hasanatun. almu'allimana tawllatun. mabsfttttna wa'ttalacaidhatu mujtahidHna. a^undt?.qu hadirftua

assufara'u

aslran.

farighun. 'Ikabiratu.

'nnaftsu.

buldanim ghanlyatun.

albi^aru (albuhttru)

al'aqriba'u humu Ta^diqa'u. aljauharu annafsu 'Ikarlmatu. albanQna mujta-

bidQna wa'lbanatu muti'atun. Exercise 10.

The cups

The

pigs are animals. princes and ministers are is long. present. Long letters. Noble souls. The scholars are busy. The boys are contented, they are playing. The horsemen are tired. Are the ambassadors present? No, they are absent. Are you relatives? Yes, and we are friends. The big coffers. The jewels are precious. Beautiful verses. The brothers and sisters are present and the sons and daughters are absent.

The Sultan

is

are empty.

just. The letter

The

40

First Vart.

Sixth Lesson.

Declension. 1.

There are three cases in Arabic: the -Nominative Genitive,

(js. raf),

6

and .Accusative

oblique or prepositional Qi. jarr) " * *' _

(v_^aj nasb).

These cases are expressed: When the word originally has junation -M#~ whether it be a inasc. sitig. or fern. sing, or broken * ~by the endings un,in, an, (written plural 2.

a)

,*

I

}.

,(X/IV

^^ W>^-^^D) When

M

for the

-

the word has originally nojaunatinn hy_ foi the other caees^

nom., and a

When

the word is defined by the article or a in the genitive whether it baa nunation or not originally by_u, i, a.

word

following

Examples. a)

Nora

L* sariqun

4<

Gen. Ace. b)

^

u- sariqin. ;

o^Jj

^ioLi. i^'u* sariqan.

^UJ!

assfiriqu.

o^l

5!

auladin.

khadimatan. |j^J auladan.

Nom. i^imakkatu "Mecca",

Nom.

auladun "children".

*/o,j> khadimatin.

/^jjLLoanadlqu

Gen. and Ace. ixi makkata. c)

Jol3- khadimatun

a thief".

"a maid-servant".

vi^Jjf

(^oU*>

v^bi

"coffers".

?anfidlqa.

sahibu-'lbaiti

"the master of the house"

Gen. Ace.

^jUJl jUJ!

assariqi.

v**3\ ^s>\^>

sahibi-'lbaiti.

assariqa.

^2\

sahiba-'lbaiti.

vlo-L

41

Sixth Lesson.

Note

A

1.

word without + O >

Arabian grammarians

Note

-

^5

2.

Words which end

in

^5 preceded by kasra contract >

iynn and ^5

into

iyin into

in

qsdin "a judge"

(jtolS

for

.OS alqfidl;

(gen.) ^yto'JUl

<jS<Jiyin

:

iyu and ^5-^

^5

In the Sound plural they drop the

t.

G

e.g.

not (per-

i.e.

declined, (see Less. 41).

fectly.)

e

munsarif j*c ghair

<-3.*aJu

by the

original tan\vjn is called td *

^

S qsdiyitn (nom.) or ^Sflfe '

^

-o

J

"the judge" for alqadiyn ^^toLaJl '

Other forms

qSdfna.

altogether

. ]

^oz* (nom.) or ^toli^t alqadiyi (gen.) Plural, gen. -yutoS

^

iyi

.

nom.

i

*

Q>^^

are nncontracted

qadana:

e.g.

(ace.).

Note

3. The forms of the dual and plural have already been given in Lesson 3 so that the declension of the noun is

now

complete. 3. All prepositions

ixi

govern the genitive, thus; bustanin "in a garden";

ft

"in" as

ft

makkata "in Mecca". "on"

'ala

ji

o lilj

ft

as jll

j^

'ala

'Ijibali

"on the

ruountaius".

J

li

(see Intro. c,,

as

for"

"to,

11,

4

jJJJJ

the boy"

lilwaladi

"for

^

'Ibuyuti "from

c).

min "from"

as o^ljl

mina

the houses". 4.

The

relation of a

ois

O

called

word and

idafa;

the

following genitive

governing word o*

>

raufjaf

its

-

&U?t

and the

genitive &Jt

G

.

is

called

>

oLL*

inudaf

ilaihi.

42

First

The word

that governs a genitive

but never takes the

means

"tlie

Jw>pl

Part,

article,

is

itself definite

thus Jo*, c^xl baitu rajulin

house of a man".

^&

baitu

'rrajuli

means

"the

house of

the man".

W

hen the governing word is^indefiiiite the prepositiQn"Timusi_be puT beSre_the followingjgenitim eg. i "GO, oyo baitun lirrajuli "a house of the man"; or u

Jc^LS

i

one

may

say

&

-s

}>

JoJl o_^o

'rrajuli (literally)

(i

Q^

O o,

oyo

baitun rain buyuti

"a house from the houses of the man". Vocabulary.'

43

Sixth Lesson.

*x

Transcription,

alfarisu 'ala gha'ibuni 'lyauma. zahri 'Ifarasi. al'amlru gha'ibun khadimu Tamtri ft'ddari. miftahu babi'lbaiti. abwabu 'Imadlnati maftuhatun. basatinu urnaru sahibun lizaidin. 'shshami masbhttratun. kalbu 'Iwaladi harisun. 'Ibaiti

?ahibu

c

kutubu

'ttalamidhati

dinati

nazlfatun.

qasru Tamlri

'rrajuli.

'aliyatun.

nahnu a?diqa'u buyQtu 'ima-

fi'lraadlnati.

arrijalu

badirOna

ft'lmajlisi.

ra'su 'Ibikmati makbafatu zaujatu 'Iqadl hasanatun. antum 'llahi. baitun min buyUti Taralri ft'ssUqi. hadirQna ft bustani 'Ijari. aljrau qabla 'ddari 'rraftqu

qabla Exercise 12. Is the

he

is

master of the servant in the house?

in the

You

garden of the neighbour.

friends of the

man.

The merchant

is

No,

are the present in the

44

First Part.

market of the city. The door of the house is open. - The man's dogs (dogs of the man) are watchful.

The king's ministers are present in the council. Is The physician is absent and the physician present? the wife of the physician is present to-day, -r Ahmed The gardens of the city is a friend of the judge. The relatives of the physician are rich. are spacious.

Seventh Lesson.

The Genitive (continued). 1.

final

o

The Dual and Sound plural masc. lose their with its vowel when they are followed by a thus the ending

genifiye;

o

ani

t

becomes

!_L_ a,

'

^j ata,

becomes ^5

aini

^-jAj

comes ^

u,

ai,

becomes

ataini

atani becomes ifJL

&

o

^~

Ina becomes

^j I

baita 'rrajuli

atai,

^

una be-

O3 I,

e g.

the two houses of the

man.

I

(

baitayi 'rrajuli the two doors -of the two houses of the man.

I

ibnata 'Iwazlri the two daughters of

jbaba -o-

c

,.0

Uij^

jjj^jjj

,.0-

'


,

o,

^^

^e

j

minister.

'Iwazlri the house of (baitu 'bnatayi the two daughters of the minister. \ c

}mu allima I

The words .*>.

teachers of

c

mu alliml

\J\

abun

"father",

9,

"brother",

the

'Iwaladi the books of the teachers of the boy.

kutubu

(

2.

'Iwaladi

the boy.

I

~J

o

akhun

>

hamun

"father-in-law",

^o dhu "master,

Seventh Lesson.

45

possessor" (only used with a genitive), pi famun take the following forms before a genitive:

Norn.

_,j|

jL\ _^+=>

aba

Ace.

akhtt

hamu

33

dhu

^

fd

Gen.

Cl.aba li-J.

,,

Us.{o

13

akha

ham

"mouth"

abi

\

akhl

^s>\

3,

,,

dha

^-

haml dhi

^j

fa

ft.

Thus:

abu rauhammadin Mohammed's - f

darabtu aba zaidin

I

father.

struck

Zaid's

father.

\

u dhi husnin the face of the beautiful man (literally "of- the possessor of beauty").

A

word cannot be separated from a genitive to it, therefore if it is qualified by an adjective" the adjective must be put after the gemtive (and have the article), e.g. 3.

jjelongring

baitu

"Ivrazlri

'Iwasi'u

"the

spacious house of the Vezir". An alternative form would be: c

albaitu 'iwasi

u

lilwazlri.

4. If the genitive refers to two nouns T it must follow the first 'while the second takes the suffix "of the personaL pronoun (see Lesson 8) e.g-.-

baitu 'the Vezir's

J^b^,.

hands

(dual)

'Iwazlri

wabustanuhu

house and garden".

o^J? and

ijJ yada Ubinti warijlaha "the

feet (dual)".

girl's

First Part.

46 5.

The

denote material of flesh"; 8^|S T_'..fi.;V

6.

e.g.

^2

used_partitivel^__andjfco

x,k3 qifatu Jahmin "a piece

finjanu qahwatin "a cup of coffee";

J^-S

khashabin "a seat of wood". ijHyf kurslyu

The

genitive often occurs after an adjective to

define or limit

i.e.

standing)

its

application,

e.g.

of understanding"

"little

Taqli

often

genitive is

.^ kathlru

"stupid"; ^Ul

of wealth" i.e. "rich"; "beautiful of face".

(i.e.

Jjl*J!

&&

je>^J!

J^is

qalllu

as regards under'Imali

"abundant

hasanu 'Iwajhi

Note. This genitive is improper and elands in place of a defining accusative, hence the rule in Lesson 6, 4 does not apply to the word before it, which can take the article when it is definite e.g.

O,

O

,

}* ,

,0.0

,P<,

,(MI

t ,0

'Iwazlri 'lhasanatu

'Iwajhi ha^iratun "the beautiful daughter (lit. "the daughter the beautiful of face") of the Vezir is present".

7.

Some nouns

are used in Arabic with a following where in English an ad-

genitive denoting a quality,

Cj

jective

These nouns are such

used.

is

as

^oU? '

6 ,0

sahibun,

plur.

dhQ, dual, fore sing.

|jO

>

oL^I ashabun dhawa

the genitive),

(with omission of the final

plur.

o!J dBatu, dual abtt

"possessor"; _^|

ibnu "son",

"master, possessor";

^ dhawu

b'l>3

jt

be-

and the feminine

dhata, plur. o!^>3

"father";

^

^

unimu

dhawatu

"mother";

e.g.

sahibu 'ilmin "master of learning i -

> '

e

learned".

of beauty jdhatu husnin "possessor " i.e.

beautiful

47

Seventh Lesson.

*

f

jj\

|

'

*

OT

I 1

abu j

e

lisanaini "father of

two tongues

dissembling".

ibnu khamslna sanatan "son of 50 years i.e. 50 years old". Vocabulary.

bakrin

Abu

)abu Bekr, (name of

e

j*

khubzun bread,

I

I

a man).

hadldun

qabilatun a tribe. j

j

an old man, head of a

banQ asadin (sons

Ishaikhun tribe, Sheikh.

of a lion), name of an Arabian

|

tribe.

1

J

f

bukhlun

{

liness.

zillun o

know-

ledge. lie.

mieer-

tujratun a room.

shadow.

I

(

O

ma'rifatun

kidhbun a

jamalun beauty. <

iron.

matbakhun a kitchen.

>

zuhdun abstinence. j^j s-'

*~^

(luqmatun a \

bit (of

bread, ineat&c.).

nisfi'un

women,

o

>?

Exercise 13.

tajirun a merchant.

48

First Part.

Transcription.

mu'allirnQ

'Iqablhu

f

"Iwaladi

huwa abu

ibuata 'Iwazlri 'Iwasi'u mafttthun.

'Ibaiti

Taqli.

arrajulu

ibnu abl bakria kahasanata 'Iwajhi. bSbu

tblru'lmali.

huwa qalllu qabllatu

ilmin.

a^habu

lisanaini.

tial

huwa dhn

kutubu dhawl

Mlinin? La,

'ilmin nafi'atun.

ban! asadin hiya qabilatun rnina Tarabi. zaujatu 'lhakimi hiya dhatu husnin wa jamalin. hali Tamlru karlmu 'nnafsi. la huwa kathlru 'Ibukhli. - aslishajaratu dhatu zillin. zuhdu abl bakrin mashhurun. 'aina 'bnati 'Jqadl lauii'atani. qit'atu lahrain kablratun. finjanu luqinatu kliubzin saghiratun. ? kurslyu hadidiu ft lbustani. 'Jqahwati hadirun.

shaikhu

'Iqabilati "Ikathiru 'ImUli salil.iun.

Exercise

14.

The boys are stupid. The stupid boys are The physicians (Broken plur. f) are learned. present. The men The girls (Less. 5, 3) are beautiful. -

-

present are learned and the women present are beautiful. The tailor is bad, he is a liar (father of lying). Abu Bekr's servant is present and the two maidThe cups servants of Abu Bekr's brother are absent. are in the room.

One

No, they are

()

in the kitchen.

of the sons (a son of the sons) of the sheikh

50 years old. Is the merchant rich? rich and miserly (much of miserliness). are the friends of kings (Plur.

b).

is

Yes, he is The learned

49

Eighth Lesson.

Eighth Lesson.

Pronominal Suffixes. 1.

The Personal Pronouns

in two (^A^? damlr) jxist

9

forms:

a)

Independent

damir munfasil) or

attached as Snffires to nouns,

b)

O

verbs or prepositions

o>

standing alone

i.e.

a>

(J*aX/>

O

.^

damn* muttasil).

The

Independent forms have already been given in Less. 3, 6). 2. The forms used when attached to words are:

Dual

Sing. rd

Masc.

rd

Fern.

3 3

2 nd Masc.

2nd Fern. 1

hu l

2 ^

,

U* huma

i hunna.

ka

U kuma .->

|

.

J,

I/ kum. ^

^

^ kunna.

ki

(with a verb 3.

+& hum.

ha

Masc. and Fern. ^5

st

Plur.

-

I

li

na.

*

nl).

These Suffixes attached jp^ a noun correspond

pur Possessive Pronoun

e.g.

wb^

to

kitabuhu "his book":

attached to a verb or preposition they answer to our^

Personal Pronoun in the objective case

e.g. &j^t>

darabahu

"be struck him"; &ix minhu "from him".

Note 1. Nouns to which these suffixes are attached employ the forms which they have before a genitive i.e. they drop the nunation and in the dual and plur. the ,; while the words

OS vj! the

Os

O,

j,\

f>

1st

pers.

have the forms given in Lesson 7 (except that with %

pron. sing, they become ^1 abl,

s

^=>\

akhi,

hami).

Ambic Grammar.

4

^J?

50

First Part.

Note

The

2.

suffixes s

UP hums

hu,

*# hum are

ancf

a

changed

to

UP

hi,

ending in

^

i,

book", f froi

Note

him when attached

p$>

or (j

1

to a

word

XJuJ' kitabihi "of his

ai e.g.

kitabaihim "of their two books".

*>

The

8.

hima and

+5 kum and

suffixes

kumu and p& humu when

hum become

<*P

*-*

they are followed by a word beginning

with hamzat alwasl.

Note is

ya after

always ^c

The

4.

possession

\Iic 'alaihi

which

j

li

attached (e.g.

person sing.

.

'inda "with,

ji

the

to

5 .xic

1 st

'ala

"on",

pronominal

^U

"to, for"

t

ila

suffixes

'indahu "in his possession",

^.x^

'alaiya

the

in

in,

"on him") except in the case of the

as follows:

"from me",

_

jur.

f

is

^5

I

cr min "from"

are

without change

of the

suffix

a vowelless

prepositions

of",

unto"

"to,

The pronominal

4.

indl "with me",

"upon me", \\

assumes the form

'\

ilaiya

la before

st except with the 1 person which

is

^

li

1 st

person

^ix minnl "unto me".

the

suffixes

"to me".

in Arabic

"to have" is usually expressed not by a verb but by the prepositions ^.

jUc

ma' "with"; thus "Zaid has a book" may be

5.

The English verb

or ^>

expressed

6.

may

be

it

by

The

oji^a

particle

expressed

0!

JsjJ

or

in Arabic

or

Oh! by

j

i_ilv^^

in

jo:

forms^of

Jw
or

address

ya with the following

Eighth Lesson.

51

word in the nominative without pupation e.g. j^ C ya zaidu "oh Zaid", but with the followipg word iu the accusative if that is followed by a gepitive e.g. ?

\>

ya saiyida nnasi "oh Lord of

For further

details see

Lesson

(the)

men"-

16.

Vocabulary. e

<-

between, - jbaina { among. --

;3

I

a ishatu

Jwaraqun paper

Ayesha,

(name of woman).

\

thread.

khaifan

(collective).

\

qalamun a reed,

ismun name,

pen. ,j>

--

hibrun ink.

sa'atun hour, watch.

zainabu Zainab

j

dhahabun

(name of woman).

}'

gold.

'abdu 'rrahmani saiyidun

|

master,

Abdurrahman, (name of man,

lord.

1

"the servant of the

saiyidatun mistress,

literally

lady. f

mahmudun Mahmud,

I

|

j

(name

Merciful").

of

?

x

|

hasanun Hasan, (name of man).

fiddatun

himfirun

an

man). r

>{

fatimatun Fatima,

1

(name of woman). Exercise 15.

(*J

slave,

servant.

silver.

J

abdun a

ass.

au I

?

j

or.

hindun Hind, (name of woman).

52

First Part.

Exercise 16.

sons, the name of the the (name) of the younger servant, is the physician pre(small) is Hasan. sent? No, (0) my master, the physician is absent; the wife and son of the physician (Less. 7, 4) are present. Hast thou a gold watch (watch of gold) or a I have a silver watch, silver one (watch of silver)? Have you horses (plur. a)? Yes, (0) my master Are my servants in the we have horses and asses. market? No, your servants are in the garden. brother's wife is beautiful (beautiful of face).

Abdurrahman has two

older

(great)

is

Mahmud,

O

1

My my

mistress,

Yes, servant.

I

am

art'

thou content with

content.

He

is

(Q,)

thy slave?

content with his

53

Ninth Lesson.

Ninth Lesson.

Demonstrative Pronouns.

The Demonstrative Pronoun

1.

al-'ishara) in

dha

for

all

simplest form

its

Dual nom.

cases;

^jj dhaini; Feminine, Sing. tihi,

ace.

if

ta for all

^AJ

cases;

O

^3

!J>'

lo

dhani, gen. and ace.

dbl,

8

Dual nom.

o dhihi, ls

CJ

tani,

j

tl,

ao

gen. and

taini.

Plural for both genders and

*^t

Masculine Sing,

is:

cases j^t ula or

all

ula'i.

These forms are however rarely used. 2.

The words

IP (written fixing

simple forms above.

They

Sing. masc. IJ^P

Dual masc. nom. Gen. and

3.

adding

ace.

^p

&

ka

(in

the simple forms. Sing. masc.

for

some

They

M

for

to

some of

the^

Fern.

j^>

cases.

all

a tOJ> hadhani.

^j^

1),

all cases.

hadhaini.

ha'ula'i for

The words

6,

note

are:

hadha

hadhihi (rarely ^j^>) for

Plural

formed by pre-

for ^tbis, these" are

9 see Intro.

Fern.

olip hatani.

Fern. Joii hataini.

both genders and

"that,

those"

cases with

are

all cases.

formed by

interpolated ^)

Jto

are:

dhaka or

5Uo dhalika;

taka or >^Lu tika or usually w^l> tilka for

all

fern.

&s

54

First Part.

Dual masc. noin. y5o!J dhanika or ^5o!6 dhannika; and

gen.

^ijJ dhainika

ace.

^j

Fern.

nom.

y&Lu

tainika or

ace.

Plural u&ftjt

-I

if

the

tilaka or

all cases.

these

is

suffix !J^>

e.g.

article

defined by a following genitive. the demonstrative isplaced

^

^JJ\

son of the king" "this book of yours". "this

|j^>

ibnu

fXAxs'

'Imaliki

hadha

kxtabukum hadha

5. If the demonstrative is used pronominally as subject of a nominal sentence, then: a) If is

the predicate

necessary

a book

e.g.

e.g.

'Ikftabu "this book".

noun

pronominal

after

^!

(more rarely

both genders and

hadha

jJ>

But a

tainnika.

and the noun Jakes the

precedes~it

vjutfdT

or

Lu

If the__demonstrative qualifies a simplejaoun.

4. .it

tanika or ^fJs tannika; gen. and

ula'ika

ulalika) for

i

L,3 dhainnika.

or

is

an

and

no copula

indefinite noun,

\o& hadha kitabun."this

u>lii=9

is

.

b) If the

predicate

is

defined

by the

the

article

3rd pers. pron. is used as a copula to prevent the demonstrative from being taken adjectivally (as in 4) e.g. oJ^J!

jp

!JNJ>

hadha huwa 'Iwaladu

"this is the boy".

defined by' a following genitive or a pronominal suflix, the demonstrative is put first c) If

the predicate

and no copula your book". 6.

The

is

is

needed

e.g.

^jGbsa

Interrogative pronouns.

alistifham) are

^

man

"who", U

ma

!J^>

(j,l$ix*/5S?

"this

^

is

ism

"what" (sometimes

Ninth Lesson.

55

a

- .

lou madha),

^5 aiyun fern, jul aiyatuu "which", kam "how much? how many?"

^ relation

is

indeclinable

is

expressed by placing

(^^^

The

mabnl). after

it

a

genitive

noun

e.g.

Q, obtf kitabu man "whose book?"

U is

is

written

also indeclinable.

as

<J' OaS

^

2

declinable

so takes a following

"which

noun

and

is

treated as a noun,

in the genitive e.g.

"which man?"

^j^

xll

J^

^

bintin

aiyatu

girl?"

^ {jjj

it

lima "for what? why?"

fern. iu| is t^!,

aiyu rajulin

some prepositions

After

takes the following

*y

noun

in the accusative e.g.

kam waladan "how many

boys?" o .

Note.

The

interrogative

J^ ) 1

particle*.

(I,

are

not used

before the interrogative pronouns.

Vocabulary. G

anlsun amiable,

qatilun killing.

shakhsun person.

,

Jahzun glance.

sababun cause.

qamusun dictionary.

muslbatun misJ

yLu manzarun o!o r

Vl Q_t

(

look.

ghaflatun careless-

(

fortune.

matlubun

desire,

{

\

ness.

imra'atun woman, (in distinction

man).

from

sanatun year. f

umrun

life.

56

First Part.

Exercise o ,

J

,

17.

,

G

\

^GjG,o

I

,

.

.

&lj

UJ

*$>*

,

s^

Jv?

U

UA

Exercise 18.

This is a good man and that (fern.) is a bad woman. This is the judge. This judge is upright and that These friends of thine are rich. physician is learned. This son of the sheikh is amiable and that daughter of his

is

beautiful (of face).

thy desire?

pen and

thou

I

master, what

desire) is

is

paper (and)

.

sons has Abdurrahman? this

O my

want (my

Who is the minister's son, this or that? the minister's son. Whose son is Hasan? is How the son of Abdurrahman.

ink.

- This is Hasan

many

What

book?

He

No, I have that.

Hast has five. This dictionary

57

Tenth Lesson.

is

I

What

useful.

How am 50

is

These two

of 50 years).

My name

thy name?

old art thou (how years old (my life

many is

is

years

50 years, or

men

is

thy I

Hasan. life)?

am

a son

are friends.

Tenth Lesson.

Adjectives. 1.

Some

of the commonest

IL[ ism

forms

of

adjectives

sifa) are:

the present participle)

a) J^cli fa'ilun (properly

A

e.g.

ft

*

ol* sadiqun "upright", i>U

'adilun

"just",

J^L>

jahilun "ignorant". G

b) J^uis

6 fa'llun e.g. .Xou* sa'ldun

kablrun "great",

c) Ojjii

^S

kathirun "much, many".

fa'ulun denoting intensity e.g. r,

Q^J*

fa'lanu

ta'banu "tired", 2.

J^> jahulun

j ^

"very ignorant", 3j*~S kasalun d)

6

"happy", y^

"very- lazy".

(without

U*iot

nunation)

e.g.

o lwu

ghadlbanu "angry".

Adjectives denoting colours or bodily defects

have the following form: Masc. sing, jj

afalu. 6 a}

Fern. sing. *Su

Plural for both genders Joe fu'lun.

fa'la'u.

58

First Part.

E.g.

Sing. Masc. ^M!

aswadu, black

uol

abyadu, white

j?\

ahmaru, red

blue ijjf azraqu,

akhdaru, green t\~. a?faru, yellow

atrashu, deaf (j*jZ>\

akhrasu,

<

e

^j4*\

a ma, blind

lame

_jc! a'raju, '

f

*

V^5

ahdabu,

\ *"'

1

humpbacked.

{

Notice the absence of nunation in the Sing.

Lesson

Note. -

-o

The

fern,

of the dual changes hamza into

3.

e.g.

saudSwani.

For the comparative and superlative of adjectives

so-called Elative

attaf^il).

It is

is

used, (the

always of the form

^J^> sa'bun "hard" yfJ:

.

.

Q^!O^M

the

(cf.

6, 3).

kablran "great"

Elative Elative

J^&Jt JoiiJ

^^

af alu,

ism

e.g.

vlJiIal

as'abu "harder".

'^\

akbaru "greater".

4. If the second and third radicals of an adjective are the same, they are written as one with the tashdid

in this form

(cf.

Less. 23); e.g. 3sjJs

shadldun "violent"

Tenth Lesson.

makes

oj^i)

(radicals

59

Elative JLif ashaddu;

its

J^IS qalllun "few", Elative J^t aqallu.

;

The_Elatiye as comparative

5.

numbers.

is

It is followed

the_same

by

the English "than", e.g.

is

**>

o

j+c

a

.

,02

Go-

jS\

j^

^o-

o

O

i , ttf

to express

zaidun akbaru min 'umara "Zaid

o

min

hindun akbaru

O^IP

j*f\

"Hind,

^

for all

Omar".

older than ,

(for

zainaba

older than Zainab".

is

^ +tj *o

+

>

oUJ!

* o

+

c-

-

j

c

S\

c

albanttna

i

'Ibanati "the sons are older

mina

akbaru

than the daughters".

6. The Elative as superlative is .always -defined by the article _or a following genitive or a pronpniijaaT

Its

j3uffix..

e.g.

^iHf

feminine

is

ji

fu'la

(see

Less.. 38,

5. c.),

al'akbaru "the greatest" (masc.) alkubra (j-^Xl!

"the greatest"

The

.

(fern.).

^

khairun "good" and ^i sharrun "evil" are used as Elatives with the meanings 7.

"better"

substantives

and "worse", js>

e.g.

huwa khairun minka "he

better

is

than thou". Vocabulary. latlfun pleasant.

o_p 6

wajnatun cheek. bahrun sea (used

U^.*f> -

women

(used as plur. of

colour.

aaifun ,

summer. ,

.

sharan hair

also for the Nile).

nisa'un

launun

o .

j^

-

thaqllun heavy

madrasatun

school.

First Part.

jami'un mos-

J&

que.

Tazaljami'u Ijam ham the mos-

'"

n&IL

a?lun

*f

1

haddun boundary, limit.

jazlratan 6

-

^ *

fsharlfun

,

noble.

I

-

albariha

o

yesterday (used in ace. as adverb.).

^3^

_,.,

8a llun

sbauqun yearning.

**,.

V/

gnarbun West.

Exercise 19.

.OE

j

(Less. 7, 6) W

^

J^Ji

os .

7,

J-.J

^|

6)

So>

^j

>,o

-o

yu,J

^^

_^

jJ

..)

iU^ >CM>

,0 c

, O^CK,

^

jif

*

(Less. 36, 7)

l3|

^

) . , o
s

o-o

- -

oc

Eleventh Lesson.

61

Exercise 20.

The girl's the yellow room. The black eyes of the girl are killing. The Red Sea is the boundary The. slave is black. The of the peninsula (island) of Arabia in the West. My house is more spabeggar is deaf and dumb.

The lame

girl is in

eyes are blue.

-

cious than thine (thy house), of the houses of the city.

This book

the 'Euphrates. (book),

is

it

The is

the most spacious Nile is wider than

better

(^^l)

than that

Most men

the best of the books.

jjJjJI literally

yearning for

is

it

"the most of the men") are

(&\ cf. Less. 8, 4) thee is

more

(jX~\

My

idle.

violent than

for thy brother."

Eleventh Lesson.

The Verb. 1.

The Verb

letters as vjotf

c

(J^s

fi

l)

has

three

radical

may have

four or

usually

kataba to write, but

more as ^-ji tarjama

to translate, (see Less. 30). Note. In 4ip.tioiia.riea the ArpKif- verb ia found iu the fprn\ the 3rd sing, masc. perf. active, while the infin. is given as e translation nf j Thus we say kataba "to write" although really means "he wrote". 2.

The 3 rd

sg.

masc.

first

and

perf. is of

the forms

juls,

jo '

or jots

i.e.

the

third radicals always have^ may have any one of the three i or uare generally intrangjtive v

a t Awhile jibe second a. i. u. verbs having anci jdenote a state or qualityl^those with! denoting^ ^

temporary state as

-j>.^

hazina, to be sad; while tthose

u denote a lasting or permanent state as hasuna, to be beautifuL

jyith

^

62

First Part.

The verb has two main

3.

the Perfect

tenses:

al-madi) denoting a finished action, and the

Jmperfect (^Laif

To

the

these

denoting unfinished action.

al-muflari')

Arabs add as a third the Imperative

al-amr).

The Perfect Stem

4.

vowel of the 3 rd Declined by adding last

3.

masc.

oJlat

3.

fern.

1.

m.a.

masc.

3. fern.

obtained by cutting pff the

Dual

Sing. 3.

is

sing, masc. perf. f and the perfect is to this stem the following endings^

a.

2.

masc.

o_ta

2.

fern.

o.

ti

1.

m. a. f.

o

tu

Plur.

_ f.

3.

!_'_a

ata

masc.

1.,u

3. fern.

U _ tuma 2.

o

masc.*?__turn i

2.

_na

fern,

1. rn. a.

^j'

f.

G

__tuuna

_

na.

Kg. Sing.

3.

|

masc.

(

2.

masc.

| }

2.

fern.

masc.

a.

3.

wrote).

katabta thou (man) hast written.

thou

(woman)

hast written

katabtu I have written.

fem. -

Dual

he

jkatabti j

1.

(or

katabat she has written.

3. fern.

,,

kataba he has written,

masc.

*

(kataba they two (men) have written.

1

--

3.

fkatabata

fera. I

2.

masc.

a.

fem.

)

\

they

two

(women) have written. katabtuma you two have written.

Eleventh Lesson. >

Plural

3.

f^T <-

-

3

'

- f

masc.

-

"

lem>

63

kataou they (men) have

{

fkatabna they (women) have written.

(

^ "

2.

masc.

*

,,

- -

<"

*

-

^xT

2.

fern.

1.

masc.

lllx/

a. fern,

f

katabtum you (men) have written

{

f

katabtunna you (women) haye

katabna we have written.

In the same way from verbs of the forms

and jj

fa'ila

ooyi

fa'ula

"she drank"

sharibat

^^S

"he was noble",

Jod

we have: yyi shariba "he drank", etc.:

from

^^a karuma

karumtu "I was noble"

etc.

The endings in the forma above are simply shortened forms of the personal' propQivr^sed as^nommativea except in the .Si* aing. maac. whereTEe a is unexplained, nythe 3^ sing, fem^ y here the at i_8.,tne" fern, ending and in the 3^ masc. plur. where Note.

the u

is simply the sign of tire plural. (The I in this last ending not pronounced and is introduced only to prevent the form being read at the beginning of the next word as "and".)

is

The chief rules predicate are: a) 'Jjf

When

for

6

the verb

the Concord of subject and o

(Jois

ffl)

precedes

the

subject

then:

al-fa'il)

1. If the subject is a sing. masc. or usually if it a dual masc. or a sonnd plur. masc. the verb is put in the 3rd sing. masc. is

fJuit

^JS

kataba 'Imu'allimu

T'n

^V

/kataba 'Imu'allimfmi the two teachers

o-^**

5

'

\

wrote.

kataba

-

|

the teacher wrote.

!

lmu allimuna

the

teachers

64

If the subject is a fern. sing, followed immeby the verb, or a dual fern, or a sound fern. or a broken plur., the verb is put in the

2.

diately plur.,

3rd

Part

First

sing. fern. | ( |

(

katabati 'Imu'allimatu (fem.) wrote.

(

viv^

fem

'Imu'allimatu

teacher

two

the

katabati 'linu'allimatani teachers (fem.) wrote. katabati

Jt

the

the

teachers

wrote

)

katabati 'ttalamidhatu the pupils wrote.

the subject is a sing. fem. not- immediately following the verb, or a collective (see Less. 2, 4), the verb may be in the 3rd sing. masc. or fem. 3. If

*f

v^

(vaJ^)

kataba

(or

katabat)

lahu

'Imu'allimatu, the teacher (fem.) wrote to him. xi*

-

jJafi

the birds

(viiJft)

(coll.)

jtf

ate of

akala (or akalati) 'ftairu minhu,

it.

comes first the verb must agree in gender and number,

b) If the subject

with

it

tjlfcjj

o>iLLlt

f&=>

hadara 'Imu'allimQna wadha-

habu, the teachers were present and went away. 6. Sentences according to Arabian grammarians are of two kinds:

The Verbal sentence (0**J!

a) fi'llya)

when

the verb (jJUj I)

(called in this case

J^UJ

f

is

n

iJuJ-t

al~jumla

al-

followed by the subject

al-fa'il) e.g.

kataba >oj JJaT

zaidun "Zaid has written". b)

ismlya),

The Nominal sentence

when

(il*-!^? idljl aj-jumla al-

the subject (here called IJJllI almubtada'

65

Eleventh Lesson.

"that (with which) predicate

begun" comes

is

alkhabar) be a noun or

(j+?-\

o

an adverbial clause or a verb

waladun "Zaid "Zaid

(he)

The

it

Jo

its ,,

jo

-Vj

equivalent, e

o,

j^

zaidun

zaidun

kataba

often put before the perfect be translated "already", be omitted in translation.

particle

may

qad

is

may sometimes

It

it.

strengthen

sometimes

vlja"

boy", has written".

Note. to

a

is

e.g.

whether the

first,

Vocabulary. -

r9

j

fahima

under-

to

"

v

c

j^

stand.

naharun day.

o

Oo,

saidun hunt,

OjS qaulun speech. --r

to

r

rise

(tala'a 1

;

| \

(of

qabila to receive.

the sun). the sun).

sham sun

guest,

to set (of

gharaba

kasara to break,

sun.

kubbayatun

glass,

qamarun moon. ba'atha -

to

fqasada {

after,

to

send,

strive

make

for.

fallahun peasant,

sa'ihun traveller.

hakimun governor. -

-

-

f

1

dakhala

g

to

enter,

into.

r

raja a to return.

'^>

kharaja to

(3jl

nazala to alight.

e

i\A

go. out.

ba'uda to be distant. towards,

ma'un

water.

j+> khamrun wine. ft

r.

about. {nahwa

nisfun half,

-

haushun courtyard. Arabic Grammar.

sa'atun hour.

66

First Part.

>j wajada to find. 2

f

tff

ghanfyun

He. - -

(plur. g)

v^

rich.

\

G

fariha to rejoice.

^5

jtalaba to seek,

3

1

require.

'

^>F r

fataha to open.

-06

ghulamun youth.

f

JJL>

ta'amun food. jalasa to

sit.

Exercise 21. ^

u ^

,b<

>,

-

,

.,

*

J

U

t

(Intro.

j

9)

r

ir

/

x

~

,

s.

(Intro.

11, 3)

Twelfth Lesson.

67

Exercise 22.

The verb

always to be put at the beginning of sentences.

is

Have you written your letters (plur. k)? Yes, we The beggar sought food have written our letters. The maidservant opened the door of the from me. Hast thou gone out to the hunt to-day? No, house. I did not go out to the hunt, I went into the city, Has the sun set? Yes, the sun has set (accus.). Mohammed and his sons and the moon has risen. entered the city and went out (dual) of it. The men sat. We returned from the hunt and sat. They drank (the) coffee. I received the guest at my house

O

this night.

(^JUc)

from the market?

O

the peasants.

I

maidservant, hast thou returned alighted

girl,

at the

house of

(j>J^)

hast thou understood what

I

say (my speech)?

Twelfth Lesson.

The Verb with 1.

When

of a verb

it

Suffixes.

a personal pronoun

is

attached to

forms given in Lesson 8

is the direct object as a suffix in one of the

it

e.g.

y^L^fc darabtuka "I have

struck thee", ,joyo darabani "he has struck me". Note. the suffixes

The e.g.

otiose

J,_^Jyto

{

in the 3 r<3 plur. rnasc.

darabun

"they have

is

omitted before.

struck

me"; and

>

$

U

is

added to the

2nd pi ur mas c. before the .

darabtumtlha "you have struck her".

suffixes

e.y

First Part.

68

S -o,

The verb

kana "to be" is weak Jow inu'tall. See Less.- 23, 1) and its conjugation will be explained in Less. 27, but it is needed so often that the Perfect 2.

is

given here.

Sing. 3. masc.

J}

tf

kana he was.

,,

3.

fern.

oj

,,

2.

nlasc.

o-^ kunta

2.

fern.

^JS

1.

masc.

a. fern.

Dual

3.

masc.

,,

3.

fern.

2.

Plur.

kanat she was.

Lxjl^

masc.

a. fern.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

Ijjfc'

1.

masc.

The

kanu they

(f.)

were.

(m.) were.

kunna they

\JS

a. fern.

were.

(f.)

J

^^

fern.

(m.) were.

kanata they two

p&S kuntum you

2.

wast.

I was.

kana they two

^yf

2 masc.

,,

(f.)

Uxlf kuntuma you two were.

O JO ,.

wast.

(in.)

kunti thou

^^jS kuutu

\j'tf

thou

(m.)

kuntuuna you

kunna we

(f.)

were.

were.

were.

^

is _ used with the of Perf.j)j express the Pluperfect of the latter, the ajupther subject being often jjlaced between the two "verbs e.g.

3.

Perfect

verb

to

zaidun kataba \ -

-

'.

-

-

-J

-r

1

O^

(

Zaid had

written.

kana 'rrijalu sharibu the men had drunk, (cf. Less. 11, 3 b).

69

Twelfth Lesson.

^

When,

4.

0-

used as a copula

is

is

khabar)

(^>

Less. 30, :*7 xj| *

5.

j^oun

.'.- .

v

,-

^b

.

C)

,

(see

a

j

I

O

(j-Vc^>

1?

j

m

masdar)

attached to

fariha farahan

'Imaliki

j.JQy

may the

this,

govern

he

its

own Verbal

When

accusative.

an

the two words together _ are

bv an adverb

'aziman,

"he rejoiced a great

bnata

kana 'Ibustanu kabiran the garden was large.

verb in Arabic

Any

?

I

tt

translated in English

e.g.

'--.t.^^r

rejoiced greatly cf. Less. 34).

lJ> j ,,J*

(literally

rejoicing",

Vocabulary.

%

nab

Fatima was the king's daughter. kana zaidun waladan Zaid was

(

>

is

kanat fatimatu

I

c^ott


-,

O^***^

adjective

predicate

i

12), e.g.

j:V]*

j*i

o

put in the accusative (^umj

KXJj J^J -

its

5

-

baiagha to reach.

#

1 1

?

1

^

First Part.

70 2

-

c>

J

Ali (name of man).

'allyun

1

Jui qatala to ?.'?'

****

.^^ I

^

fqal'atun fortress, citadel.

1

- -

*

-

f

Selim, (name of man).

I

i

wares,

u),

goods.

sami'a to hear.

*

^

sallmuu

"

bada

kill.

i

asara to take prisoner.

\

f

S

c

J* bal but.

)

aduwun

*\

(pi.

^

slj^i

a'da'un) enemy.

Exercise 23. t,

.

Go-

., ,

-

Ls

j'uj

irf

.

Oo

bS

J^j

s

i

iLiJ iju^f

c,

t^Joj/to

iJ^

-

JwP

j>

is dJtf

'UCU

(Less. 7, 2)

*&

&>

\S

U Exercise 24.

Have you

struck them (fern.)? No, struck them, the men have struck them.

we have not This news

71

Thirteenth Lesson.

This The king was just. has reached me. Wast thou present yesterday sheikh was learned. in the assembly? children, No, I was absent. me? were you diligent? girl, hast thou understood The girls were present I have understood thee. (plur.)

The Her name was Hind. rejoiced greatly. O king took the enemies prisoner and killed them. merchants, where are your wares, have you left them We have in the house? Have you heard it? and

heard

Hast thou (oo!) written

it.

They both wrote

sister write it?

it,

or did thy

it.

Thirteenth Lesson.

The Imperfect. 1.

The Imperfect

tense (p'u^L! almudari') ex

still unfinished and is translated in English by the present, the future~"or when used without q, conunction after another verb by the present particile

an action

*

e.g. ^4^-1

'Ikhamra "the

, ~ -

,

o _j^ixj

ijJUft ij*JL> jalasa

men

sat

drinking

'nnasu yashrabuna "they were

(literally

drinking") wine". 2.

The Imperfect Stem

consists of the three radicals

the second baying, no vowel, having a, i/or u (the dictionary always tells which is used with each verb). The persons are expressed by prefixing ya, ta, 'a and~na to the stein with the of -the Yerb 1 _thefirst

addition in some cases of suffixes also. The Moods ai'e indicated by adding the vowels u for the Indicative, a for the Subjunctive to the last radical^ which is left without vowel for the Jussive!

and mood:

Prefixes indicative

suffixes

added

to

imperfect stem in

72

First Part.

3.

masc.

3.

fem.

j 3.

I_Ij* :

_j

masc.

2.

3.

2.

masc. fem.

m.a.f.

o c

j 3.

l

,U_Is

m.

a. f.

J

Full form

=

,,

o.

masc.

3.

fem.

niasc. ,.,._

fem.

1.

m.

thou

/taktubu

'

{

1.

masc.

Dual

3.

masc.

"

3

fem

Plur.

-

-u

(i.e.

(or

taktubu she writes.

masc.

fem

j3

will

a.

thou

(fem.)

writest.

aktubu

fem.

(masc.)

wrjtest

rtaktublna '

___ j

f.

fyaktubu he writes

\

2

a.

_j

W>):

,-

2.

*,I_Ij

of Imperfect Indicative of -

Sing.

fem.

2.

___

imperf. stem

j

C)3

t

j 2.

,.,!

2 fem.

1.

3.

masc.

I write.

fyaktubani

^ (masc<)

they

write

two

/

/taktubani they two (fem.) -

2.

masc.

3.

masc.

3 d.

fem lem.

2.

masc.

t

a.

fem.

,..*

taktubani you two write.

(yaktubana they (masc.)

\\^

/y flktubna /

{

2.

fem.

1.

masc.

write.

they

(

fem -)

taktubQna you (masc.) write

taktubna you (fem.) write. a.

fem.

naktubu we

write.

73

Thirteenth Lesson.

3. The vowel of the second letter of the imperfect stem must be ascertained from the dictionary. The following points however may be noted:

Most verbs whose second or third

a)

guttural

(i.e.

Imperf.

gZu

yaftahu;

take a

^)

^

e.g.

is

a

fataha,

g

mana'a "to hinder, Imperf.

There are however

jl/ yamna'u. J^i-o

?

^ ^ ^

radical

many

exceptions as

dakhala "to enter", Lnperf. Jciou yadkhulu; iL

balagha "to reach", Imperf. jjL; yablughu; ^.>J raja'a "to return", Imperf.

yarjfu.

Verbs of the form JjJ

b)

as

^-^

shariba

yyi

"to

drink",

fa'ila

generally take -L.

Imperf. <-jyiu yashrabu;

exceptions however occur as v^v*> hasiba "to esteem",

(v-^> hasaba

Imperf. v-^^^r. yaljsibu.

"to reckon"

makes ^w*o^ yahsubu). c)

Verbs of the form

jJii fa'ula

karurna "to be noble", Imperf. 4.

take ___ as

^

Xj yakrumu.

The Imperfect

action, but

it

may

in itself denotes only unfinished be made to indicate the future by

putting the independent word vJj*. saufa before

it

prefixing the

saufa

yaktubu or 5.

contraction

sa,

e.g.

^JsLl soyaktubu "he

The Imperfect

future meaning) Sing. 3. masc. 3.

*.

fern.

of

^

wJciu

*J^

will write".

(which generally has a

is:

o-*^ y a^ unu ^ e w ^^ ^ e 1

or

ta ^ unu sne

w '^

-

^e

-

74

First Part.

'

takunu thou

Sing. 2. masc.

thou

2. fern. 1.

,,

n Dual !

Q

3.

akttnu

a. fern,

-

masc.

fem

{-

masc.

a.

fem.

6.

3.

fem.

2.

masc.

2.

fem,

1.

masc.

The

(ra.)

win be they

two

(f.)

will be.

takttnani

Plur. 3. masc.

,,

shall be.-

/takunani -

I

2.

I

wilt be.

(f.)

si- /yakunani they two

-

o

"

masc.

(m.) wilt be.

you two

will be.

yakuntma they (m.) will be.

yakunna

they (f.) will be.

takQnftna you (m.) will be. :

yCi a.

o nakunu we

fem.

Perf. of

takunna you

,^ used

(f.)

will be.

shall be.

with the Imperf. of another

verb gives to the second one the meaning of the Latin J^G." Go^ --^ kana zaidun yal'abu "Zaid imperf. e.g. v_>jdj J^\

^

was playing". used with the Perf. of another 7. The Imperf. of^l/ verb gives to the latter ^the meaning of the Futuree.g. vlJjr J^ ^ysj' yakttnu zaidun "Zaid will have written".

perfect

kataba

Vocabulary.

shan un

street.

itauftqun success (of God)>

{

'arafa to la iba to play. '

allahu God.

know.

aghniyft>u (plur of 1

2

u^ghanlyun)rich.

75

Thirteenth Lesson.

!E suffix

hum

^x^-I

hammalun

ahadu-

one of them).

dhahaba

to

(

go away.

himlun

\

faina where? whither? \

burden.

zuhrun midday. c

i

i

da 'zzuhri, in the afternoon.

|ba

dukhanun smoke,

I

tobacco. Exercise 25. 9

<S

>

-c

o,S Liau'uiiJ

porter.

load,

Q4J tiU* wJLu

^

76

First Part.

dJj

!3U

C

jilj (accus. cf. Less.

12, 4)

Exercise 26.

Dost thou smoke? I do not smoke. Will you two be present to-morrow with us? No, we shall be absent. What does he desire from me? He desires his right from me. The girl sat playing with Zaid knew (use I did not

us.

l/

,.

}

with imperf.) the sheikh of

know him.

the tribe.

The

porter will

Dost thou undercarry the load to (Jl) thy house. stand what I say (my speech)? No, I do not underThe men were present going to the hunt. stand it. When wilt thou return from the hunt? I shall return to-morrow Will this news (plur.) reach him? It will reach him in the afternoon. The king will

be

much

The sheikh smoked f.^ with

just.

tobacco.

wares to

my

merchant,

house?

The

wilt

porter

imperf.)

thou send the will

bring them

to thee.

Fourteenth Lesson.

The Moods 1.

which

of the Imperfect.

The Imperfect (g^'ualt are

distinguished

almugtari') has three

Moods

by the vowel of the third

77

Fourteenth Lesson.

In this

radical

it

resembles the noun with_jts__three

(Hence the

case-endings.

terra

g^'wax

which means

"resembling".) Arabian grammarians treat the imperfect as a noun,

Note. thus,

where we should say that the conjunction ^! anna "that" Arab says that the particle

requires the F bjunctive Mood, the-

as ,.!

governs the imperf. in the accusative.

The three_Mpod3 The

1)

are.t

Indicative ending in

nominative, and

hence

almudari' almarfu',

The

2)

to

called

The Jussive

pj**?l

<^j>'f\

and

JL

in

Sflhjnnntiye pndinpr

the accusative

called

e.g.

corresponding.

v-jj^allf

with a vowelless ending correspond-

almudari' ahnajzum

The Jussive

but reappears

dropped,

alwasl

e.g. L.jJ>XI

!

e.g.

originally

before a

v*^H

p.uz\

^OXj yaktub.

ended

in

which

is

now

word beginning with hamzat

yaktubi-lkitaba.

The Imperfect Subjunctive

2.

?j'**l

^JOu yaktuba.

ing to the genitive and called ..i>al

Note.

to the

^JjCj yaktubu.

e.g.

almudari' almansub 5)

Corresponding

declined as follows:

is

Dual.

Singular. 3.

masc.

<-^po yaktuba.

3.

masc.

ux*j yaktuba.

3.

fern.

^-jOo taktuba.

3.

fern.

Ux>' taktuba.

2.

masc.

^okj" taktuba.

2.

m.

2.

fern.

1.

m.

a.

f.

u^*^

taktubi.

is]

aktuba.

:

a.

f.

Ljjsj

taktuba.

First Part.

78

Plural. 3.

masc.

l^-<j yaktubu.

3.

fern.

cr*^' yaktubna.

2.

masc.

\_^&

taktubu.

i^'

taktubna.

2. fern.

1.

m.

a.

v_JXs naktuba.

f.

In the 2 nd sing. fern, and in the 2 nd and 3rd dual of the Indicative is dropped. In the 2^ d and plur. mascl. the final

Note

1.

Q

and 3rd suffix

plur. the otiose

attached

is

Note

to

is

!

the

added at the end except when a

verb

s^yi

e.g.

yaktuubhu.

The Imperf. Subjunctive of Q is declined like subject to the same changes in the endings as in the 2.

the indie, verb above. 3.

an

The Subjunctive "that", ^

alia

^l

li

alia

used after the conjunctions

(see Intro.

hatta "until, so that",

"so that",

is

li,

^

$

"^

9)

kai,

and 3 wa when they mean "so

it

means "unless

that,

that",

and

that'

talaba

as

negation of the future),

e.g.


J

au when

*\

^ * 9

(used

li'an

"so that not",

:

until

^

jCMikai,

li'an la)

fa

&-

"that not",

Ian "not" +

^o^r.

-^^

O

o

\

-.Jib

an yahdura "he required that he should be

present".

Note. "it will

^

is

a contraction

for

^ ^1 ^j^.

la

yakunu an

not be that".

Vocabulary.

The vowel

after a verb is that of the second radical

in the imperfect.

rkashafa t

(i)

to

un-

cover, examine.

s* famrun command, 7*'

\

affair.

79

Fourteenth Lesson.

amara.

com-

(u) to

mand

(takes ace.

9

of the person).

samaha (with

to

person 'and the thing).

p

J

allow,

-

i

*****

o for

^j

-

-f

spend

UJ

r

nazara

vXej

j raqada ai

,

qagada

(u) to sleep. /..

(i)

.

.

to do.

(a)-

before (of

place).

.( wa'ada

,

firashun bed.

to see.

(u),

/amama I

-

--

not present.

\

J4ji 'amila

ghurfatun room, to

existing.

fmafqudun wanting,

the

for

J

-

*

*#** maujndun

to

promise

<

(with ace. of the

I

person).

^M sirrun a secret.

.

to intend.

baina between.

Lc 'aqilun intelligent.

Exercise 27.

U

VLJ

JUJI

^LSJt

Oe \j>0

li

gJSL

;jO, rf)j

^

,

^

0o,o l

Vj'u -

o -

ULSXJ

Exercise 28.

We

requke thee (from thee)

(see Less.

16, 6)

sleep (so that

with us.

he might

sleep).

He

(fern.)

to

entered

be present the bed to

The women intended

First Part.

80

to go out of (from)

the house.

him

he would do.

to see

what

(L)

I

sent a boy with

Mohammed and

I intended to go to (Jit) the market. shall return to the house to see what thou art doing. I have commanded the servant to appear (be present) before me. They went away until they entered the I have promised him that that shall be a city. secret between me and (between) him.

his servant

Fifteenth Lesson.

The Jussive. 1.

The Jussive Mood

almudarf

Fifteenth Lesson.

^

The verb

2.

when

81

in the Jussive loses

the last radical

its^ (see Less. 27)

vowelless (see Intro.

is

masc.

3.

^xi'

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

l.-m.

3.

masc.

byL yakunu

takun

3.

fern.

Gyj takun a

takun

2.

m.

^Xj yakun

3. fern.

.i j,yC5

a.

f.

I

13, 3) e.g.

Dual.

Singular.

a.

f.

ijAi

takun a.

takunl akun. Plural.

3.

The

a)

Alone,

command sense

it

Jussive

yak tub

"So

him

the ^ loses

let

him

b)

After

annahyi)

,&

.

the 3 rd pers. to express a "let

him

write".

In this

generally strengthened by a prefixed

^JjCll liyaktub "let particle,

in

especially

e.g. v_^JJo

is'

used:

is

e.g.

If ^J precedes this

vowel eg. u^xXJb falyaktub

write".

i

e.g. *$

its

write".

-3

la

Arabic Grammar.

la

used for prohibitions

._.r^-.v

i

la

taktub

(^-JIl!

"do not

i

la

write".

takun gha'iban "be nqt absent". 6

82

Ffret Part.

c)

After

jj

lam used

to

deny a statement.

the Imperf. has the force of the Perf.

lam yaktub "he has not CJ lamina

Note.

e.g.

It is also

u^xXj .J used after

in the sense "not yet".

In the

protasis sentences, (see Less. 57). d)

written".

Here

The

adding anna or 1 and 2, e.g.

and apodosis of conditional

may be rendered more emphatic by thus forming the so-called modus energicus

jussive

an,

Modus energicus

I.

Modus energicus

IL

Fifteenth Lesson.

83

These forms (not much used) are employed for and are often strengthened by prefixing

exhortation

the particle 3,

^JO^J

e.g.

surely write".

They la

layaktubanna

"let

him

are also used after the prohibitive

taktubanna "thou shalt not write". Vocabulary.

(ghadibatobeangry

side,

janibun

(followed

by j^).

dlquu anxiety, need. i qadara(i) to be able.

mana'a

to prevent,

* -I|ghairun >.-

&

L another than

shai'un thing.

_

G

-

(gharlbun |

pi.

t(i

ji

another

(noun).

dukhnlun entrance.

strange

kadhaba(i) to

ghuraba'u.

daqiqatun minute. qala to soy.

maudi'un place.

cr

makanun

nQrun

light.

Exercise 29.

vj (Less. 16,

L^s 4 a)

s

G

.Cyjf

oL

he.

lie.

84

First Part.

gui

Exercise 30. I

not

did

understand it. girl, do not (

J)

know

(*>)

the affair and

did not (.J)

do not open the door. The pupils were idle and did not

boys, lie.

write the letter.

O

boys, be not idle.

They

heard your epeech and- did not understand it. Do Do not prenot leave your friends in (the) anxiety.

me

vent

from entrance

Be not angry

to (out) you.

The Let us drink (the) coffee. girl. father and his son were not able to return to their house that they should return). (. with me, o .

.

.

Sixteenth Lesson.

The imperative, 1.

The Imperative

>^i

fi'l

jJi

aFamr

is

formed

jrom the Jussive by omittiug the pronominal prefix, but as a word in Arabic must not begin with a yowelless letter (see Intro, fc? 2) a hauazat alwasl (Intro. 11) su]> ported by t is prefixecT__This hamza" takes the vowel

_

if the second radical has radical has oj e.g.

_ _

kataba, }

uktub.

Jussive

_

,

vS

but

__

if

yaktub,

the second

Imperative

85

Sixteenth Lssson.

daraba, Jussive

y^**y

yadrib,

Imperative

yamna',

Imperative

idrib.

vytol

Jussive

maua'a,

}tjjs>

.>Uj

imna'. j.

iic*

oUlT

it

J^H

"go to the door and open 2.

The Imperative

is

idhhab

'Ibabi waftalihu

ila

it".

nd naturally found in the 2 pers.

only: Sing. 2. masc.

Dual

2.

masc. and

Plur.

2.

raasc.

fern.

3.

-*^' uktub\3

o^

is:

The Imperative

if it

is

negatived

by ^ with the

b).

Direct address (the vocative)

The

nktubna.

^

Jussive (see Less. 15, 3 4.

uktuba

LXJ'!

fern.

of

uktubl

^1

2. fern.

The Imper.

uktub

<^>ji '!

is

introduced by:

a) particle \ ya followed by a noun, which, stands alone is put in the nom. without the article

88

First Part.

and without nunation by a

genit. is

in the sing.; but if

put in the accus.

"Oboyl"; Jjf jJc'

I?

"O

'llahi

followed

ya waladu

[>

jjj

e.g.

ya
is

it

Abdallahl"

(literally "servant of God").

b)

The

particle

.strengthened form

l^jf

l^it

G

aiyuha;

fern.

nom. and always with the -article

in the

L^

aiyatuha;

ya aiyuha followed by a

ya aiyuha 'ttilmidhu "0 scholar I" For further details see Less. 48,

e g.

j^JJdT

noun

Ql

C

1.

Present Participle.

The Present

5.

nomen agenda)

is

ism

Participle

of the form

J^eli

e.g.

alfa'il,

katibun

"writing".

T^eJParticiple is declined like other nouns a sound plural e.g. generally has

Masc. Sing.

nom. ace.

G wo'tf katibuii

katiban

writing

and

Fern. O- ^ xo'K katibatun

ilstf

tatibatan

Sixteenth Lesson.

After

87

^l/^tbej^articiple ^xpresses

a condition in

Go-

the past

Lj'l/

e.g.

kana zaidun katiban "Zaid

...li'

Joj

was writing" thus having much the same meaning as (see Less.

13, 6).

There is no infinitive- in the sense of_the European languages in Arabic. The English infinitive is 6.

expressed by a sentence in Arabic

e.g. *JL;u

c

yaqdiru zaiduu an ya malahu "Zaid

is

O

5

vX^' ^JsJu

able to do

it".

'

The Verbal Noun. in Arabic fans a Verbal Noun (^j^a* In the masdar). simple verb this may be of one or more of some 40 forms. the most common Among 9 oGoO,are Jue fa'lun as Jj3 qatlun "killing"; Joe fa aluu (from 7.

Every verb

e

verbs of the form joe) as O

and ^ye

**};

O

fu'ttlun

farahun "rejoicing" (from

-j

,)

as

,

rel="nofollow">

Oj^O

khurQjun "going out",

dukhulun "entering",

cjii

tulti'un

"rising",

nuzftlun "descending".

For

details see Less. 34.

Vocabulary.

n -

to

|sakata(u) I

be

silent.

u-j :

labisa

small. to

| I

P ut ou

(clothes).

o

sakana(u) to dwell. ;

-

| \

saiyidatuu

thaubun

o

,

ujLS

thiyabun)garment,

woman,

clothes.

mistress.

*

faala to do.

(pi.

-

Ja**s

I

wastun middle, centre.

88

First Part.

L

taraqa to knock

ujb-l ajaba to answer.

at.

&

Izarffun (plur.

*t

/

*

*

zurafa'u) a witty (

fa'inna for, (couJunction).

person, wag. Exercise 81.

,>!^JL30u

tijT (what)

i^rff

,

e

-o

3 0^5

.

1

b

.

!

U

.

, 0,0

.o

oLJt

ii

Lo

jib!

Exercise 32. See, o boys, what you have done.

and

sit

by

the room.

you going?

my

friend, enter

scholar, open the door of I was going to the city. Whither are are going to the market. boy, side.

We

come down from the mountain.

O

you two

scholars,

89

Seventeenth Lesson.

write your two letters.

is

Where

not.

lie

speak the truth and

girl,

Mr.

is

Hasan

(>xLl)

He

living?

What are living in the middle of the city. I are putting on our clothes.

you was

We

doing?

writing a

when (o) our

letter,

not prevent

me

Do

friend entered,

from entrance to

(jsc)

you.

Seventeenth Lesson.

The Passive.

The Active Voice

1.

called

is

Arabic

in

alma'lttm "the known" because the agent is known, when the active is used as in "Zaid struck him"; }

the

Passive Voice

is

called

unknown" because when "Zaid

is

o -o E

the

passive

struck" the agent (the striker)

The Passive of vowels,

2 nd takes

i

i3j^sU!

jn

__

is

almajhul "the is used as in is

unknown.

formed from the Active by change

the perf. the

I 8t radical

takes

__

In the iroperf. the prefix takes

2 nd radical takes

__

__

the

,

,

the

All the other vowels are as in

thejacjtiye e.g. Perfect.

Sing.

3.

rnasc.

^^o

duriba he was struck. cluribat she

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

^yto

2.

fern.

c>o/s duribti thou

1.

in. a.

vi^oyto

f.

was struck.

duribta thoti (m.) wast struck.

v^oto duribtu

I

(f.)

was

wast struck.

struck.

90

First Part.

Imperfectum.

Sing.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

VV^ 2-1

Vj**

vy^

2. fern.

m.

1.

The

2.

the agent

is

?O;^J

a.

f.

ujyst

yudrabu he

struck.

is

tudrabu she

thou

tu<Jrabu

struck.

is

(in.)

tudrablna thou

udrabu

am

I

(f

)

art

struck.

art struck.

struck.

Passive must not be used in Arabic when expressed; thus "Zaid has been struck by

Omar" must be rendered by tJoj 'umaru zaidan "Omar struck Zaid"

.*.

daraba

v_jyto

The_Passive is often used impersonally e.g. dhukira "it has been mentioned", or "it is told",

Jj

Passive Participle.

The

3.

passive participle (JytlU O

is

of the

form

&J*SLA

mafol

Os

Nominal sentence

o

(JLM

[

O,o

y\s

(!JcoI5

(^3-1

almubtada') in

alkhabar)

in

the

zaidan 'aqilun or JSLJ tJsJ is

accus.

The

the nom.

strengthened by the prefix

"verily Zaid

followed

is

intelligent".

5, e.g.

,

'^U> jumla ismlya

see Less. 11, 6, b) jg often introduced

inna "verily". _shich

maktubun

nouns and generally

The Particle ^.

A

ism almaful)

) o ^

\->^&A

e.g.

"written". It is declined like other has the sound plural.

4.

^\ G

to,

by the

and the predicate predicate

JJiU

ulj

inna zaidan J^l

particle

by the subject

is

often

^

inna

c

la

aqilun

Seventeenth Lesson.

91

If_the subject is a personal pronoun,

as a suffix (see Less. 3) to

Note.

Alternative -

i.e.

pronoun

e.g. aJj

used with

are

innl

attached

I8'

the

v

.

J>l

^

forms

is

it

innahu "verily he". pers.

*

.c^

and

inttanl

lit

"verily 1";

and

innS

Lot innana "verily we".

^

The Particles The Conjunction "that"

5.

By o

a)

(Less.

an

t

and $. expressed in Arabic:

is

(see Less. 14, 3) with a Verbal sentence

the verb being either in the perf. (osL>) or

11),

O

>

o-

the imperf. subj. (^.J^^A

O

-

j

e.g.

fj^a*}

'IqadI

an yahdura

zaidun the judge required Zaid to be present i^sAi

Jo-. 'V

,.J \*J

c>ou

(to appear).

sami'tu an dhahaba zaidun

heard that Zaid had gone away.

I

If

more than one verb

imperf.

subj.

repeated

zlru

is

dependent on ^t, the

is

used throughout and the

an yahdura rauhammadun wayajlisu

commanded Mohammed

vezir

o?

not

is

e.g.

to

bijanibihi the

be present and

sit

beside him.

anna with a Nominal sentence, the noun ^1 immediately following the conjunction being put in b)

By

the accus.

added

to

(as

^1

with

If a

^jj.

as a suffix.

With the

double forms ^U arml and -SB

UJl annana are used.

pronoun follows

'^\

1

st

pers.

annani,

ijj

it

is

pron. the

anna and

First Part.

92

If the predicate is a noun a verb (see Less. 11, 6) the imperf. indicative, e g. if it is

it

is

it is

put in the noni., put in the perf. or

"'

O

_

f

JjjLc w it

has

o

-5

.,

L>o-.

,-jtb balaghan!*anna zaidan 'aqilun

...I

^"

\^j

**J

reached

me

*

I

(i.e.

have heard) that Zaid

is

intelligent.

o

know

aUamu anna

zaidan yahduru

^icl iJvj that Zaid will be present.

jzji?.

I

l

Vocabulary.

dhakara

/

to

(

\

khusrun

anlsuu ami-

\

able.

li

for.

slratun manner of life.

I

mention.

\

loss.

qabila to receive

(hadlyatun a \

shaja'atun courage.

(

daraba

/

\

strike, coin.

yatu 1

-,,

J5r- surOrun

to

sikkatun coin.

gift,

{

| \

-

joy.

salahu 'ddlni Saladin.

Con-

stantiuople.

c.

^>

/

'

majhulun un-

known

'

fmashghQlun I

busy.

(ghalaba to conc uer ^ -

to

(hadama 1

l

destroy. j

waqtun

time. {

mu'arrikhun 8ound (

^^

ghasda *

khaufun

fear.

to

wash.

salaba to crucify.

Seventeenth Lesson.

\

-

:

^

astro-

/munajjimun

/

***j

loger.

/qlla (passive of qala "to say").

&

%&

93

rif atun lifting up, raising.

I

wa akinna but i

.

j

OG,

^

?.'' najrnun

^^>

star.

I t

kbashabatun a pj ece o f wooc|.

Exercise 33.

*

Jt

1'

jiT Jli

f

LL

^*

(Koran, Sura

(

(Koran, Sura 103,

2, 151)

2)

JL?

i'

^aS o ^

oS

Jit!

Exercise 34.

The preof the house were opened. It is told that Saladin received with (o) joy.

The doors sent

was

was a powerful

sultan.

were busy today.

you?

Truly

this

-

I

Was news

is

did

this

not

know

news known

unknown

to us.

that

you

to (*x*c) I

know

First Part.

94

the conqueror and that thou art the Truly the men mentioned are my friends.

Hasan

that

is

conquered.

His courage has been mentioned by Your clothes were washed.

the his-

(j^JLt)

torians.

Eighteenth Lesson.

Derived Forms of the Verb. 1.

TheSimple_^erli (which alone has been treated so Os-> O o o^s? Jje

far) is called

fi'l

mujarrad ("the naked verb"). 6

From fi'l

this

is

raazld

formed the derived verb (xo

flhi

litterally

"the

verb

There are 14 forms of

which

in

-

vXjj/>

is

O

o

Jots

-an

each of theTBiffiple form

increase").

this

latter,

consisting of "the three radicals, with the addition of one or more letter^ajidhavjng"g. meaning -whfoh * H a mnHififtation of that of~the Simple These with the simple form are designated by e numbers 1 to 15. Of these the first 10 only are in common use^ and the ten seldom occur from any one root. The forms of a root in actual use are given in the dictionaries. 2. General list of the Perfects in each of the 15 forms with its modification of the root meaning:

L

Simple form: fca

(see Less.

fa'ala, joti fa'ila or

Forms increased by one II.

jJe fa'ula

11). letter:

JJI fa"ala, (with doubling of the second radical).

Meaning: Intensive as '^s> qataV'to cut", qatta'a "to cut to pieces"; or

"to know",

c

'JLti

causative

as

(JU

^Jai

'alirna

allama "to make to know, teach".

95

Eighteenth Lesson.

HI. the

fa'ala

J^

introduction of an alif after

(with

first radical).

Meaning: Relation of the action kataba "to write", or Attempt

^:M

alqat'

jjf

cf.

person

as

kill,

10; the

kill",

fight".

afala (with prefixed

Intro.

^jS

kataba "to write to someone";

do the action as JJ3 qatala "to

to

jj&*qatala "to try 4o IV.

to a

first

hamzat

^L&IT gjl*

radical losing

its

^ ,

vowej). *

..

o

E

Meaning: Causative as ^^Jb- jalasa "to sit''..^^? ajlasa "to

make

to sit".

Forms increased by two cc

V. jj^j tafa ala (with prefixed

letters:

o

and doubling

ta

of the second radical).

Meaning: Reflexive of jjj

II.

as 5Jbi qallada "to gird"

taqallada "to gird oneself".

o

VI. j^llf tafa'ala (witl^ prefixed introduced after the first radical).

Meaning: Reflexive of

III,

ta

and

alif

as J3i qatala "to fight",

taqatala "to fight one another".

VII.

jJtlj?

infn'ala (with prefixed

hamza here and in hamzat alwasl, cf. Intro. he

all

hamza and nun

the following forms being 11).

Meaning: Originally Reflexive of

I

but generally.

as a Passive as u^sed '^=> kasara "to break" inkasara "to be broken".

^ o ta

"~*=\\

VIII. Jjts^ ifta'ala (with prefixed hamzat alwasl and introduced after the radical, which loses its vowel).

Part.

First

Meaning: Reflexive of

I as ?c+=>- jaina'a "to collect,

unite" pt+>1 ijtaina'a "to collect themselves, to assemble".

IX.

if alia (with prefixed

jjist

gion of the vowel the^third radical).

Meaning: ~^s>\

of the

first

Used only

ihmarra "to be red";

for

hamzat alwasl, ^omig,and doubling of

radical

Colours

and Defects r fls

i'wajja "to be crooked".

^^[

Forms increased by more than two

letters:

X. Jou^Lj istafala (with prefixed ^v*[ omission of the vowel of the first radical).

ista_

and

Meaning: Properly Reflexive of IV as JUt aslama "to give

XI.

up" JL*JOJ istnslama "to give oneself up". 3t*s!

XII.

ifalla a rare secondary

,'kc^asl

form of IX.

ifau'ala

j^st ifauwaia

rape

f

^

Tms occurriug

}n

certain verbs only with

XIV.

.jJuisj

XV. 3.

Any

meaning 4.

Jjjiit

is

if'anlala

ifanla

verb in the above called

special meanings.

list

that has Reflexive

? .Lax uiutu\vi\

The imperfect

from the

])erfect

of the derived forms is foripefl according to the following rules:

a) The prefixes ya, til, alif, nun receive the vowej u_if the verb is increased by one letter only (II. III. IV forms), otherwise

97

Eighteenth Lesson.

The second radical receives the vowel i except Ibrms with prefixed ta (V and VI) when it

b)

the

in

Deceives

a.

The

first radical remains as in the perfect: the c) u for third radical receives the vowel of the mood the indie., a for the subj., sukGn for the juss.

Thejbamza at the beginning of some forms away in the imperT Thus the Imperfects are as follows:

in the

erf. lajis

Perfect.

Imperfect.

II.

Jots

fV'ala

III.

Jiis

fa'ala

IV.

jJtM

af ala

V.

Jobb tafa"ala

Joub yufa"ilu J^l^j yufa'ilu

JoJb

yuf ilu f

JotiL yatafa'

ali>

c

VI.

J^IAJ tafa'ala

VII.

Jotl>5

VIII.

ji-3^ ifta'ala

J^i^j yatafa alu

c

IX.

JUsl

X.

joilxx-l 5.

infa ala

Jjt^j yanfa'ilu

J**^

if'alla

joilj

istafala

Jj^*u

The Imperative

general rule (Less. 16, .omission of the prefixes^'

is

1)

yafta'ilu

yaf allu yastafilu.

formed according to tbg from the Jussive by tbg

becomes vowelless a hamza In the IV. form 13, 2). (Intro. 11) which receives the the other forms it is hamzat alwasl

If the first radical thus

must be put before it this is hamzat alqaf vowel a

and

(fatha); in

receives

i

Arabic Grammar.

(Intro.

(kasra). 7

First Part.

98

by

6. The Participles are formed from prefixing a mlm with the vowel IT

prefixed droppeoL The second radical' takes the"vowel in the Active, a in the Passive!

hamza i

the Perfects

The

is

Eighteenth Lesson.

99

7"

First

100

Part.

Nineteenth Lesson.

Form

II.

1.

Conjugation of

^ly

j.

"to break to pieces, smash'

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

etc.

Juss.

Subj.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Imperative

.I/

^5j~J

Part. Active

Part. Pass.

etc.

Verbal noun In some verbs there

Verbal

Noun

of the

is

a secondary form of the

form 3l*'

e.g.

from vj^>'

"to

welcome"

The Passive

is

in the

Perf.JJlr

etc. 2.

The form

Jsii

denotes:

etc.,

in the Imperf.

Nineteenth Lesson.

A

a)

^

break",

b) It (like

strengthening of the

jji^

Note. In these

^

"to learn"

-

in

II.

e.g.

jT

liar",

e.g.

.Woo

if

Simple

transitive in

it is

in

make (something) reach (someone

II.

e.g.

it

OJcT

has

"to lie",

the

meaning of thinking,

v_j

Jo "to esteem (someone)

used to form verbs from nouns

Go oJl>.

*

"skin,

leather"

bind (books)"; from j&glc

formed *jU

JjL,

is

formed

z

e.g.

,

jsJb*.

"to

skin,

,^UJt "peace be on thee"

"he greeted him"

i.e.

said "peace

be upon thee" to him.

Form j^.

III.

3.

,,Jb

to transmit)".

"to be sincere" .%vXo "to think (someone)

d) It is often

is

learn,

believe".

sincere,

from

to

a^

Sometimes

esteeming

"to

be numerous",

"to

becomes doubly transitive

it

"to reach", "to jJb

a

'^S

cases, if a verb is intransitive in the

becomes transitive

the Simple form,

make

"to

jiT "to make numerous, increase"; while

c)

e.g.

has usually a Causative or Factitive meaning

jJiM) e.g.

it

meaning

"to break into pieces, smash".

teach".

form, v**

101

Conjugation of

v-*i'

"to write to":

Imperf. Perf.

WOO

.

Indie. i^o'LXj

Subj.

Juss.

First Part.

102

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

etc.

etc.

Juss.

Subj.

etc.

etc.

Imperative vlo

^f

etc.

Part. Active

viol*

Part. Passive

sLjb

5

Verbal noun Passive, Perf.

4.

The form

of the action

to

more usually

^jlxi',

Imperf. Indie. JJlx!

v*jy

used to express the relation

is

jlli

a person

^>jS "to write", ^J*

e.g.

"to write to (someone), correspond with". It

also

something

very often

e.g.

Jjia

to fight"; 0L* "to precede", to compete with". 5.

The

the Accus.

j^li

form

an attempt

expresses

"to kill",

is

of the Person

Jjls

^l^

IV.

do kill,

"to try to precede.

always transitive and takes e.g.

xli'^

"he corresponded

with him", Uii "he fought with him".

6.

to

"to attempt to

Form jJS.

Conjugation of JJi^? "to

make

to sit".

Nineteenth Lesson.

103

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Imperative Part. Active

Part. Passive

etc.

Verbal noun

t

Passive, Perf.

The meaning

7.

factitive

and -.

^

It

(cf. jJki).

transitive

of the

makes

doubly

form

jJ^st

is

causative or

intransitive verbs transitive

transitive.

y^>

"to be present",

o

"to

make

"to

Many

sit",

be present

to ^

as

Imperf. Indie.

-.

i.e.

to

bring,

present";

o

Jb-l "to make to

sit,

seat".

verbs employ both the II. and IV. forms sometimes with different shades of

causatives,

meaning,

e.g.

'j->

"to inform"; while

inform".

and ^3-t are both used

means "to teach" and

to

mean "to

First Part.

104

The

form

joist

<5

nouns

often

is o

used

from *xwo "morning"

e.g.

form verbs from

to -

>

- o

^/-ot "to

do in the

"to

do in the

morning"; from sL** "evening" evening"; from p^LJ become a Moslem".

"Islam"'

"to

^

receive Islam,

Vocabulary. to

II.

;

speak to, address (ace.).

I

r*

i

to treat in

(III.

frier dly

1

half.

around.

IV. to destroy, to

to witness, III. to see.

way.

to kiss.

II.

to defend.

III.

a

be (literally do in the

'

if not,

except.

"to

i

morning"). horizon.

ramping.

to interrupt.

III.

>JJL> yd!

III.

pl.

to disobey, y>!3

5

only.

command.

speech. to send.

affair.

pl.

-'j^

j

..-

f

\

(^

to bring.

II.

"concerning").

I

}*

bedouin.

IV. to inform

father (literally "begetter").

IV.

to bring forward, present.

to

II.

JlS IV. to become dark.

O ;3

U

to

;^-to

ask advice equip.

of.

cause

to

reach, convey. pl.

III.

> j

(jojjaj

robber.

to attack.

105

Nineteenth Lesson. -

(immediately,

.

land.

take

to

II.

from.

news to

distance. to seek.

to be

mix,

III. to

^

to.

:

neighbourhood. c 1

I

\ -

;

fc

f

(

IV.

to

deprive, (with two accus.).

life,

(see Intro.

Note III

xi

frequent the of (ace.).

III. to f

-

^J f

have with,

(ace.). -

neighbour

society

(

-

good

to.

intercourse II.

(ad-

verbial accus.).

I

|

II.

I

to propose,

manage.

II.

to determine.

II.

to

6,

believe.

3).

to watch, ob-

tmvel

to

serve.

to cover,

P^ce, greeting.

overwhelm,

friendliness.

as

IV. to treat kindly.

to find.

Exercise 35.

s

t

xobs.it

--

clsJsJu

.

like

-

First Part.

106

(Perfect for the English Future)

(proverb)

J jJb

*LM

3

Exercise 36.

O

The judge comservant, bring us the coffee. manded them to (that they should) bring forward the robber. kiss thy hands. Convey to him

We

greeting.

I

my

have commanded

thee, o girl, to

convey

this I informed him of greeting to them. but he did not believe me. Do not believe this boy, o girl. The proposing is from men, the I ask advice of my friends determining is from God. in anxiety. Thou hast seen many cities and had intercourse with many peoples. Send that man to

my

affair,

(^

Twentieth Lesson.

me Do

that

so

I.

($)

not disobey

may

commands.

my

of (the) man.

I

treat

107

him

kindly.

(*-J;)

Defence

is

the right

bring thee the good news that

have conquered the robbers. Damascus. Bring in (cause

We

we

have travelled

Twentieth Lesson. .

V. 1.

The

prefixed

jJiii'

Form

form

is

the

same as the

jJis

with

o.

Conjugation of Juli' "to take over, receive": Imperf. Perf.

Indie.

Subj

etc.

etc.

etc.

Juss.

etc.

Imperative Part.

etc.

to

to enter) the physician.

Active

Part. Passive

JLliL* t

108

Verbal noun Irnperf. Indie.

Passive, Perf. ^JUo

The

2.

jj^i e.g.

t

It 2

is ..

the Reflexive of the

is

"to

-

jjtc

also

X^AS

teach"

pUj

"to

form

separate oneself

used to form verbs from nxmns '

"a Christian"

a Christian"; from a Jew". often

II.

teach oneself

"to

o -

,iLkflj

It

jJi

"to separate",

-;Js'

to scatter"; to learn".

from

V. form

is

formed

has the meaning

&

represent oneself as", ag. S

*-.

be haughty"; Ltf (from

o^ii'

"to

e.g.

'-

^o

"a Jew",

^50^

-

i.e.

"to

become

"to

become

think oneself,

to

"to think oneself great,

1

^^

"a prophet") "to represent

oneself as a prophet". VI. 3.

fixed

The VI. Form

is

Form. the

same

as

III.

with a pre-

o. Conjugation of

jjlai'

"to fight with

one another":

Iinperf.

Perf.

etc.

Indie..

etc.

Subj.

etc.

Juss.

etc.

Twentieth Lesson.

109

Imperative o -

G

,-

.,

,

Part. Active 9 j'

Passive

Part.

etc.

Verbal noun Passive, Perf. jjjjtf 4.

The

jsilij'

form

Imperf. Indie. the Eeflexive of the

is

III.

form,

4

e.g.

"to fight with one another", occurs in the Sing, its subject

JJIs "to fight", jjlii

therefore

the

if

verb

must be a Plural

or

a

Collective,

e.g.

men

fought with one another"; "the people fought with one another". This form is used more often than V. to mean "to "the

is

Collective)

represent

oneself as", f

blind"; oj*i

e.g.

"to

,^>L*j

to

pretend

be

"to pretend to be dead". Vocabulary.

jji - ,

c^L

V. to speak. (morning, ace. "in the morning". \

L***-^ a ^

^

necessary, duty.

V. to follow.

(

---

*j

%

1

IV. to narrate to one another, VI. to converse.

V. to show oneself brave

U

j

H^ 1

for-

to se P arate from one another, -

VI. to disperse.

when

>

*^ cr

V. to come ward.

V f

j

1

trace.

a ^v. accus.).

also.

-

frf

Li

(

?

f

after

-

'

from (the presence of

8K e '

'

.

.

..

direction.

First

110

j |

Part.

presence, appearance.

J (

r

^AJ5^c)

(plur.

tender feeling.

|

VI

to play

(to know, II. to \teach, V. to learn.

medicine.

(L->).

(thus, (

flame.

I

V. to remember.

j

\

to

(literally

"like that").

appointed,

speci-

V. to have the honour.

people.

V.

astonished.

extreme, extremity.

V. to be grateful. |

V. to wonder, be

be slow.

or

J>KxiJ

(plur.

VI. to meet one ristian.

another. f

VI. to be bold.

^

{

V.

say farewell to one another.

Exercise 37. - .0.0

G?

y"

o

li

**J ,.

,


o (about)

j

(from thee)

^(

UJ

"b

,--

to

Twenty-first Lesson.

j

LtfS

jf

(Less.

Ill

12,

og st

vs'

5)

&->,

,3

a*ot

,..

J

-

.

^

Exercise 38.

Do you

No, we do not speak speak Arabic? We conArabic. They did not speak with us. Hast thou learnt what thy versed about this affair. teacher has taught thee? Yes, I have learnt it. Do not These pupils learn the science of medicine. They separated from one another speak thus, o child. that they might follow the way and meet at (,3) an appointed place. astonished

was greatly astonished

I

the extreme

of astonishment)

at

(I

(^

was him.

Truly we are exceedingly grateful (we are grateful the The Moslems and the Christians excess of gratitude). said farewell to one fought with one another.

We

another so that we might disperse.

Twenty-first Lesson.

VII. 1.

Conjugation of

Form.

J&1

"to

break" (intransitive):

Imperf. Perf.

Indie.

y^^. .^W^AJ

Subj.

Juss.

First

112

Part.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Juss.

Subj.

Imperative Part.

Active

Part, Passive

etc.

Verbal noun Imperf. Indie.

Passive, Perf.

The

VII. form is originally the Reflexive of the Simple form, but generally it contains the idea of allowing some action to be done to one i.e. it has a 2.

Passive sense as

^LZ

"to uncover",

oJiXM

"to be

uncovered". 3. The VII. form is wanting in all verbs that begin with hamza, waw, ya, ra, lam or nun.

VIII. 4.

Form.

Conjugation of ^=>-\ "to assemble". Imperf.

Perf.

Indie.

Subj.

Juss. o

, o ,

113

Twenty-first Lesson.

Imperf. Perf.

Indie.

Subj.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Imperative r.

Part. Active

etc

Passive

Port.

-

Verbal noun Imperf. Indie.

Passive, Perf.

5. The
assimilated to a

tashdld strike"

_b

or jo which

"to

e.g.

is

then written with

make" forms

ib

forms

"to be dark" forms lib!

u

and

to rise"

"to

forms

JLbt.

b) If the first radical is o, 3 or j, the ta is softened to o; this is assimilated to a 6, which is then written

with tashdld

e.g.

^J

forms

forms

Jso forms ^2*3^ and c) If

the

o

the

e.g.

first

^

Arabic Grammar.

radical

forms

is cy, it

e^

or

sometimes assimilates

First Part.

114

The

6.

VIII. form

is

the Simple verb e.g. from

like the VII. the Reflexive *=* "to

collect"

is

of

formed

"to collect themselves, to assemble"; but has the sense of doing a thing for oneself e.g. from

+z rel="nofollow">-\

also

"to acquire"

oneself.

is

Sometimes

formed it

"to acquire for ^ ^u^'[ r has a reciprocal meaning e.g.

'

Loi>! "to strive with one another".

"to strive",

Vocabulary.

VIII. l*Ji to divide.

VIE.

(MM? division, part. o ,

jVlJL

"** \

13!

to

to

be

experienced.

approach

(with ;,).

see! behold!

Jut/>

to be mingled. 6

-

&S

plur. 31**! likeness.

Twenty-first Lesson.

Oli, youth.

deed.

-

115

nearness, neigh

to lash. flog.

bourhood.

armv.

a lash.

VIE.

I. "to

to confess

| I

(something

help,

VIIL

to

conquer (literally, "to be heh by God).

v_j).

ilLa> truth.

VIH.

to think.

VIIL

to

foot.

and VIII. to tremble.

I.

:

>

fear.

f

VIIL

1

self,

[VIIL whole,

I

all.

I

Exercise 39.

U

(Intro.

9)

-

honour.

to

busy one-

work. to

crowd;

verbal noun, "a crowd".

First Part.

116

l

,3

(

'from fear" adv. accus.)

li

\

Exercise 40.

We

Do

assembled in the neighnot expect us. We were exceedingly pleased that yon were present with us. The army of the Sultan was defeated (broken) and the Think not that thou hast conChristians conquered. We are quered us. Truly, he is honoured by all. not approach us. bourhood of the city.

Do

There was a great crowd diligent and work much. in the streets. The feelings of the men were stirred as they heard that. Work and do not play, o children !

Twenty-second Lesson.

IX.

Form.

Through the meeting of two similar letters at the end of this form certain assimilations and contractions take place in the conjugation, The rules for these are given in Lesson 23. 1.

Twenty-second Lesson.

Conjugation of

^>\

"to

be or become

117

red'

.

Perfect.

Dual

Sing. 3.

p.

3.

f.

2.

m.

2.

,

f.

Imperfect.

Indie. i.,0-

Sing.

Dual

Plur.

m.

3.

p. in.

3.

f.

2.

m.

3.

m.

J^T;

^i'

"^

.

(

3.

f. i:

M

"

Plur.

3.

>

'

m.

*

Subj. a

^

o -

Juss.

o-o.

Part.

First

118

Imperfect. Indie. Plur.

^

m.

2.

Juss.

Subj. l

I

3

^

Imperative. Sing.

2.

*

m.

=>

Dual.

Plur. 2.

2. fj

m.

2.f.

2.f.

., Part, Active

^s?

>

Part. Passive not used.

6^0 Verbal noun A^s>\. 2.

(for

The IX. form

is

Passive not in use.

used only for Colours and Defects

the corresponding adjectives see Less. 10, to

2),

e.g.

be or become black.

yellow, pale. white.

,,

red

,,

green.

crooked.

The very rare form XL jUst is according to some a stronger, according to others^ weaker form of IX. e.g. jU=>j.

"to be or

become

red".

Twenty-second Lesson.

119

X. Form. 3.

Conjugation of

Q^^J

"to esteem

beautiful":

Imperfect Perfect ,

,'

Iiidic.

Juss.

Subj.

0,0

O"""~

o

o

etc.

etc.

etc.

,

oE

etc.

Imperative Part. Active

Part. Passive

etc.

..

0, Verbal noun Imperf. Indie.

Passive, Perf. 4.

The X. form:

a) Is

originally the Reflexive of IV. e.g.

JL!

"to

give up" jJUJLl "to give oneself up". b)

Denotes "to desire

"to pardon" c)

la*j

or.

ask for oneself"

"to ask pardon".

Denotes "to esteem or think"

beautiful"

jl^w

e.g. ^ac.

"to

e.g.

think beautiful"

^>*s>

"to be.

(

oi

"to

be

First Part.

120

"to esteem (something) disgraceful,

disgraceful" *.*J&.\

wrong". has a Causative meaning,

d) Often

make

"to

swear", ^JJLs^J

e.g.

>JiL> "to

to swear".

Vocabulary. >

o -

Lk> world.

i,

plur.

_.x meadow.

&*

be big, X. to esteem great, im-

to

X.

to rejoice.

X.

to

portant.

esteem

forbidden.

Ajiil.

event.

(to serve X. to take into ones service.

opinion.

I

X. to enquire.

government.

X.

X. to receive.

to use.

reed, pen. future.

hard} ;..{

if

God

difficult.

.x> X. to enquire.

will.

Exercise 41.

U iJAi

Juu

o]Xl>? (Lesson

^

Ciij

J

L

9,

6

,J)

U

Twenty-third Lesson.

J Jcill* r

f

olcJ-l

l.'Ii?

>;

,^

(Less. 12, 5) U-J-^

IftiLl?

*jff

*

ilUxIf

121

>,

olbllj?

Uil^I?

x

Exercise 42.

Do

not esteem this event important. girl, I saw the men become why hast thou become red ? Do you think right (beautiful) what he pale (white). has done? The plants No, we think it disgraceful. I have taken this slave into have become green. He is taken into service by the government. service.

They have

received this foreigner well (a great re-

Do you

use this pen? No, we do not use is difficult. Do you think it right that I should take this man into service? I think it ceiving).

u$e

it,

its

this matter.

wrong.

Enquire concerning (^)

went out

to the reception of the vezir.

He

Twenty-third Lesson.

Classification of Verbs. 1

.

yerba are divided by Arabian grammarians into

jU

Sound a| b)

Not sound

These

ji). (fJL, '^,

latter are

9

:

jjii).

again divided into:

-j

JJts

i.e.

the Correct verb comprising^ (a)

"Doubled verb"

i.e.

the 2 nd and 3rd radicals are the

the

verb in which

same

(b

122

'jHamzated verb"

i.e.

the verb in which one radical

isa~Eamza! IL jjil jli the

^Weak"

waw

orjj_jgu

the radicals

a

is

JL-

Note. The terms

verb in which one of

&

and

are often used as identical.

In this case the doubled verbs and harazated verbs are regarded as Sound. The terms Regular and Irregular are sometimes used This use should be avoided loosely for Sound and Not sound. as all these verbs follow certain laws, though they suffer some changes of form due to the laws of contraction and assimilation.

Doubled,Verbs. following rules govern the conjugation of nd and 3 rd radicals are the same letter: verbs whose 2 2.

The

I.

These two identical radicals are written as one

wjth_tashdid

(or

as the

Arab grammarians say ^Uo^

"assimilation" takes place): a)

^^Lt

the l at and 3rd radicals have^vQwels (are

When

nd radical loses "vowelled"), in which case the 2 T

Uo

its_vowej, e.g. Jo from jJ3;

JJo (Pass. JJto

(III.

Perf.);

&

&S

from

from vijLb; Ji from

(Dual Perf.);

Jb

from

form); Jfi from JJIJ (Part. Act,).

The

Exception:

Pass. Perf. of III.

is

JJ^i.

9 b) If the

first

radical is vowelless

*

(^ L.)

and th^

3 rd radical has a vowel, in which case the 2 nd radical givesjip II.

its

its

vowel to the

When

the 3

rd

st ,

e.g.

3ij from

jJjsj.

Pd ladicaHsjvQwelless, the 2 ^retains

vowel and contraction

e.g. 2. Perf. Sing.

1

(fliop

does not take place,

Masc. Perf. v^i'o; Juss. JJjo Imper. JJoi.

123

Twenty-third Lesson. ..

Note

*

,

t *

Doubled verbs of the Joe and Jie form are thus

1.

only distinguished from those of the Joe form in the unconS

-

tracted forme, e.g. Jw

-

-

(= JJU) forms

in 2nd Sing. Masc. Perf.

O

,

oJLL.

Note 2. In the Jussive mood and in the 2nd Sing. Masc. Imperative contracted forms occur very often. In these cases, to prevent two vowelless letters coming together (Intro. 13, 3) at the end, the doubled letter takes a vowel (either fatha or or damma when has the Imperf. damma), e.g. kaera,

->,->,

f,

^

beside

JJ^o.

O ,0$.

S->"

Imperative:

GJO,

*

t

U^J, OJo and O^J

Jussive:

beside JJol. o >o

The other forms

of -the Imper. are formed either from JJoJ or from

3o

as

li ^O tyJ

but always

IE. When, the 2 Dd radical is separated from the 3 rd by a long vowel, no contraction can take plac. e.g. Part. Pass, 3.

jjix*; Verbal noun of IV.

Conjugation of 3^ "to show": Perfect.

Sing.

3.

m.

3.

f.

2.

m.

-f.

5o

Dual.

&

Plur.

bJo

vili

^ Vtt

LJUo

Imperfect Indie. OvXj

Juss.

Subj. ^JskJ

JJ^xJ,

also

OjJ

or

or

ixj

First Part.

124

Imperfect Indie.

Juss.

Subj.

33

33

o

Imperative. o,ot JJo!

=,

or

Jo

or

or or

Part. Active 3lo

Part. Passive

125

Twenty-third Lesson.

Passive. Juss.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Derived Forms. Perf.

Iraperf.

Irnper.

Part. Act.

jlS

jixi

JIS

JJ3J.

II.

Part. Pass.

in.

(Passive

iv.

33

v. VI. VII.

vm.

"

Jo^t

j

(The VIII. form of 3J> "to stretch out" here, because in the VIII. lation

=

3^

form of

(see Less. 21, 4, b.)

t

is

given

there is assimi-

First Part.

126

Perf. Imperf. IX. Seldom occurs.

Part Pass.

Part. Act.

Imper.

X.

Vocabulary.

then, thereupon.

j

determination.

((u) to stretch out, IV. to help, VIE.

^

V. to go.

to extend.

{

Jc>, pi. J^jo boundary.

tablecloth.

s

-

\

uncle

,.

c

(on

the

father's side).

i

as (with genitive).

_

people.

custom.

make

HI. to

Bedouin.

G;

,

((u) to narrate ("to"

(i

war.

**

o French-

man. (i)

to

(with

AXIS

determine

v

).

narrative, story, G-

-

Cairo.

history.

(u) to collect,

(u)to injure, VIII. to compel.

VII. to

(u) to

join (with ^o).

lieve, |

(u) to

\

[

be-

esteem.

count IV. to

to prepare, X. prepare oneself.

pi.

think,

time, fate, to

be cheerful.

il&j companion,

IV. to love, journey,

start.

extensive. pi.

Sjli

horses,

[subjects (i)

to be settled.

I

(of a

kingdom).

Twenty-third Lesson.

JaU^Ji

*1J 5

aj'

127

First Part.

128

UJ

li^

jJ JoJ?

J,f

jj

u

lil Exercise 44.

Yes, we have felt it. - Hast thou I did not pass passed by this place? by it, but I will pass by it to-morrow, if God will. Do you believe that he will appear before the judge? do not believe that. The rich people count their money. We have prepared ourselves for the

Have you

We

felt

the heat?

129

Twenty-fourth Lesson.

I Do you think him a brave man? thought him a brave man, but to-day I do not think

journey.

him

so (uJJs^).

are glad (rejoiced) of

it

We

presence rejoiced us.

Thy

Ring the

(w).

bell.

The

his speech, when (o) his fathernot speak much (make little thy speech). - I loved her He very much (a strong loving). The heat was too great loves her and she loves him. This city extends for us (strengthened itself on us). He deserves a great reward. to the sea.

boy did not complete

Do

entered.

Twenty-fourth Lesson. >o

^ u^)

o*,,

9

>

(o*r^

-a

> o

3

The Hamzated Verbs.

The Hamzated verbs

1.

to

whether the hamza

is

are of three classes

the

first

take"; or the second as in 3ll "to ask";

as in

In the conjugation of these verbs theJJQllQwing

employed

rulea are a)

or^the third

"to read".

\

2.

according

radical as in o^>\ "to

ft.t

(cf.

also Intro. 10):

bamza

the beginning of a word the

is

always

written with alif e.g.
If

no vowel, after

it

comes

kasra]_witF

Jc rel="nofollow">G

at

jt is written

waw

(Indie. Imperf.

the end of A syllable fl.mj__hfla with alif after ffl^ha^^with^ya^ after I.)

;

*3- (1. Sing. Perf. Pass. Arabic Grammar.

jlamma.

e.g.

iXi^j (Indie Imperf. Pass. .

I.

I.)

;

of llJ> "to conceal"); o!^3

First Part.

130

(1.

Sing. Perf.

I.

of

Ti

^

"to read");

IV. of

(Part. Act,

^if "to be true, believing"). c) is

Kithaskasra

or

damma and

waw

written with ya or

e.g.

^j

follows fatha jt

"to despair";

^^

"to be brave".

At the end of a word

Exception.

when

with alif even Indie

I.

of

d) If is

it

e)

written

has fatha and follows kasra or damma,

it

waw e.g. UJJ

has kasra or

damma and

written with ya or

letter, it is

,

(Imperf. Indie, of

(Imperf.

waw

it

(Iraperf. Indie. II.

(Part. Act.); ^Jo (Perf. Act.

JdJI

If

is

Tjs).

it

written with ya or

of JiS);

it

follows fatha e.g. \JL (Imperf.

I.).

follows a vowelless

^Lu

e.g.

or

0,

r^); uj*j

(_

(Imperf. Indie, of

Indie. III. of 'jL);

jJLl

(Part. Act.

I.).

f) If it has fatha and is followed bv the alif that jengthens the vowel, the latter is written with maddj^

(see

Intro.

(Part.

12.)

Act.

I.

and follows an

e.g.

3^-T

(Perf.

III.

of J^f);

1>T

If however it has fatha of the same). alif that lengthens the vowel, ItTs writlen

mdependently

e.g.

3 lL

(Perf.

III.

of JU).

hamza

is prefixed to the first radical and a hamza, then two hamzas will conie^ together, in whi^h case alif with madda is written in jjace of both.. The III, form and the IV. forifL.will

g) If a

that radical

is

thus be identical in the Perf.

J^>7

(III.)

"to blame".

e.g.

^T(IV.)

"to believe";

Twenty-fourth Lesson.

131

IJjie prefixed hamza has kasra or damma. the root is ciianged into the ya or waw thai:

hamza ojme

o

the vowel

lengthens o

,

,

i>

J^f

(Imper.

(Perf. VIII.

h)

of

"p "to

yU

e.g.

and

of the

^1);

jj*A^

form takes the

II.

last radical is

hamza

Z,^

o'..

noun

II.

of

f^).

Peculiar forms of certain special

Hamzated verbs:

a)

The verbs jeM

jft

"to eat" drop the first radical in the Imperative

form

"to

I.

etc.

y>

"command",

b)

The verb S-* has

e.g.

oLlu (written also of the

),

hamza.

J*

command"

"eat".

jJL-Io)

So

take", j*\ "to

j^> "take"; Fein. ^JsJ., Dual |jj-

of the

in

in the Jussive a regular form

and a form J^Ia with omission the Imperative J** (as well as

Fern, jl, etc.

c)

the

of

quote").

The Verbal Noun

^jfis (Verbal 3.

I.

(Imper.

form xLr&f in verbs of which the 0,

of IV.);

*,&

G

*.c.

of J^l);

I.

(Verbal noun

o 'uj[

e.g.

The verb je>!

hamza

to

the

in

form assimilates

the VIII.

following

ta

$[;

e.g.

Imperf.

Indie.

4. is

Conjugation of verb, the

hamza: vjJ! "to get

accustomed

to".

first

radical of which

First Part.

182

Perf. at

Juss.

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

gj

Ij

^&J U

\

Jji

Jjfe

Jilff

\

.

>

o

- J!

.

Q-J L>

--

uwb

sJJo

sjJIi"

etc.

etc.

etc.

vail

etc.

Imperative o-

^A! G

^Lt

Part. Passive

etc. -

*

Imperf. Indie,

.*

j3l

>

"to

hope

:

t

,-

o^JU >->

f.

Passive Perf. u>Jl

J**J

^

O.

Part. Active

lib! "*

O

Jf.

Imperf. Indie. J^>b

"to quote": Imperf. Indie.

^^t

ySu

,

Imper.

jt

Derived Forms. '

Indie. . ~-S.

II.

m.

v_^S

t

JJT

oS

t~e>

oaJ^J

JjC

v

^

I

JjT

IV.

V.

---

-,

v^Jlj-

V_jjLAJ

^

JJB

O_Si

t

Imper. J^l.

Noun. O

IL*

133

Twenty-fourth Lesson.

S

**

1"P-

^ N'

rt

JCJ

VI. VII.

P

in

Wanting waw, ya,

ra,

-

.>

all verbs beginning with hamza lam, nun. O o , O .1) --

VIII.

IX. Wanting.

X.

Vocabulary,

(to appear, IV. 1

to

show.

to

take

be friend-

III. to

III.

to

VIII.

to

take,

blame, for

oneself.

J {

ly with. III. to

( }

be

wealth, possessions. inti-

bread.

mate with. to

be

beggar.

true, safe,

IV. to believe (in

to be satisfied.

religious

sense). | (

properly

/^U

to hope,

V. to ob-

serve (with I

^

of

thing.

(plur.

food.

angel.

I

apostle.

resurrection.

bedouin o,,

^^ religion.

the J i

of day judgment.

sick,

to

ill.

make an

sion, III.

to travel.

(adjective).

(sound plur.) movement.

impres-

V. to be

in-

fluenced, affected.

First Part.

134

(Moslem

creed.)

Twenty-fourth Lesson.

*L'

A^Jj'J

(JJUI

,..}

J^J

135

JJI1

IAP

(

a dv. accus. "in order to")

>

O

>

-

-

o->

,.

I

u^j* vJU

| sis.

>

i

o

-

*

J

S

>ox>

5

vi

First

136

Part,

Exercise 46.

the money? No, we have not take it now. Eat and drink Take the reward of your until thou art satisfied. I work. They both seated themselves to eat. He hopes that think that 1 am affected by the heat. his father will command us to appear (that we appear).

Have you taken taken it, but we will

- Excuse us

for our lateness. We came forward permission of the Commander of the Faithful to come in to him, and he allowed us that. Truly this book is. the work (editing) of the sheikh Mohammed. - Do not blame us. Eat with us. We discipline The discipline of the lazy scholars the lazy scholars. We do not blame (with is the duty of the teacher. We spoke pleasantly to him us is lack of blaming). He took (we were friendly with him in speech). (VIII.) a house.

to ask

Twenty-fifth Lesson.

is

1. Conjugation of verb the second radical of which hamza.

Si Perf.

Si

"to ask".

Imperf. Indie.

ill!

written (also jllu)

Subj.

jLlj (J^

to oJU

etc.

oL*o

oLwj

M

Jui

etc.

etc.

Twenty -fifth Lesson.

187

Jussive.

etc.

etc.

Imperative. (also

written

jll

etc.

Part. Act.

etc.

JJLl -

Part.

Pass.

or

,

(also

3j)_j

written

^^-^

or

Passive Perf. J^l, Imperf. Indie. JLLji (also written

Example Imperf.

of the form Joe: vjjj"'to be cast

Indie.

vjIXj

(also

V

down

written

Imper.

Example of

the form

J.J6:

Imperf. Indie.

Imper.

J^

"to be brave".

First Part.

138

Derived Forms. Perf.

Imperf

Part. Act. Part. Pass.

Indie. Imper.

,,

ju

n.

IV.

v.

VI. ,,o,

u,o

VII. OLvAJt ^

JuLw.*^

JwLwJ!_^

Jjdf

*-^ri

, G

VIII.

G

o

Gg,o,

>

(jLtM^/4

,

lxLo

,vxxJu
^A>Jt

(from 1^ "to bind up a

,

^ JUCvWwiX

,

,

wound"

as this form of

3L1 does not occur). IX. does not occur.

Verbal Noun. II.

m.

!Uls > ii

uJ

IV.

5HlS

v. 3lli-

Example of

2.

lyi

verb,

VI.

StLJ

VIII.

!tixh I

vii. StLJi

whose third radical

Imperf.

Iixiic.

Subj.

^

x. is

hamza:

"to read".

Perf.

^

Juss.

,,

i--o,

f.e*

y

i/^

5yM

5y^

t,o,

,&,

i-o,

lytt

!yu

!_JG

I, o.

139

Twenty-fifth Lesson.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

etc.

etc.

Subj;

Juss.

etc.

etc.

Imperative 8

-0

Part. Active

iysl

j.yjt

Pass. Perf.

etc.

Part. Passive

^yj

Imperf. Indie.

dJyi Conjugation of Imperf.:

UP

-

^Is s.yli

lyL'

etc.

verbs

which

take

kasra

"to be healthy", Imperf. Indie.

in

the

^^5, Impe-

rative

Conjugation of verbs of the form Joe: Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

^^

"to sin".

Imper.

etc.

etc.

etc.

First Part.

140

of verbs

Conjugation be slow"

of the form

jJis:

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

yLi "to

Imper.

o.

,

.i,.

i.

o^ku

_?rv"

etc.

etc.

etc.

Derived Forms. Perf. Imperf. Indie.

*JM *

s-

c

9

:

-

to,

!yil

L5j*^

L5j*'

L5j**

Es_

*.*-IJixj

i--

9~--.>

V.

lyij

E - --

*-

o,

^j^*

9

9

tjijl

VIII. IJXSJ

IX. Does not occur. -0-0

X.

^

&

0-0.

^j Verbal Noun.

II.

III.

Jiys

?LL^

IV.

syj

VI.

3JL&

VIII.

* V.

VII.

sfjut

- '

is--

:.:.

-o

r>

9-0,

^

tyij *'

:.--

* -o-

E-,o

9

o

f

s-

'

S-oS

IV.

r

V-'

"i

r.'

-.

VII.

Part. Act. Part. Pass.

Imper. 2

r

n

X.

Twenty-fifth Lesson.

141

First Part.

142

Exercise 47

2T

OU

it

L'4?

L^

ill*

i

Li

j^


j

b

^'

UL

W

(Less. 9, 6)

J

ljJl

jGjJJ

3l5

Jalll

xUJ

cn

jj !l^ ^i

(than)

U

(for

^

me) u

Exercise 48.

Read

this letter.

seeks (j^ai)

me

that

I

(S)

i

have read

may

it.

This

woman

read her letter to her.

The people appeared asking (Imperf.) concerning my condition. Ask me for what you want (ask me thy need).

I

ask you to (that you) pardon

my

guilt.

143

Twenty-sixth Lesson.

cask with apples? We have -girl, read this immediately. I know book. They began to read (that they read). I have the beginning (Verbal Noun) of this book. Come announced to them the arrival of the Emir. We bring thee forward that I may reward thee.

Have you

filled

it.

filled

--

Fill

this it

We

congratulation (Verbal Noun). (Part.) in the Arabic language. a school.

are

beginners

The Sultan

set

up

Twent-sixth Lesson.

Weak 1.

Verbs,

The Weak verbs (Jojw

the radicals

is

a

waw

Jons),

in

which one of

or a ya are divided into three

classes,: "~*r '

O

-

-6

o

A. Assimilated verbs^ (o&o joe) whose is

waw

) ,

B. is

radical

f}

c,

o

Hollow verbs (vJy>i Joe) whose second radical

waw_or

ya.

Defective verbs djoSij is_waw or ya^ C.

A.

Verbs

Jots)

whose third

radical

Assimilated Verbs.

Verbs whose

I.

2.

first

or ya.

whose

first

radical

radical

first

is

is

3

.

waw have

the

following peculiarities": a)

in

Those that take kasra injhe Imperf.

the Imperf. and Imper.

Imperf. J^aj

Imper. J^o.

in the Imperf.

e.g.

Many

lose their

from

j^5

also

that take

have the same peculiarity

"to arrive"

e.g.

fatha

First

144

Part.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

Imper.

"to place, put".

*j

jto

^,

"to be wide"

.*j

*

gl

"'to fall".


sive "-

v^.5 "^

L

^

v4^

v^

Most verbs of the form Joe take kasra in the Imperf. (contrary to the rule in Less. 13, 3) "to trust",

.

/

o

Imperf.

"to inherit"

^

/u

The verbs which

Imperf.

ey.

,,

^

j^

damma

take

Imperf. and preserve their ^ arg__rare^ afraid",

/sS

Imper.

cy^j

"to be swollen"

'^\

e.g.

Indie.

j4"-_*J,

or

fatha

e.g.

:

Imper.

in

jJ?.l

jhe

"to be

jo*.^

(for

J^>-3

(

see below).

Those which are also Doubled verbs retain

^inthe

Imperf. e.g.

Note.

^

"to

In the Imperf. of the Passive the

even when

it

Indie. Act.

X^r., Pass. ^X>-^j.

b)

kasra

from (for

it

If is

jc>-31

is lost in

the \vaw

the Active

is

so from

jo>

e.g.:

vowelless

changed into a ya

their,

love", Imperf. Indie. o_^j.

*X>j

.,

is

retained,

"to find", Imperf.

and preceded by

e.g. j4=T.I (for

the Verbal

Noun

a.

Jo^j[) Imper. IV.

is

Twenty-sixth Lesson.

Vowelless

waw

(for Jc>-jj)

damma

preceded by

cf.

145

becomes u

e.g.

Less. 27.

In the VIII. form the followiDgrj^ e.g.

waw

the

c)

assimilated to

is

J*oj "to join" VIII. JyaSJ, Imperf. Indie. II.

3.

Verbs whose

These Verbs retain

_**j

(j*Ju

"to be

ya

is

into a

Indie. IV.

In the

J%j

4.

is

(for

^Uj

,,

,,

e.g.

^c.

(see Less. 25).

damma,

"to be awake",

JOJL

e.g.

~-o.

vowelless and follows

waw

VIII.

following td e.g.

radical

ya in the Imperfect

Imperf. Indie.

"to despair",

If the

changed

easy'.',

first

their

it

Imperf.

-a&u).

form the ya

J^j

VIII.

is

the

assimilated to

%

u

Conjugation of the verb whose

first

radical

is

jyo3 "to arrive, join". Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

etc.

etc.

etc. Arabic Grammar.

is

Juss.

etc. 10

.

first Part.

146

Imperative O

Part, Act. G

Juo

Part. Pass.

etc.

O

Verbal

G

o -

Noun J^3

j^

Pass. Perf.

An example

..>

0.

or Jyaj or iXo

Imperf. Indie.

which

of those verbs,

in the Imperfect is J^>.. "to

retain their

3

be afraid", Imperf. Indie.

Imper. J^rj. Derived Forms.

Part. Act.

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper.

,-

>

o,,

- ~>

-

>

Part. Pass. G s - >

*o

II.

III.

jy^fj

--o -IV. V.

VI.

VII.

:

VIII.

IX. *

X.

jsx

^

Does not occur. .,

O

,

J^O^A**<|

>

0,0-

^V^fl^iUMj

O

0,0

G

.J-O^XAW?

0,OJ

JwO_jJC**v9

0,0,

O

>

J*9^C*w

Verbal Nouu. II.

juyoji'

IH. Jll^ or iUux"

IV.

3LL|

VI. J^tji' VIII.

V. 3-^3 VK. Sliyj

X.

3^

Twenty-sixth Lesson. 5.

147

Conjugation of the verbs, whose

first

radical

is

^

;

"to be dry".

J^J

Irnperf. Indie.

Perf.

Subj.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Imperative

.

Part. Act.

Part. Pass.

etc.

Verbal

Noun U *AJ

Pass. Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

,jj

Derived Forms. Perf. Iinperf. Indie. Iniper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

III. -

-oS

>

>

o

oS

O

V. 9-

VI.

,,j

First Part.

148

Perf. Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

vii.

IX. Does not occur.

Verbal Noun. 7

H.

IV.

i

,^Uil

J

VI.

VIII.

vn.

v.

Vocabulary.

to complete.

II.

to-

time

remain, stand still, IV. to stay,

refrain

j j

from (with >***

^),

I.

to learn,

ascertain

(with

-

VIII. to

be

dis-

turbed, excited.

hearing.

IV. to conduct, bring. to be necessary,

to

&

incumbent (with

throne.

eat,

lay down, to allow (only

let,

in

Imperf.

Imper.).

anger,

and body.

Exercise 49.

fi

4521

First Pare.

150

1

^^i

ffi

1^3? (j|3

U

(j-j*

L3&

Jj

(in

regard to

bo

b

;i

^

.

.

.

.)

u

(j^is; k.

ul

*,*>r

^~

v

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

151

Exercise 50.

You have

Hast sought us and not found us. I have down on the seat? not yet laid them down, but I will lay them down Let Lay them down immediately. shortly. If God will, you will arrive at us stay with you.

thou

laid

these books

-

(it) Cairo in (the) comfort.

We Ho

long ago (since a time).

have already arrived from the bear, he

fled

fell into the cistern. friends, girl, do not fall. This dwelling lead us to the sheikh of the tribe. Stand still and do not will be very suitable for us.

The entrance

move.

to (jUc) the

Sultan was

made

It is our duty to bring you to the possible for us. Many .marvels are found prince (the bringing you to). I shall describe it to thee in this letter. in Egypt.

Your fallen

letter

has not reached

into great

distress.

(j,!

oj

God

us.

will

your affairs, for He fety is the Helper have agreed that you shall stay with us

We

have

help (^^* (Part.).

II)

We

for a long time

(sjji Accus.).

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

B.

is

Hollow Verbs.

1. Hollow Verbs i.e. those, whose second radical j or ^"observe the following rules!

First Part.

152

^

or

A. If the

vowelless and the third radical

is

then the 3 or ^js dropped to prevent ajsojvowelless, 13, 3) e.g. the meeting of two vowgTesTIettirs. (Intro.

ia

From below, B, is

Ji (for

dropped and

From

becomes

it

,Jb; so

'o) the Jussive

eC (for

From sJJ> Imper.

the Jussive should be (.yb (see are vowelless, the 3 r

^)

but as the 3 and

1),

J^)

(for

Imper. ^3.

is *.J,

the Jussive

the Imper. is

s^k

1

.,

j.

the

^>.

third radical, by conjugation, receives a ud voweJ, no elision takes place e.g. 2 Sing. Fein. Juss. If the

.Ji^iS, Plur.

Masc. Imper. \jAj*.

So also the alif, when it takes the place .of ^ or ^, is dropped, whenever the third radical is vowelless

by conjugation

e.g.

From IV. jjsf

(for j^Sl) is

formed 2 nd Sing. Masc.

ie*ti.

B. If the 3 or ^5

is

vowelled, the following rules

are observeHl

the ~or L 9

1} If

of the

,

vowelless;

aw

From j.15

radical is voweliess, then the vowel, given to It. the^or g thus becoming then changed to~ a &u<Tiw to f, e.g.:

first is is

(=

t

fja]

is

formed

Iraperf.

Indie

^su

(for ^jil).

From

^f

(=

>clj),

From ck> (= ?.

for

Imperf. Indie.

v_3^i-),

^MJ

Imperf. Indie.

(for

*H).

vJL?.

(for

153

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

So

also

from

for

Indie. IV. for pjsf); Imperf.

1^1

Part. Act. IV.

^b); IV.

are formed Perf. IV. J&

(= ^s)

jLlS

^

(for

^Uu

^JU

^aJ

(for

for

'^

(for ^Jib

for

Part. Pass.

^U);

~

for

rjju).

2) If the first radical is vowelled.

Then if am, awu,

a) a) (twa,

Perf.

X

the

third

radical

^ becomes j, ^^> becomes

I.

becomes JLb, J**P becomes

3^i>

also

is

become

aya, ayi, ay u

a,

vowelled,

e.g.

^

\Jte>,

3 r<1 Sing.

becomes

VII.

(jJs>.

Form

Perf. 4y*J!

becomes 3lJu! and Imperf. Indie, oyi^j becomes

^lilj.

wwi,

P)

becomes

e.g. Perf.

-&*?. b)

place

st

VIII.

rules a)

^ys^ -*g^\

and

&j

apply also to the VIII. form

(3)

becomes

becomes

If the third

awa becomes

Sing. Perf. to,,

o-e

p) tl

I.

lj

^|,

Imperf. ~j*&:. becomes

jLx*|.

radical

is

vowclless, elision takes

and

a) 1

The

Perf.

Perf.

Pass.

e.g.

z,

.&o becomes ^.oo.

J^3,

Note.

become

wy*

^^

u,

>(,

becomes

awl,

co

jo, o'

uwi and uyi becomej;

becomes vils

aya,

ayi

become

becomes &**, v^o>>

f,

e.g.

becomes

it,

becomes

st e.g. 1

v

Sing. Perf. Pass.

OAAO becomes

2. I^e_Verbal Nouns of IV. and X. drop the and add fa after the third radical; e.g.

From

the Verbal j.15?

it is

Noun

from

is Kxls'^j

I.

First Part.

154

In the Participle Active of the

3.

form the G""^

I.


and the^_are changed

into

-

!?J, (for

hamza;

e.g.

^Ss (for r

is),

4. In the Participle Passive of the I. form of verbs whose Second radical is^ one of the two waws is propped and damnta is written over the one left;

+

I.

~

G

j.,

^

^

first radical;

G

e is

^AA (for ^JA*). In the Pass. Part, of verbs whose second radical^ the isdropped and kasra is written under thg

e.g.

is

TT~~ ^15 the Part. Pass.

from

Note

from

e.g.

'

G

*

cL

the Pass. Part.

(= ^u)

A

1.

few verbs whose middle radical

is

is

^ or ^5 of

Joo preserve the ^ or ^9 and are conjugated

the form

I.

><> ~

as

Sound

verbs; e.g

jz. "to be one-eyed", Irnperf. Indie,

^au

etc.

Hollow verbs, which denote Colours or Defects, always retain

^

the 3 or

J

in thg IX. form; e.g.

"to be or

become black" Imperf.

"to be or

become white"

Indie.

* -o

The

5

often retained in the X.

is

>

o

-

form;

e.g.

o -

Imperf. Indie,

Note

Hollow verbs, which have 3 or

2.

always retain their ^

^ as third radical

e.g.

^5_jj* ''to

be worth", Imperf. Indie. (j_?+->.

Note

Those Hollow verbs which have ta or nun as it with a following ta or nun', e.g.

3.

third radical assimilate -

-

From

OU

From

o

i,

the the

I 8 * Sing. Perf. I. is

l*t

Plur. Perf.

I.

is

UT

>

>

c^v

(for

(for

U

o

>

155

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

Conjugation of

j.15

(=

"to stand": j.^5)

Perfect.

Sing.

Dual

jte

0--

Plural

Uli

I_^l5

^0>

-

..

Uxls

(

..*S

Imperfect. Indie. q.

o.

oin^r.

, m.

3f

.'.-

.'.-

<%ftj

<JLi

*

'

i

I.

Dual

3.

m.

3.

f.

"

2

Plur. 3.

3.

t*^^

j>*

+

'

f

-

t^y_jA>

'Jijl

g

g in.

f.

"i^.QJ

*

i*-'^

'

n ^5.

Juss.

...'

."^

*

,,

Subj. -

'

Q

;,

} *

J

(i

>*

First Part.

156

Indie. Plur.

2.

in.

2.

Juss.

Subj.

O j*j&

^

f.

:

r>

1.

Imperative S. 2. 2.

D.

m.

^3

^5

f.

2.

PI. 2. 2-

Part. Act.

^15 Part. Pass,

Uj5

m.

rjiU

|_^5

^

o^ Passive.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

Subj.

UB >

,lu ,

- >

JL ,

JG e>

, ^

AJlj j,.ftJ

etc.

etc.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

Derived Forms. Perf.

III.

$ .-

IV.

r

l5i

Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part Act. Part. Pass

157

Twenty-seventh Lesson. Perf. Imperf. Indie. -a-**--,

V.

Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass. O OS--; , os--

*Jij

VI.

VII.

VIII.

IX.

^j~~*

^%-*4

--,&

X.

>

LAJUkw!

0-0

-0>

'J

AJt/Lwt

,jjiX^*)U

wanting.

o^**ws

3vj>^*t

.0-

^iX&X^-./O

6 _

- .

O

...

Verbal Noun.

,s

V.

K^'JU

VI.

VJ5[

VII.

II.

III.

IV.

5.

!j

VIII.

IX.

^183

X.

^LxiJi

Conjugation of the form J*s.

JU> Perf.

(for

s_^)

"to fear"

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

old?.

oli:

'

o'ws:

-

.

1

s

ol1 etc.

etc.

etc.

Juss.

First Part.

158

Imperative 6

Part. Act.

Part. Pass.

etc.

Passive.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

Subj.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

etc. etc.

Conjugation of the form 51 b (for

Perf.

"to be long".

Jb)

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

Juss.

e*c

e t.

e te.

vl^Jlb etc.

6.

J***:

-

Imper.

etc.

Conjugation of verb, whose middle radical

JLO

(for 'jLa)

"to

is

c

become" Perfect.

Sing. 3. m. 3.

f.

Ju>

0j U ^ O

,,

2.

m.

2.

f.

1.

o

OjA9

Dual

|Jli

6^li ^

O

Plural

!^U>

Q^> o

J r,

159

Twenty- seventh Lesson.

Imperfect. Indie.

Siug. 3.

,1

Subj.

Juss.

m.

3.

f.

2.

m.

2.

f.

I-

Dual

3.

m.

3,

f.

2.

Plur.

.

g

^

1^

3. rr

3.

f.

o

tv.

2.

f.

1-

Imperative

Part. Act.

Part. Pass.

t^

First Part.

160

Passive. Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Juss.

etc.

Derived Forms. Perf.

IV.

vV.

Iraperf. Indie.

Irqper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

}

-*-i wkXU

*-:. ^A=L>

*-:.-

^ClAJ

-"

VI. VII.

ji^[

vin. JiLit (see Less. 21, S -0

IX. ijaot

i

4 a) ,0,

O

u

8-0,

,0

^

13

\J**!

1

-?'

u13*^*

wanting.

Verbal Noun. II.

UJ

III.

IV.

V.

!IJJ

VIII.

1^

VI.

:

IX.

gtUI ^ *

VII.

*JuL

" *l^Jj J t

X.

^' gjLkll S

Twenty-seventh Lesson.

161

Conjugation of the form Joe; ujU> (for vJyjS ) "to fear". 1

Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

Subj.

Juss.

Imper.

etc.

162

First Part.

First

164 -

f

>ji

i

{ I

pli

o

be absent,

to

e)

(, V1J7 '

Part.

(5

-

>oo eggs

(collective).

go away.

=

*_^ government.

to sleep.

^1)

to .^Lb (^5)

protection.

fly.

Exercise 51.

^

eg

c^o!

-

oS

^j!

o

-

-

Q,.,

M" sX5

o

oJi

,

cr

(Optative) jlif

|Jo5

(Intro.

yaxi

U

lllu

9)

ioJT

Twenty -seventh Lesson.

"as regards"

.

.

.,)

Cs

^llj

i[ pjJ&T

jNjlo!

L

fSA>

54-/! (Less. 21,

^

^

(what .... of insult

5,-b) oloL'

S&S\

(see Less. 42, 2, f

ZJ

(Proverb) ^J,\J>

165

x

= what insult) KJ

,*

'

s

("which the lions

jdLi

!^>

l

jjJ!3

fear", see Less.

^

C

^jlij

31,4) WL^J

(Less. 21, 5, a)

j'S

.

First Part.

166

oojf

"as regards"...)

i

uLOOLsl

^Ja

k

j*j*

-S

o^

j

v_

(

see Less

'

42) 2)

-

^

U

(Optative) Ji-ou

'S

\

BoU

&|

(Proverb)

(Less. 34, 6)

,

*^

*

Titf.hr

f +

-

SOlSt

s

*->

*E

-.^

dULLP

'tii'Jol

c^

* ^

NxSb

^

BJu33

Exercise 52.

Rise in

this

O

city

come upon misfortune.

girl,

and

let

us.

us

sit.

A

->

We

wish to stay

misfortune has were afflicted by (\J) a great

half a year.

You O woman,

great

go away and do not return.

What have you said? We said, this is not Do not say this. Dost thou wish O girl,

fitting.

that I

Twenty-eighth Lesson.

167

It was said, the king had say to thee the truth? He did not die and will live long. Truly I wished to we yearn to see you (to your seeing). Go visit you, but was not able to (that). my son, in the protection of God. The merchant, who lives

died.

in Cairo will visit us.

(Part, of

pli?)

God may

lengthen your

sleep that

he was

and drink and

life.

We

wish that

fancied in

(the)

We

flying.

rest.

He

They

flew from joy. handed us the coffee

Eat and

He wished handing of the coffee we rested. You have he was not able. Did you spend made us giddy with your speech. the night in Damascus? No, we did not spend the The government appointed him night in that city, The coward Trust in God and fear not. governor. after the

to sell these eggs, but

'

does not attain the reward.

(fearing)

question.

I

have already repeated

Repeat your

He

it.

will

This stuff (jiUS) will not last. approve our opinion. (The) obedience (Verbal Noun of "obey") is our duty.

Twenty-eighth Lesson

Defective Verbs.

C.

1.

The

Defective verbs, which have ^ or

^ as

third

radical are conjugated according to the following rules

A. If the ^ or l5

is

It is dropped, when nothing 1_. end, as in the Jussive and Imper. e.g.

From U3 (= Juss.

xj,

Imper.

is

added

_^>) "to call": Imperf. Indie, >!.

:

vowelless: at the

Part.

*'irst

168

From Juss.

Imperf. Indie.

^Imper.p!.

From ,

throw":

"to

(= ^;)

-xj

Imper.

meet":

"to

"j&

Imperf.

Indie.

Juss. ^^fiJLi.

^K.

So also in the

II.

form (and other Derived forms):

forms Imperf. Indie. L^vXj, Juss. cjo, Imper.

The Pronoun

is

added as &xOl

him".

at the end:

If there is

a)

aw becomes au; ay becomes

Masc. Perf. b)

I.

Uo

of

I.

1.

When If the

is

uiv

r,

is

^>j

"to be noble"

B.

o^*x>; of

is

iw and iy become

Masc. Perf. 3y*<

"call

an addition

2.

of

cj>.

even when the Personal

takes place

elision

ai e.g. 2 nd Sing.

^,

is

becomes

\&*+Oj\

of

v\

^

^^A} is

.

2 ud Sing.

e.g.

ulyJif;

of

or

^

o.,^.

the 3 or ^5 i8_vowelled:

second radical

is

vowelless. the_ S

e.g,

raid

Verbal " :

Noun

3^5 of L^J

(of the :

3,

o,

form Joe) of

i^~

J*>

^If the second radical is vowelled, and no addition at the end: a) awa and ay a become a, this a being written alif when it is derived from atpq," with ya when a) there is

^

IPs

3 ra

derived Jrom__a?/: e.g is

1*3, of

fyjiwa Pass.

unchanged. unchanged.

^

is

become^ Perf.

I.

So in

iSing.^Masc.

.Perf. 1.

of

^J.

iya, iya >

remains; e

becomes

Imperf.

Subj.

g. >

I.

^^

becomes remains

remains '^^ -

169

Twenty-eighth Lesson. >

*

*t] uwa remains; does not occur).

e.g. 5J*,

mow becomes

8)

- )

.*

u\

x

Imperf. Subj. _^x.j, (uya Ihdic.

Imperf.

e.g.

O

I.

_^Xj

becomes _j&xi, (uyu does not occur). s]

iyit

becomes

g;

Imperf. Indie.

e.g.

^^ becomes

I.

does not occur). ^yy', (iwu

awu and ayw become a (always

C)

J-'O-'

\5); e -g- Imperf. Indie.

^^

I.

^o^

written with O

>.,&.*

.*

^fo^\ ^j. (from

^^

becomes

"to pasture")

*

becomes

The same changes wbereTIowever

c

^to becomes

rule 3); e.g. III.

becomes b) a)

lJu

take place in the Derived forms, 9 alwajsjakes the place of ^ (see below

There

is

The

and

,

(J=|3;

an addition t <-

at the end:

are retained

followed by an alif (in the Dual);

3^

Dual, Perf.

3^

Imperf. Indie.

etc.

I.

when immediately e.g.;

|J^ 1^, L^, UJ.

Imperf.

2 nd

Imper. I^o! etc. In these cases however iwa becomes iya\

becomes

LytoJ;

Pass. Perf.

e.g.

\^o)

\^> becomes Leo.

2 nd Sing. f follows (as in Plur. Masc. Fein. Imperf. and Imper.) .the following changes take placej_ a,wfi and aya become au. and so aivuna and ayana P)

If M or

become auna: t^co; 3

rd

;

e.g.

3 rd Plur. Masc. Perf.

Plur. Masc. Imperf.

becomes

';

I.

I.

l^^to becomes

\^o^ becomes

lsL'

becomes

j^a,

L.

and

First Part.

170

MC#,

and

iyn

become u and so twang and

urni

iyana become ana;

3 rd Plur. Masc.

e.g.

j^jj becomes \j&\ 3 J

\jjtoj-,

Masc. Imperf.

and ~

tiwl

ay?

become

becomes

^j^kxj'

o

^.

e.g.

o ^jj. >

^A^vXj';

I.

O ^

Juss. jjj^cJG

becomes

o*

-

-

becomes

2 nd Sing. Fern. Imperf.

Q *

+

j~O~~^~

i;

1^J

becomes l^l; 3rd Plur.

j^

becomes

O j**j4

I.

and Q-^-J becomes ^.yy.

becomes 7)

nd oi; e.g. 2 Sing. Fern. Imperf.

becomes

oy?

,jliij;

When

I.

Imper. Sing. Fein. L^kJ! becomes ^aJt.

o of

the

the 3 rd Sing. Fern. Perf. is added,

awa and aya

are first changed to a and then, to prevent the meeting of two vowelless letters (see Intro.

the

13, 3), ^the alif is

dropped;

o_j*o becomes

e.g.

oUo

then u>^cO;

^yJ becomes oUj then u>^. of the Dual is (irregularly) formed by Fem. The^

analogy from the Sing.:

The

'u^J,

changes into

iya],

Dual

Note. The ^5 as sign of ti into

\

Intro.

whenever a suffix 6, Note 3). 2.

Jo.

following forms are regular i-^J-^j (since iwa

ia

added

at the

;

e.g.

end of a word

is

changed

"he threw him", (see ^U^

the Active Participle iwun and iyun are G 6 becomes into in\ e.g. _^c!o becomes c!o; ,c*5.

In

changed

These forms are declined

like

(jaii

in Less.

-6,

3.

Singular.

Nom. Gen. become

z.

with the Article ^tSJ! (iww and pto;

Twenty-eighth Lesson.

171

Accus. Uck>; with the Article <^lJj?

(iya remains).

Dual.

Nom.

Gen. Accus.

^licto;

^-JXA^O.

Plural.

Nom. yj&te i^xcfo (iwt

*

and

and

(uwfi

become

iyi

iyn

become

Gen. Accus.

),

i).

In the Part. Pass, of verbs whose third radical is the two waws are contracted into one written witE s

tasMtd;

,

sTTT

o ,

becomes

^jo

e.g.

In the verbs whose third radical the form

theof 3.

is

changed

to ,

f

and

is

^5,

^of

the

this is assimilated to

~*^T.

TT3

the root; e.g. j^yyj becomes

The verbs whose

third radical

is

are treated

9

in the Derived forms as if their third radical were e.g.

from

Leo: II.

4.

The Verbal Noun

a)

,^=0,

III.

^i

^lo, IV. of the

II.

form

is

G- o, iUxaj (as in the case of the verbs pattern

b)

is

In the Verbal alif;

e.g.

Noun slsSU

of the

from

III,

t^to throw": *.

a,

from

VIII. from ^

tjj&l

come

^.

form the ya

is

J,^ "to meet".

9liiJ!.

-

VII. from .y^Ail "to

'

third

cLIn the Verbal Nouns of of the IV VII.. and xTlbrms, where the third radical follows an the. ya is changed into a hatnza (without bearer); IV. from

;

of the "

whose

O- o hanusa. See Less. 24, 2, h); e.g. i\.^-o

changed into

g

"

T

radical

(

etc.

to

an end"

:

"to buy": sljx&j.

" O

ucJ "to ask forgiveness, abdicate"

:

.

cdif,

e.g.

First Part.

172

uyun becomes

of the V.

uyu becomes

in,'

Jib' becomes

/&;

Noun

In the Verbal

d)

xtlS;

f;

and_VL forms

e.g.

with the Article

'^Sw

jk\

{

becomes

and ipbat,

of the Derived

forms ii/un In the Participles in; iyu becomes i; ayun becomes an (written with (t;); ayu becomes a (also written with'\c); e.g. 5.

becomes

becomes

JfJU,

becomes

with the Article

'.^Lo,

^SU

with the Article

I ;

Part. Pass

II.

etc.

^ySil!

Conjugation of the Defective Verbs. a)

Conjugation of the verbs whose third radical

a)

Of the form

Uo

is *

J^s;

"to call". Perfect.

Dual

Singular

masc.

3.

3.

masc.

3.

fem.

Plural 3.

masc.

\

3.

fem.

2.

masc.

2.

masc.

2.

fem.

2.

fem.

3. fern.

L;

1.

Imperfect. Indie.

Sing.

,,

3.

masc.

3.

fem.

2.

masc.

2.

fem.

1.

Subj.

Juss.

;

173

Twenty-eighth Leeson.

Indie.

Dual

3.

masc.

3.

fem.

Subj.

2.

Plur.

Juss.

t^eJG*

3.

masc.

3.

fem.

2.

masc.

2.

fem.

Imperative. *>o1>

Siog. maec.

Dual lcoi

e

Plur. masc.

^ fem.

.

fern.

^o! Part.

Sing.

nom. masc.

cfj

Active.

(with Art.

^ijJi)

accus.

gen.

Dual.

jp|.

nom.

masc.

J

gen. accus. Plur.

notn.

gen. accus.

^

Part. Pass.

fem.

fem.

iixc

First Part.

174

Passive Perfect, Sing.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

^o

Dual

Pass. Imperf. Tndic. Sing.

.2.

Dual

2.

fern.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

3.

masc.

,,

3.

fern.

,,

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

1.

Siibj.

masc.

2.

Plur.

U&j

^UcjsJ

^J^'

Plur.

Juss.

175

Twenty-eighth Lesson.

p)

Of

^o}

the form Jjti:

"'to

be pleased". Perfect.

Sing.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

I-

^i>*

Dual

Sing. 3. masc. 3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2. fern.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

Plur.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

1.

Plur.

1^,

_..^ Imperf. Tndic.

Dual

L^

Subj.

Juss.

Inrst Part.

176

Imperative.

Dual

Sing, raasc. \jo^ fern.

fern.

J^t tl

Part. Act.

Pass. Perf.

Plur. masc.

L*>J

'^o}

Part. Pass,

^o) Imperf.

(s.

Verbs of the form

Jo*i (as

SjM

Indie.

"to be noble") are rare,

b) Conjugation of verbs whose third radical

Of

a)

^J*}

the form

is

^:

jjli;

"to throw". Perfect.

Sing. 3. masc. 3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

^*J

Dual

vi^

U**

Lx^

Plur.

\^ ^AJ

1.

Imperf. Indie. Sing.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

1.

Subj.

Juss.

Twenty-eighth Lesson.

Imperf. Indie.

Dual

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

,,

2.

Plur.

3.

masc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

"

*

1

Juss.

Subj.

c*V Imperative.

Sing. masc.

Dual

^t

Plur. masc.

ll^t

fern,

fern.

Verbal

Noun

Part. Act.

r

Pass. Perf.

Part. Pass.

^^

Imperf. Indie.

^^

etc.

etc.

,3)

Of the form >S:

_1 "to meet" Arabic Gretnmar.

is

conjugated

like

^

J4

==

First Part.

173

c)

Conjugation of the Derived forms of

all

Defective

verbs. Perf. II.

JU

in.

&i

IV.

Jt

V.

J&

vi.

J.ii

VII.

J&[

VIII.

IX.

L

Imperf. Indie. Imper. Part. Act. Part. Pass.

jiS Wanting.

Verbal Noun.

Twenty-eighth Lesson.

V. to breakfast.

j:

stretch, V.

'"

to

j>

I

stretch

to

*

oneself,

179

butter.

(dried dates (collective).

1

rest.

I

tobacco.

V.

take supper,

to

to ;

L-) wixt5)

(plur.

and VIII.

1.

to

(suffici-

ently).

l

person

G.,..

r^

last.

to call, to pray for, wish (with J of

be

1

watered

go away, Part.

Act. past,

herbs.

of

,

rain.

thing) VIII. (see Less. 21, 5, b) to to X. claim,

G

=

time.

^Uj.

winter.

summon. G

remain.

to

rest, f

1

^jL.

remainder. G

(pi.

-

'PJ&-

Ojxis)

iio

section,

season.

to pasture, feed on.

and III. to meet, IV. to throw, VI.

1.

j'

I

I

and VIII. to meet one another. IV. to give (with two accus.), VI. to give one another.

sheep

O *lf) seller.

VIII. to honour.

,,

-

,=

1

(plur.

(collective).

to

***" \

1x5*

approach.

((literally

"to

let

live") to greet.

to bend. o *

-

iXw to complain of -ASS

brevity. |

j

to

be sufficient for, to reward.

III.

collecting.

180

First Part.

Twenty-eighth Lesson.

181

Exercise 53.

3J3T

UL

S&.

j>

tsi^J

i

jti'

(Proverb) * *

- --o-o

-

cJ

C

ijJ

(for

i-Su

o

o

Jall'd*

1X^(5

j

Lo^.

l.

olf

b3

Ub

isJo

(Less. 31, 4)

^i

(Less. 34, 6)

Ljf (Less. 44,

&J

^M

5)

JU

*XCJOL*O

First Part.

182

=>

LM

Lie

i

a s pledge) \JjS

i.

T (Optative:

J Is

(

"May God pardon",

iJT

toJ>

^-00,0

1*1*^

*5j

Less. 30, 6)

(joo

a ---

t>3^

iJJJT

(Proverb)

(Less. 34, 7)

oojf U

xJiilJL

,U

J?

i |

j

;

uJ

il

U

(Proverb)

jl;

^'

u

.

-

188

Twenty -eighth Lesson.

b

it

jjT\

(Koran, Sura

1.)

Q

vi^fti

.LuJ?

.^-JiiLIf

(Proverb)

Iwij,

.(Jfi^

^A

Exercise 54.

When was (Part, Pass.)

house built?

this

in the lime

)

(

It

was

built

of the last Sultan.

We beg your pardon I have read your (we hope from you the excuse). Do not forget what I have said to thee O letter. I have not forgotten it O my master. Go boy! When will the time of slowly (with slowness). Why

did you weep

girls?

w

our meeting be? necessary for

(is

due

(right).

We us).

shall give

you what we ought

You have

Remain with

us.

not given us our I heard a crier

(Part. Act. III. of |jo) crying (he cries)

The

with a loud voice.

We weeping). did not happen.

girl

wept

in the

market

bitterly (a bitter

What you wanted fainting. What you have said is sufficient

fell

me. Whither art thou going? Wast thou I met a dog in content with what I said to thee? the street. What (how) is this called in Arabic? I went from the house to meet them (to their meeting). Do not be anxious about this man. Spare me (make me remain II). -*- Hast thou watered the horses? We have already breakfasted and, if God will, we shall shortly take supper. Truly, the merchants buy and sell in the market. Buy what is necessary for us. If God will, we shall meet in the current for

(flowing)

month.

First Part.

J84

Twenty-ninth Lesson. Doubly weak Verb, The most usual of the doubly weak verbs

1.

are/

of the following three classes:

A. Those in which one radical another is a weak letter.

or

is

hamza, while

B.

Those

in

which two radicals are weak

C._

Those

m

which

weak

all

three radicals are

letters.

hamzas

letters! Hi

Verbs in which one radical another a weak letter. the first radical I) Those in which

is

2.

second s or

Imperf. Indio.

. ^ oi o

hamza, the

e.g.: vjt "to return".

<jr;

Perf.

>

>

.Tuss.

>..

><>*

oj^j

-^

oj

is

hamza and

(also written

o

t,

v^

^j)

t-

i-.

!

.

,

,

^o

-

I

^jj

etc.

etc.

etc.

o_p

Imper. c

9

i,

v_j5

jjjt

Part. Active

.^

Pass. Perf.

Ju[.

!

So too the rarer verbs: vJ! (for ^i3 !) "to injure".

jT

(for

31

(for

2)

third

_j

vi,!)

jo!) "to be strong".

Those or

"to come, return".

^;

in

which the

e.g.

j^l

II.

first

"to come".

jJ? "to strengthen".

radical

is

hamza, the

185

Twenty-ninth Lesson.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf. ,E

etc.

,'$s

M

etc.

j|j

(from oJ5)

|c>j?

o!

Part. Active

this

jil

is

jl

Imper. ol; Pass. Perf. j^J.

"to refuse"; Imperf. Indie,

"to pay";

II.

^j.

"to bring"; Imperf.

^ot

(with

jj'j.

same meaning); Verbal

l\oli'.

3)

Those

in

or

^\

iirst

which the second radical e.g.

,j^

is

is

hamza,

;

the IV. form). Sing. 3. masc. ,,

3.

fern.

,,

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

1.

hamza,

(Note that the e.g. ^f, "to see". dropped in the Imperf. and Imper. and in

the third ^ or L$

hamza

is

"to despair"; Imperf. Indie.

LXJi; Imper. UW M_ etc. 4) Those in 'which the second radical

.

etc.

o

Imperf. Indie,

verb the IV. form

So also

the

oil'

.

(with Article j^fl)

Indie, ^^j; Juss. o^j;

Noun

etc.

also shortened

Pass. Perf. Ji

lot"

0'*

<

Imper.

Of

I.

.^

M

&

Juss.

Subj.

1.

Perfect.

^

Dual

o^

,,

C^ [,

Plur.

\J\}

Qj'l,

First

186

Part.

Imperfect Indie. Sing.

Dual

Juss.

Subj.

3.

masc.

^^

^^

^

3.

fem.

^jj

^^

^

2.

masc.

^y

^:i

'^

2.

fem.

3.

maec.

3.

fem.

? Plur.

3.

masc.

3.

fem.

2.

masc.

2.

fem.

Imperative. Sing.

Dual

j

Plur.

bj

o -

Verbal

Noun

Part. Active

Part. Pass.

Pass. Perf.

^J\j stj

(with Article J^\~/\]

^

^

Imperf. Indie.

187

Twenty-ninth Leeson.

When TJ

united

a

with

"he saw him";

Ipt^J

the forms

suffix

"he sees her"

used are

etc.

Of the Derived forms the following occur: III.

"to

jj;*^ O

Noun

Verbal IV.

B

,

dissemble"; or

!y>

^\^.\

sL^,.

t^l "to show'; Imperf. O

Imper. ^; Verbal

Indie.

Imperf.

>

Noun

or

21,1

Indie.

<^jj;

Juss.

jj;

.

sel^t.

VI. ^*t-j "to look at one another". VIII.

J^[

Those

b)

"to think".

in

which the third radical

is

hamza. the &

e.

first

_j

or

6)

^;

e.g.

Those in which the third radical

second 3 or

-

-

_bj "to tread"; Imperf. Indie. Lkj etc.

^5, e.g. sL- (for 1^1) "to

is

hamza, the

be bad".

Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

etc.

Imper. *

Verbal Noun Part. Active

*L, (with Article

Pass. Perf.

Imperf. Indie.

Of the Derived forms Imperf.

Indie.

Part. Act.

9

is

^**j; Imper.

IV. sL? "to

^1;

Verbal

make

bad";

Noun 8LJ;

Part.

First

188

So from -e Uj

(for

"to light".

^

Conjugation of

"to shine, be bright"; IV.

to)

"to come".

L>)

(for

Juss.

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

written

i -&. (also

sL

^-^'

,Jj^>. etc.

^

etc.

^

',

~,

etc.

'-

Imper.

Noun '^^^

Verbal

^>.

'?

^*>

Part. Active SL> (with Article

etc.

Pass. Perf. C

So from ?U?

(for

-,^.

* *

II.

L*tf)

5

^L^l)

C5-

form LP "to prepare";

O, o-

Noun

Verbal

NAAJ.

Conjugation of Perf.

zLfc

(for

"to wish".

sy#)

Juss.

Imperf. Indie.

a

*

.

.

-

02 Li -

o

etc.

Verbal

Perf. i(

UbJ

iUxj' etc.

Imper. Li Pass.

f

,

.

o^l

yi

Part.

Noun

Act.

^

^yfc

etc.

and '*J++A

(with Article ^tl/t).

B. 3.

Verbs

in

which two radicals are weak

letters.

Those in which the first and third radicals are weak letters. These follow the rules that govern the conjugation of the Assimilated and the Defective 1)

verbs;

e.g.

Twenty-ninth Lesson.

Perf.

&

"to guard"; Imperf. Indie.

Irnper. Masc. Sing,

Part. Act.

VIII. form

j

vj^tj

"to be complete, fulfil

Noun

Verbal

Juss.

^.

!y>.

fulfil

(a

promise)".

a vow"; Imperf. Indie, ^^j;

slLl.

'^ "to be near";

Perf.

Jij;

"to fear (God)".

'Jz^

IV. form ^j! "to

Imper.

iJ

s; Fern. Sing. $; Plur.

(with Article $$]).

^tl

Perf.

189

Iraperf. Indie, jjj; Juss. Ju;

Imper. j.

are

Those in which the second and third radicals "2) weak letters. These retain the second radical (see

Less. 27, '4,

Note

2);

e.g.

^j

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

"to narrate". Juss.

-

etc.

etc.

Part. Active

Pass. Perf. ij:..

^

(^1^1)

^^

etc.

etc.

etc.

Part. Pass.

Imperf. Indie.

"to be well watered" (of cattle, land,

Perf.

Imper.

Imperf. Indie.

Juss.

etc.

etc.

etc.).

Imper.

etc.

first Part.

190

In the same way are conjugated ^5^, "to be worth": 1

[f^i

"to be strong'

of

Conjugation

written

also

^p.

^_=>

(for

to live".

Imperf. Indie

Perf.

form

II.

"to

u>-

let

live,

greet";

Verbal Noun

contracted iU^'.

X. form llsr^t "to spare

alive";

be ashamed" generally written with Imperf. Indie.

in the sense "to

one^:

Perf.

-^uJ;

weak

letters.

^?Uo. C.

4.

Verbs in which

The only verb use _Jj;

is

three radicals are

of this class,

"to seek refuge";

^i

Imper.

all

which

in

is

Imperf. Indie, ^jj; Juss.

Part. Act. ^i (with Article ^c.bH).

_^jS;

Sc

^ '*

^.\ "to show hospitality meaning).

common

to'";

IV. form

II.

form

^~|

(witli

same

Vocabulary.

school. i

| I

to

swear,

make

to

X. to swear

(by v)or

v_> s\.>-

"to to

(literallv

come

r.

with"),

(with bring accus. of person).

^^ ]

o^ij>

or

^J|^) need, affair.

Twenty-ninth Leeson.

U-

,..!

191

E'U&

.J

First Part.

192

Lij

J

U,

O

b'

i

.(Less.

47, 8)

U

^j

Exercise 56.

Have you

seen

not see you come. refused to see me.

us come (we come)? We did I wished to see him, but he You have come to us at a most

seasonable time (the most blessed

uS^ji

of times).

In the coining week I will show you the goods I have We shall bring you (what is with me of goods). what you wish. After the greeting we inform you

-

that we have come to Q>\) Constantinople. The physician promised me that he would see me every The master saw that I was ashamed (saw me day. I was ashamed). Show me the books thou hast (what is with thee of books).

193

Thirtieth Lesson.

Thirtieth Lesson.

Verbs.

Quadriiiteral 3 ~>

1.

The

O

Quadriiiteral verb

o

is

of the form Jd*s e.g.

"to translate".

Imperf. Indie.

Perf.

Juss.

Imper.

etc.

5

o *

>

*>J^

Part. Active

Verbal

etc.

etc.

etc.

Part. Pass.

Noun

Pass. Perf.

^>^'

Imperf. Indie.

^

Derived Forms. a) JJLxL', 'to

e.g.

from ^LL~"to appoint Sultan"

become Sultan". Imperf. Indie.

^LjUJo

Imper.

Part. Active

.JaLtiJLt

Verbal

b) Jlii!, e.g.

Imperf. Indie.

Noun "

from

Ui>,

^Jaj

>J

to

,.J

^ e quiet

Imper.

-

Part. Active Arabic Grammar.

^ijox

Verbal

Noun O

First Part.

194

There are

numerous onomatopoetic

verbs; e.g. 3pj "to quake",

Qji

quadriliteral " to

"to tremble",

S^

howl (in mourning)", u-j*^ "to whisper" etc. The Verb Jjj. 2.

Sing. ,,

The Verb J^Ij "not

3.

mafcc.

3.

fern.

2.

masc.

2.

fern.

to be" occurs in thePerfect only:

^ ual

J*^

jplur

L~i''

-

<

For the syntax of

this verb see

The Verbs

^

below

12.

and Jjj.

These are known as the Verbs of Praise

3.

and Blame Lo) and occur in the 3rd Masc. and Fern. only:

^jtj 9

os^

"to be good"; \j~5i, c>^*Jj "to be bad".

The Verb 4. l

o

or

The Verb means ^1

^^

^L^.

followed by

"it is possible that;

the conjunction it is

to

be hoped

that; perhaps", e.g.

^o

Q^si o'

"it i?**^ "Perhaps (or

is to

hoped")

that will be".

The

other Persons of the Perfect are rare.

Verbs of Surprise or Wonder.

5. To express Surprise are employed:

or

Wonder two methods

Thirtieth Lesson.

The 3 rd

a)

Sing.

Masc.

U "what" and

preceded by

Perf.

195

of the

IV.

form

followed by the Accusative;

e.g. iJsjJ cr^- ^ "how beautiful is Zaidl" (literally "what has made Zaid beautiful"). nd b) The 2 Sing. Masc. Itnper. of the IV. form fol-

lowed by a word with the Preposition u;;

"how

beautiful

Zuidl"

is

"make

(literally

e.g.

beautiful with

Zaid").

The Optative. 6.

The Optative

is

expressed by the Perfect at the

beginning of a sentence;

e.g.

^ "may God have mercy upon him".

may be preceded by ^;

This Perfect

"may thy hands

e.g.

^|jo

c^Jli

^

not grow dry!"

Note. In speech and in popular written language the Optative is expressed by a Nominal sentence with the verb in the Imperf. e.g. ,

o-

-

>

tl-s.

JJt

u*>-jj

(pronounced allah yarhamak) "may

God have

mercy upon thee".

The Verb 7.

The Verb

Jfj

:

3f,

.

Imperf. jljl

is

used with the

negative particles U, ^ and ^J (3tj U or ^fjj' i or Jj^' jj) with another verb or with an Accus. in the sense "is still" or 'continues" e.g. (Ls>U)

v^Ju

cease to go

i.e.

(tfcfajUi)

u>

j^j

goes

(^

Jj^jlii (yfjj

itjj

^1

"he

jj)

^|^

U "Zaid did not

still".

is

jj) ty'lj

still

U "they

still

fought".

alive".

Also: Ol^f still

tO^

Jc jj*^

in this condition".

(v\jJ

p) oJ|j U "matters were

First

196

Part

The Verb JU.

The Verb

8.

oLc, Imperf.

oyu

"to return" preceded

by a negative and followed by another verb

is

used

to

express "not again", e.g.

-lj

.(^1

u

oU

)

L*

lijs*

jJ)

he did not return again".

U "we

did not return again"

Also in the Imperfect:

i

^ "do not do so again".

^ct ^ "I will not do it again Also with Accus. but without a second verb: .

jj

possible".

The Verb

The Verb

9.

e.g. ol/

o

!)

3^

Imperf. olXj expresses the English

3tf,

"almost, nearly",

(oyil

"the journey was no more

"he nearly did

ojxf oJs^

it".

"I almost died".

li}

The Verb

'tJ

r

10. The Verb ,.!j preceded by the Conjunction U "as long as" and followed by a 'verb in the Imperfect, or an Accusative is used to express "as long as, while", e.g.

"as long as

he stands".

U38

fjl v^vO U ,

>

-

|

"as

[

long

as

I stand".

*!

The Verbs ji and 11.

The Verb ji

the phrase e.g.

'

ei

UH>

U JJ U JJ

The verb

"to be

to.

little

or rare"

is

used in

(also written Uis) to express "seldom", (^JLis)

^J?,

"thou hast seldom come to us".

Imperf.

J|y

"to be long"

is

used

Thirtieth Lesson.

197

in the phrase L 5l> (also generally written LJLb) to express "not for a long time", e.g.

JUs-i >

u*JLb

&Jj]

(-* x

'

"thou hast not honoured us

for a loiig time".

The Verb

cate

L>J

o^

(^>] Js^;

^

oi^>!)

ha.ve the

jLJ "not

b

12,

known

same

as the Sisters

construction,

to be" (see

e.g.

2),

of

^

e.g.

which may

also take

\^>.

to continue, last, (see

to cease, (see

(Imperf.

_^aj) to

10).

7).

become.

to

be or do in the morning.

,->**] to

be or do in the evening.

to

(^5)

predi-

4),

to remain.

3h u not .La

Less.

(see

its

"Zaid was a merchant".

a predicate with

^

Sisters.

its

as a copula takes

Accusative

the

in

Certain other verbs

(^

and

The verb '^ used

12.

to

become.

be or do in the night.

e.g.

(or

O *.J Said

!vXS

is

not a boy.

(or

UJLl

I

remained

we

well.

are getting (become) tired.

First

198

The verbs

13.

Part.

Lo "to become",

ei-

"to- take",

and Jjo. "to make" used before another verb in the Imperfect

mean

"to begin to" e.g. '0

*

>

^O

or iL*3 or

^

LJLjLs..

we began

to

travel.

Instead of the Imperfect of the verb the preposition or v-j with the Verbal Noun may be used e.g. J

, o

\

IxXrM

we began

to travel.

Vocabulary.

Thirtieth Lesson.

199

First Part.

200

yC*ow camp.

jJas goodness, nobility.

u&

JO HI. to defend.

cup.

Exercise 57.

-

S&

) ,

I

3^>

-

jjj U

UXij' ,JkIfT

t-ot

^

LJ

'.Jb

U

^

\jl\\

.

-

U

Thirtieth

OS*

201

Lesson.

-5-

ioO

Jo

Jo

,

liub

l,

ju

y

"j^

xi

aj

UJt

5

First Part.

202

Exercise 58.

The Emir

died

May God

(Pass.

V. of

May God

mercy on him! reward

you

for

(

J5

),

may God have

prolong your days!

CTC)

The woman

usl

God curse his father! prepare the food. - They almost died from fear (Adv. Accus.). Satan pupil, translate whispers in the breasts of men. I have already translated them. these words! Good is thisboys, be quiet! boy, be quiet! Bad are these goods, girl, how beautiful she is! to

began

how

vile

thee in

they are!

Good morning (May God do

the morning good),

my

We

master.

to

still

remember your kindness. You are not (;j~J) heros. As long as we live, we shall remember your kindness. Thanks to God we are still well (sound). boys, do not do this again! We will not do it again. have not seen you for a long time. We had almost

I

drunk (y> V.) the cup of death ( y-). o continued travelling until they arrived at the

They camp of

We became (*A\) incapable of defending.

the enemies.

So long as we remained in

this city,

we

continually

saw wonders.

Thirty-first Lesson.

Relative Sentences. 1.

The

Relative

Pronoun (J^tf

Sing. Masc. (jrjJf, Fern,

which".

^t

(in

JLT^T) all

is:

cases),

"who,

203

Thirty-first Lesson.

Dual Norn. Masc.

Fein.

o udi?

^CvL't

Gen. Accus. Masc. Plural Masc. (in all cases). 55

The pronoun i^XSt

Note.

vM (therefore the

hamza

the Demonstrative 13,

is

is

compounded of the

Article

a hamzat alwasl), the particle ^ and

^cO

(see Less. 9,

1).

Notice that the common forms of the Sing. Masc. and Fein. and the Plur, Masc. are written with one lam, the other forms with two.

;

^

--

-

in Relative Other Pronouns used sentences are ~ " ~ -

2.

---

it

"he who", U "that which, what", more rarely ^\ O sg

who" and

Fern. KJ! (with following Gen.) "he

y j\

pounds

t

(

its

com-

''whosoever" and L^J? "whatsoever".

The words

^

and U

are always treated as nouns,

^5JJ! usually as an adjective but sometimes as a noun,

when '^

it

has the same meaning as

^

"he who" and

"what". 3.

The

Pronoun

Relative

is

and the following Relative Sentence

called &Ll5i.

treated in Arabic as quite independent dinate with the main sentence; e.g.

is

zL>

The man )

}C*

*jii\j

The man

^53sJ!

the

Jo^l

who sx)

^j^\

>


This sentence

and as

man, who came

coor-

(literally:

he came). )

Z

e.

the man,

j"->j^

who

ij^T

I

whom

saw him).

I

saw

(literally:

First Part.

204

CUf

elJ^

J

J-^f

isjj?

man

tae

The man

wrote a letter (literally: a letter to him).

whom

to

who

wrote

I

saw

the man, whose son I

The man

(literally:

who

I

saw

I

his son).

The Relative Pronoun must always be caught up again in the Relative sentence by a Pronoun (called

joU

or

=-tJ)

either implied in the verb (as in the first

sentence above) or manifest (as in the other sentences). Note. .

>

o

-

ooK

>

L

^ and

After

-

for

U

ayul^

"that,

Jfthe noun

4.

Is

Oolc

the

is

often omitted;

e.g.

><>'

to

attached""^ indefinite,

which

I

have seen".

which the Relative sentence Js the Relative pronoun is omitted". STJ

Such a sentence

is

called a &ao; e.g. I

met a man, who had

gone out from his house. 5-

-

a-xi^

in

which

~.

>

6,

*

,.>

vxjL^ L^o iouJvo |LiJ5 Damascus are,

many

is

a

city,

marvels.

Certain constructions of the Participle Passive are to be explained as shortened Relative sentences; e.g. 5.

abo!

names

^UJ

'

;

y\xti o_^LlT the

witnesses,

whose

are mentioned below.

The

may be regarded as a shortened pronoun, the following clause as a whole depending on it; e.g. "The witnesses, who (mentioned are their names)". The following phrases of a similar nature are much used: Article here

Relative

Jl

,mi

or xJS

lojll

the above-mentioned.

205

Thirty-first Lesson.

the

man

above-mentioned.

the

woman

the

men

above-mentioned.

above-mentioned.

Vocabulary.

Mt. Hermon.

.<

Damascus. j(Elativeof^)

and VIIJ.

I.

,-

(pi.

J>

II.

highest, jy.

cally (^5)

0^15!)

liver,

II.

=

heart).

to soften.

hard rock.

surround. il

illff)

(used metaphori-

j IV. to deny. to embrace,

melody.

to cut in pieces

(plur.

summit.

(pL

^l=*i)

to hear.

or (i)

relative.

to be tender, soft.

giant.

obstinate.

(plur.

answer,

V. to be convinced of.

to be certain,

cold. -

fin. to be like, there. |

correspond.

tender, as,

as

(i)

to

if.

determine (on

IV. to deliver.

(pi.

misfortune. (pi.

to break.

G

oppressed.

j^t).

First

206

IV. to seize (with v-).

Part.

^

to fall.

0ii

cry.

IV. to disturb.

Go',

G

_

>

>

veil.

fresh.

2

*!) o,

ij^ "L^I

W

J^o

^

rosy.

meantime.

(

,

beautiful, shining.

.

(IV.

to

advance

u

G 'Jo!J>

tearing, carnivorous.

to a<^ orn>

-

-"

(to

\

languid.

G

^

IV. to rain

jjjj

pearl (collective).

o!j

(trans.).

jj Ga

provisions. (pi.

Q^Gs-) partridge.

w -

't+tS

inflaming.

ji).

-

quantity.

'

to v Ll ^^ distant. (

piercing, splitting.

1

exalted.

^Jw

G

slic.

song.

2 / JLfc

(pi.

-

supper.

o-

La!) wretched.

' ,

joj^i G'

a*

S

I

the

^'

5

)

(pi. *l>xii!)

strong.

G

jjis

delightful, agreeable. free.

itf.Li

yd

(pass.) to

to shoot,

o by>.

be

lost.

battle.

to

be intoxicated.

G /(jj)Jo\

before

-

refuge, escape.

IV. to

day

yesterday.

JjiS struggle,

JwJj brave.

jo jJ

cs ,i

*

-

.ix

VIII. to prepare.

flowing.

death,

*o blood.

to cry.

iULlo courage.

207

Thirty-first Lesson.

to carry,

induce

measure.

to

and VIII. to consider (with j).

V.

-

a flowers

-' TT

method. o,

u

to smile.

mes-

,

^

\

A.

o V.

means.

/

(coll.).

j(pl. I

ea sage.

swiftness.

Mt entrance, approach. Jo*. I

death.

iUS,

letter,

Mediterranean.

V. to enjoy note.

boneg

number.

mouth. marshal

V. to endure.

(^5)

last.

to measure.

Exercise 59.

-lj

(Less. 7, 4)

w

(vj).

prisoner.

(pi. *tjlt)

^.c. hidden, absent.

jsx

Lebanon.

~o

-

First Part,

208

JU* Jo^j yUJ? *j

il

vis

J^y^

;H^

J*

^5>>jt

*

T

vilf

.f^y

,,o,

^

PJ^c c^l^.

e?^

U|

r)>b^

fcAjj

LJ >Ui^ Jf^ jJi

.

JJI

-v*

La

i3

_-

U

JU i

^ jJT

US!

swi

^w-

Thirty-first Lesson.

209

(Less. 44, 2

*

.

J^Sf

-"

"*i

^xL'

v-juaj

,,JwO ^

-

sLAJkLAJ

~ii^

^LciXc

''

^f S? oJu

(Less.

# 44,

2

^

oB

1=^

U

L.II'

that)

Arabic Grammar.

B

8)

8)

LJ

..

iij

jiJf

j:

,

d

B

^gfA

First Part.

210

Exercise 60.

Those men, who are in the market, buy and sell. - Those women, whom we have seen in the street, This is the boy to whom we are of our family. have given the money. He, whose tongue is long, The girl, in whose hand his intelligence is small. (was) a flower, smiled.

hands were flowers. must be addressed

I

saw

in

whose

which come

to us,

girls (oJj),

All letters,

necessary that they be in This young the name of) the director of our journal. Mt. Lebanon. man, whose father, we know, is clever. from the summit of which you see the Mediterranean, After the enquity conis a very high mountain. cerning thy welfare (conditions) and the information concerning thee (thy informing) (as to) which I hope that thou art better than could be wished (thou art in excess of what is wished), I inform thee that thy friendly letter has reached me and I rejoice over (j) thy health

and thy well-being continually enjoy.

to

(it

is

which mayest thou saw soldiers, with whom (were) I inform you that I am still in the conprisoners. A dog met a dog, in whose dition, which you know. mouth was a bone. The above-mentioned Marshal is very renowned. The above-mentioned persons are (soundness), I

the owners of this house.

Thirty-second Lesson

(ojP&k

^ u>4

The Numerals.

A.

The Cardinal Numbers.

1.

The Cardinal Numbers

a)

From

110:

are as follows:

2.

,,&! o. .- /

3.

also

s.i.\ also

xj^Lii VwrittenxiJLi/

o

.A

2!

e.

.. /

also

'

)..

9.

10.

b) 11.

12.

13.

14.

15.

16.

From 1119.

masc.

fern.

also

i.

First

212

j(also

but

*~!

Part.

frequently the

)

nounced). d)

200.

From 200 upwards.

u.

'iiu

alif

written is

not

xfu,

pro-

j

j

etc.

11000.

to

10000. jc^f

li!1

etc.

100000. *

1000000. 0.

vjjl

Zero, Nil

JJf

or

JL,

Plur.

y>

Declension of the Cardinal Numbers. 2.

The Numerals from

and

as

1 to 10 are declined: a)

Dual with Gen. Accus.

gtiull b) the others as

Singulars^

e.g.

pU

First Part.

214

Fern,

Gen.

Accus. tje>l

j^>|

i&S

i

The Numeral

o ui

declined like

is

u^ii.

*

g

ll_is indeclinable

c ,

(^~)-

12 forms Gen. Accus. 13

1_9

The Numerals 20 Plurals

yi^ ^y^H

Fern, gjs

are indeclinable.

90

are

declined

as

Sound^

e.g.

;

Nom. oij^c; Gen. Accus. The

^yi*

other Numerals are declined as follows:

Nom.

*!/>

Accus.

io-

Gen.

O S i^aJI

't&*

S

8 V*,

has two forms of the Plural: o^S

!

and

.

*t

>-?_^i,

the latter being used for "thousands" in an indefinite sense.

The Cardinal numbers from 3 to 10 are used in jhe feminine form with masculine nouns and in the masc. with fern, nouns. Formation of the Compound Numbers.

Compound numbers from 20 on

are formed by joining the units, tens and hundreds by ^. The largest number is put first, but the units are put before the tens; e.g. 3.

-

21

,o

-0

215

Thirty-second Lesson. "''

'

' '

1896

xLs

jLlo'

i

"il

I

Such an expression as eighteen hundred must be expressed by one thousand eight hundred.

compound numbers each numeral

In the

clined: e.g. Accus. -rfyZ*-*

is

dg-

etc.

.fJs^-f

Syntax of the Numerals.

The Numerals

are joined to the words they to the following rules: Qualify according " 1 and 2 are adjectives; e.g. a) The Numerals O -. 9 4_JLa ''one heart". 4.

seldom used with a noun,

is

^Lut

Dual of the noun

can be used, but when

itself

so used, the loses ^wLit

and the noun b) The are followed

nun

(see Less.

is

7,

1)

to

10 are Substantives and

z~^*i

rarely

Gen. Plur J^e.

;

e.g.

Ten women.

placed after the noun in

e.g. o

.

-

The Numerals

c)

noun

it;

final

in the

Three men.

They are more

Note. apposition to O, ,- O

its

it

follows in the Gen. Sing.

Numerals 3 by the noun

io^Ls

JLs

because the

11 to 99

are

followed by

the,

in the Accus. Sing.: e.g.

!il>.

d)

-Ac

js^-I Eleven

men. ti>, .....Ac Twenty men.

The Numerals fry in 100 on are Substantives bv Jhe noun in the Gen. Sing. e.gT

.and are followed

:

Three hundred men. thousand nights.

First Part.

216

After CompcmndJSumerals the noun follow? laws regulating its relation to the last numeral e)

the

e.g.

-,

*

c,

xix

A hundred and

A

*

men.

five

(Rule

three men. (Rule

b).

hundred and twenty-

c).

The Indefinite Numeral "some", when it is used for a number between 3 and 10, is expressed by 5.

--

the substantive

(later

.,00?

Genitive: e.g. r (>t

(iuwa?)

also'

iju^)

^cu some

followed by the-

days.

This word must not be confused with the word

Note.

60,

,, A

(jiaj,

which means, "one of some, a certain"

"Some poets"

or

"A

An_jn^efinite

e.g.

i

o.

L**xJf (joju

certain poet".

number over 10

is

expressed by the

e.g.

idx

Jl

A

hundred thousand and some

(more) souls.

Method

jure

denoting Hours and Days.

of

a) express the Hour of the day the Ordinals generally used, (see Less. 33): e.g. 6.

To

x*LJt Three

o'clock (the third hour).

At three

o'clock (in the third hour).

BuUhe Cardinal numbers are used predicatively 6 ---

/,

a

It is

three o'clock (the hour It is

Note. olcL* "11 hours".

-

;

e.g.

s

XcL*Jt

cy^

eleven o'clock.

would mean "3 hours"; X&L*

is

three).

217

Thirty-second Lesson.

"What time

Note.

it?"

is

expressed by *jjjf

is

The hours are counted

in the East

^

or

from sunset.

The times

of day '*jp the morning'', "in the b) evening". "at midday" are best expressed by the Accus.t otherwise by the preposition e.g. ;

n

mornng.

*

In the evening.

^<&Ty

J

At midday.

Thejiaiaes_of

7.

tl>e

Days of the week

are:

'

j^-'51

Sunday.

(Jlji)

yj

Monday.

^

'

(sLiiST)

*j&i!l

(jLji)

r

Tuesday.

(jLfrl)

r_H

Wednesday.

(^L^)

^ Thursday.

(ji-fi)

*^j Friday.

^

r

(JL^

The word

^

or

^

is

)

Saturday.

often omitted;

e.g.

Tuesday.

"The week"

is

iil^ff or

The Months 8.

The

birth year" Ji

^1*^1.

of the Christian year.

Christian year

is

called ilo^Lll xULl! "the

or ic^w*sl! xLlJl

iilljl

"the sun year".

"the Messiah year"

or

First Part.

218

The twelve Months a)

are

named:

usually in

^ July

^llJ January.

August.

yt^o February.

JJu j|

(also ^JjJ).

September.

March. April.

October.

May.

November.

June.

December.

b) usually in Syria: j,lijT

.&

j July.

January.

August

February. J|jf

March March

September, October.

j*

April.

Oas

November.

J bt May June. B.C.

is

expressed in Arabic by

oLIt US

(abbreviated ^

v)

or simple

The Months 9.

of the

Mohammedan

jrhe_ Mohammedan year

"the flight year" (abbreviated JS ^-0 >-5 uUJl "the moon year".

is

Year.

called x

after

a

date

to

#)

or

219

Thirty-second Lesson.

Dates are reckoned from 16 th July 622 A.D. thk being the day of the flight of Mohammed from Mecca to Medina.

Every year has 354 days.

The Mohammedan year 1327 began on 23 rd Jan^ 1909

AHThe yeau

of the following twelve lunar

consists

months:

or

O^j

3i

Some names

(the

month

(Month of the ^>).

months are

of these

of fasting).

often used with

special attributive; e.g.

Xt!

.M-fc^;

e tC.

Mohammedan

The Mohammedans .

1) jtfjgl

f

Os^5

ning of the month

^xJC?

^^^iT J^c

Js^nJt

two chief

festivals:

tne small festival" at the begin-

3t_^i

the great fast in the 2)

"

Feasts.

celebrate

immediately

month

after the

end of

also

called

^1*^.

"the great

festival"

"the sacrificial festival" on the 10 th of the

month A^f 3 i when

the pilgrims offer sacrifice in Mecca.

First Part.

220

Method

of indicating

Date.

indicate Date the Ordinal numbers are, After tbe^ Ordinal is put the Name of generally used.

To

10.

with or without, the word

the Month,

and

*%& jbefore jit, the numbers indicating the Year with

this

,after

or without

before them, in the Genitive:

iiJLl

5

_^i

|

^

)

a *

- 3(1-0

"

(

f

)

.

e.g.

I

)

rd

viJ'JJi

of Mul.iarram.

,.JP

UT. 1896-

J!

On

such and such a date

is

expressed by the

.Accus. or the preposition ^. Indication of Age.

11.

How

}U~

pf

old art thou? dj+s.

literally

is

expressed by:

"thy

life

how many

(is)

years?" or: -o

oo! years art

,,

o,

'iJ*M

pf thou?"

The answer

to

jo

^(

how many

"a son of

literally

such a question would be of the form:

"I

am

twenty years old".

Vocabulary. 2 ..

minute.

J^

place.

^

value

equipment. the

^

first.

^

->

c* expiration (of time).

P rice

"

to subscribe '

'

fr

eUis

'

franc.

***"

221

Thirty-second Lesson. I

(

direction,

part (of the word).

relation.

First Part.

222

/

thin cotton stuff.

(Persian)

register,

list,

)

library,

post.

address.

title, -

bookshop,

of full ((Turkish) weight or value.

Alexandria,

I

'

'

^y

narrative, play.

(pi.

travel.

north,

Batuta, an

Arabian (Ibn

tra-

veller,

who

wind,

south, east,

died 778 A.H.

=

1377 A.D.

west,

geography. -,Sa

Lu (

heighth.

Amm

1 .j**\

K

D

Bey

slumber,

Fikri(a modern Egyptian

to

spend

(time).

writer). k

VIE. the

to

be strong,

trusty

washerwoman, guide" (name of a book), -o

'^c&j

(pi.

Rifa'at Bey, (mo-

dern Egyptian

Ou5)

shirt.

(plur. Joollx)

writer).

hand-

kerchief.

O.L packing.

II.

total.

to lose (time),

be

slow (of a watch). Exercise 61.

rj,j

jjf-

223

Thirty-second Lesson.

o!cL,

L-l

r.

>

g

a

.,t

-

O;

,

xl

iu

^JL- ji

O-

o

g

jf

(

jt

(for)

W>LC

224

First Part.

I

1*0

Exercise 62.

The

earth revolves round

(^^c.)

the sun once (one

The Moslems and 6 hours. which was (and it was) in the Wilt thou honour us with a visit (thy year 622 A.D. I will visit you on Saturday. coming) on Sunday? Wilt thou come in the morning or the evening? revolution) in 365 days reckon from the Flight,

225

Thirty-third Lesson.

in the afternoon (after the midday), if God to Egypt in the year The number 332 B.C. and built the city of Alexandria. old are of its inhabitants is now 231396 souls. I

come

will

Alexander the Great came

will.

How

am

25 years old and my brother has How old not reached in age more than 9 years. Next (on the coming) Wednesday art thou O girl? The winds come to this I shall be (reach) 17. mountain (Accus.) from the four directions, the North (and) the South (and) the East and the West, and its Truly, my eye has not height is 11000 feet. I

you (two)?

four days.

We

spend about three months in the mountains,

for the

tasted

(

*lJ

[u])

slumber for

(since)

The washerwoman brought heat is strong in the city. us six shirts and two nightshirts (shirts for the sleep j.Jj)

Hasan Pasha

and twelve handkerchiefs.

died

year 1888, may God have mercy upon him! is ten minutes past nine is the time? --It

in the

What (nine

and ten minutes).

soon

be ten.

Thy watch

How much

Forty-five piastres,

my

Give

me

slow,

is

thirty,

it

will

book?

this

This

master.

will give thee twenty.

is

is

dear

and enough

I

Thirty-third Lesson.

B. 1.

The Ordinal Numbers.

The Ordinals

are generally formed O

from the '

'' ----- T

,

Cardinals according to the type J^li but with some exceptions :

J*os 1

,

fern.

.05

H ilsilh

Arabic Grammar.

the

first.

the second.

First Part.

the third.

&Jl5t

fern.

the fourth.

the

fifth.

the sixth.

the seventh.

the eighth.

the ninth.

the tenth. All the above are declined fully. to 19 are indeclinable:

The Ordinals from 11 fern.

-l^

ixc

y*S

the eleventh.

ililSJ?

the twelfth.

KSM5I

the thirteenth etc.

For the higher numbers the Cardinals only are ^ except_tE.at the^ Ordinals of the Units are_used oined to the of the Tens to express the ^Cardinals Compound Ordinals. The Article must be attached Jo eVch migteral use^ masc. and

fern.

L

the twentieth.

fern.

ijol^f the twenty-first. ^

-

i E

Xjo'iilt

the twenty-second.

twenty-third

etc.

227

Thirty- third Lesson.

masc. and

xiif

the hundredth.

fern,

fern.

the last -

Note 1. For the use of the Ordinals in the indication of Dates and the Hours of the day see the previous lesson. Note.

The Ordinals have the Sound

2.

0^1

has also a Broken Plur. J<5j}31 meaning >

first

parts"

parts", and

just

as

^-ic

>

has a

~s>*$\

oSoS

i

Jr*

-^

I

2.

"the middle" has Ja**!^^!

f>\$$\ "the

''tlie

last

middle parts".

for the three decades of the

The Numeral Adverbs

are

J'lor.

'-co

-oc

>

These terms are sometimes used month.

tc.

i3^l

^

The word "the

yaut

Plnral, e.g.

"firstly,

secondly, thirdly" Accus of the

by the Adverbial

expressed

Ordinals, e.g.

<$, Lo }, &&, bulj, 1

3.

gtc.

J-sx

The Numeral Adverbs

are

expressed

usually

^

1

etc.

"once, twice, three times"

by the word "g.x

in

the

Accug.. e.g. 9.*

"once",

(Once

=

^yj "twice", oLx

cySii "three times" etc.

"once upon a time, one day"

is

U^J or

Sometimes the occurrence of an action once or is expressed by the Verbal Noun with the ending

twice

(the so-called i^ 0,^0- oS /&8

Up >

i

e.g.

-

^

'*^ e

tums roUQ d once

or twice".

First Part.

4.

Fractions (with the exception of "a half)

The

ji

are^oXJhe type e

or

~Us'

with the Plural

&(:

&

^AX1J J "a >

or

eJiS

V'*

CJ

"

fi; O

o

,

Oo

^

If

3

LiH;

/s

/i

r

^; e.g.

b^>

Note.

etc,

,

a . whole and a fraction are united, they must

be joined

5.

>

S> >

8

e.g.

Plur.

iJLi

O>

/*

i

often written, ^-

l ;

/j,

<;

-

/

4>

^.

The

Multiplicative adjectives "twofold, threefold" O *.) *} ^ > S*t are of the form Joiw; e.g. i^ "twofold", (

"threefold" (also

= "triangle");

"Single, simple"

"square"). 6.

The

a)

by

Distributive are expressed

"fourfold" (also

jj"

is

adjectives

"two by two"

repetition of the Cardinal

number j)r T

etc.

229

Thirty-third Lesson.

by the forms jus or JuU*;

b)

or

3 *L>.

J

^j&

e.g.

they come two

JjiLa-

by two. I

*

(ztj'j*

in twos

and

Numeral

7.

adjectives

parts of which anything

JjUi

passed by people (walking)

threes.

is

expressing

number of

the

made, are of the form ilii, e.g.

Biliteral.

'

2

- >

gi^b Triliteral, or 3 cubits long, or high.

^bj G

QuaJriliteral, or

4 cubits high, or a quatrain.

Vocabulary. S.o-

c.

$.J

doctrine, teaching.

eastern.

.w^: Zanzibar,

-"

lesson.

".<> >

noble

-te

-^

-

JalJ) central, middle.

/(fern. 1

So.

a

ect of

^tf. Mohammedans). (

I

x

|

-to comprise, *^ JVIII. contain.

j^ "j'

to follow,

,!$

continent,

Maghrib. .

(

-

Morocco.

H. f

*iM

Algeria.

5.

s*

cape

.*j

/^

ft

southern.

-^

",.,.. \*

'

2

1

be

western

&

tradition (in Islam).

.-

(Js

to date, (Verbal date,

Noun

=

higtory).

JILT, (

belong.

to agree, corre-

spond with.

First Part.

230 o

(pl.2Ult)noun.

rising

of the sun. to

setting

be

spoilt.

Frankish, European.

and 1

beginning.

U

s

letter, particle.

^

Spring.

tf/R

Autumn

part,

(pi.

of ,

I

the Koran).

(the Fatiha (

the

ls

t

(name of

s i rft)

noble.

.

Exercise 63.

it

(.List

3

Lj

1*

sj ^pjl

ibf

iLJL/t

Kil

it

e oL-lSl

.

231

Thirty-third Lesson. j

...,

UL*

s

-

-5

a

-

~-

pj

i*-LJ

^i

JkL

x

sUlST

Lllbri

f

JU

,ll

f

,5

iJJl

io>

Exercise 64.

The date of

letter is: Tuesday the l t July ih 1890, corresponding with the 13 Dhu'lqa'da 1307. The 114 th Sura of the noble Koran is called "The Sura

of (the) men". of

May you

this

In the (sing.)

will

first

days (Jj3*) of the month

receive (will

come

to you) a

from us and, if God will, you will send us the answer in the latter days of June. In this night I have not slept a quarter of an hour. I will return to your dwelling after three quarters of an (from the) hour. Take seven eighths of this stuff and we will letter

First

232

Part.

Two thirds of this food is eighth. servant was in the fifteenth year of his life. Yesterday I read the first (and) second and third chapters of this book, and to-morrow I shall read How old art thou? the fourth (and) fifth and sixth. - I am in the twenty-sixth year of my life, for 1 shall be twenty-six (reach the twenty-six) on the The beginning of Spring is on the 29 th January. 21 s 1 March, and the beginning of Summer on the 21 st June, and (the beginning) of Autumn on the 21 st September, and (the beginning) of Winter- on the 21 st December. The doctrine of the Relative Pronoun st is contained (is found) in the 31 Lesson of this book. There are three kinds of words in the Arabic language: firstly the Noun, (and) secondly the Verb, (and) thirdly the Particle. take the

last

spoilt

My

-

.

END OF PART

J.

233

Second Part, Lesson.

Thirty-fourth

The Noun and

its

Derivation.

,oS

o

Nouns (f*\ Plur. to their Derivation into: O

l

iUwt)

are divided

according

-

"head". Such nouns are e.g-.^J, to be found in the dictionaries under the verbal stem, a) Primitive;

although in this case the verb J*jJ "to be at the head of is derived from the noun.

a tribe, to strike on the head" b) Derivative:

Most nouns are of this Derived from Verbs. O 0, - ,, Gofrom "session, council" Jis; (J e.g. Jo3 "killing"

a)

J^

1

class,

u "great" from ^j' to be great" o , *&3 Derived from Nouns; e.g. sJu/u "a place in

from jUb- "to p)

sit";

-^

which there are lions"

from

,xj "a

lion";

"Islamic" from *ill "Islam". 2.

The most usual nouns

derived from the verb are

:

a) The Verbal Noun (,vX*ax) which properly expresses the verbal idea in the form of a noun, but sometimes has a more remote meaning and is then known as the

b)

The Active

c)

The Passive

Participle Participle

($&\

(lit).

Second Part.

284

These three forms have been treated in the first part of the grammar, but the following facts regarding the Verbal Noun of the Simple (I.) form of the verb should be noted: 9

The form

a)

Juis

occurs

especially

verbs of the form JJ6 and Ju6; kill";

pg 6

'

'

in intransitive

verbs of the form Jjc;

^.

> 9

Jyc

jb.

"to

e.g.

Jsjis;

sit".

and iJUi

iJ^is

e.g.

-

in intransitive verbs of the form

from d)

jJa from jJa "to

from *^i "to understand".

"joy" from c)

transitive

"

Juts

b)

e.g.

in

in

verbs of the form

jJii e.g.

"smoothness" and xlll "easiness" from be smooth, easy". l\jo

e)

Trade;

especially

x&>

e.g.

"Caliphate"

I>Li. "tailoring" from

Many

f)

in verbs denoting

verbs

M^>

to

,

intend".

This form of Verbal

"purpose"

from

common

Noun

is

- .

"to

Jwuas 2

Other

follow";

"to sew".

Go,

-_V3 S."

mlm;

g)

Office or

tl

form their Verbal Noun with a

prefixed

e.g.

from -Jfe-

an

0,0,

called

forms of the Verbal

Noun

of

the Simple verb are: 8

> y

9o,

'

o

Joe

e.g.

JJL* "buBiness"

"P ..--( "to ocCUDV from JJLi e in { ,

GO

*w> "part"

*~j> "to divide

.

i

"smallness, ,-

youth

^ -

-

"to be small (

.

lo "to say".

"treatise"

Note. each verb

In the dictionaries the Verbal Noun ia given for Sometimes several forms are in use from the same

verb, either with the 6 o-

same or ,

- ,

different

meanings;

O o,

e.g.

J^ais

and

O-

"purpose" from Jua*; ^^"description" and Kix '-quality"

from

ft*3j

"to describe

2 nd "and 3 rd radicals are the same, of hamzated verbs and of weak verbs are of the same forms as above but subject to the rules for assimilation etc. given in the earlier 3.

The Verbal Nouns of verbs whose

lessons; e.g.

from

to think":

from

"to stand": J.I5

from

jis"

(for

^Ls

(for

cy&) "opinion"; f_^)

"standing";

"to say": jJUu (for iJ^U) "treatise".

Second Part.

286

should be noted that the verbs, whose first 3 which drop the 3 in the Imperf. (Less. 26, 2) have also a Verbal Noun without the first radical; e.g. It

radical

is

,

from J-^5 "to unite":

from

iJLo "tie" (beside jJ^);

vju>ij

o, "to describe": 'A*O "quality". 4. The Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms are given in Lesson 18, 7. In these forms the Part. Pass. is often used with the meaning of the Verbal Noun; e.g.

"that which

^ax\

is

neceseitated"

instead

of

aliasS? "necessity".

The meaning

5.

or "being killed",

the

of

Often

Active or Passive.

it is

sometimes

"being found

Verbal both; it

e.g.

is

existence"

i.e.

Noun Jos

is

is

either

"killing"

only Passive;

e.g. is

(Active only

"finding").

The meaning of the Verbal Noun

way connected with the

is

not in any

idea of time, e.g. jus means either in the past, present

"killing" or "being killed" or future.

In

6.

its

Noun partakes of the of the Noun and of the Verb. As a followed by the Genitive, subjective or syntax the Verbal

characteristics

Noun

it

is

objective; e.g.

j^

JJ3

may mean

"Zaid's killing (someone)"

or-

"the killing of Zaid" as in o

o

j

<><>

* *".

f*\

(someone) should

kill

"the king

commanded

that

Zaid".

however the Verbal Noun has both a subject and an object, theln the former is put in the Genitive and the latter in the Accusative or has the Preposition ^; e.g. If

237

Thirty-fourth Lesson.

tj^^

js^5\i or

Jsj:

"the fact of Zaid's killing

Jjcs

Mohammed". So

^^\

also

(his)

"the love of (one's) country".

v^>

rwy'T LJL&J? *^o> "the youth's love of

or

country",

and with a pronominal

"his killing

alia

^s" "my The is

preposition &

employed

suffix:

Mohammed".

love of (my) country". is

also used

indefinitely with

7.

A

verb can always be strengthened or specialised

This (called in Arabic

"').

absolute object") I't.'.k^

absolute

but

may

e.g.

honour of Mohammed".

meaning by the addition of a Verbal Noun

Less. 12,

e.g.

the Verbal Noun

an adverbial meaning,

"I rose in

in

when

I0j|

usually derived from the

is

'-j>

object

is

also

be

^i

L

"he rejoiced greatly". used

"for

derived

same

verb,

(In this case the

distinguishing"

from

(cf.

"the

another

lAjyjJLJ):

verb,

e.g.

'

j

"he rejoiced greatly".

used with the Passive, "he was struck violently". Sometimes the Verbal Noun It is also

an

adjective,

this case

it

is

e.g.

Lyo

used

\L>fO

e.g. is

"he struck a striking". (In

jsuJlxJLJ i.e.

for emphasising.)

Sometimes the Adjective alone the Verbal

Noun

is

struck violently" for

so used without

understood,

e.g.

is

expressed and

ijoJUw

Cya

"he

Second Part.

238

The Verbal Noun may be used thus with a Genior a Suffix or a Relative Sentence, e.g. tive,

.

J^>

LliT

coward"

uiJLs-

like a

i.e.

Pronoun or a

Demonstrative

"thou fearest the fearing of the

coward.

'

"I struck

him

this striking"

i.e.

thus.

"he was struck a striking which pained him". 8.

-G**

The Active

J

O

Participle (J^liil f**\)

which

case used as a Noun, in a Genitive, or as a Verb when it Accusative or the Preposition ,3, if sense of the Imperfect, e.g. "one,

JolklT "he,

who

kills

may

also be

followed by followed by an is used in the

is

it

is it

men".

who

kills

who

strives after

men".

**

3

iJLIJi "he,

But

if

it

is

knowledge".

used in the sense of the Perfect,

can have only the Genitive after "he, who has killed men".

it,

it

e.g.

Exercise 65.

The words

in the following exercises are to be found in the Vocabulary at the end of the book. The rowels of the Article and .some common words are note omitted.

Thirty-fourth Lesson.

L l

*5

^

'

239

U

*^ U -e UU.I

joss-

uLli .

(

MJ !Xi i/li iu^O!

)

,

O ,

Exercise 66.

We

rejoiced greatly,

when we

received the books The love of

you sent (your sending of the

books).

one's land

faith.

is

a part of

(^

-- I praised this

We rose in honour of youth's love of his country. the prince. They have done this deed from hatred of their enemies. After bringing excess of greeting we inform you that the inducement to write it (i.e. this letter) is to ask concerning your health and your circumstances. I shall leave the city (my leaving of the city will be) on the 15 th of November of this year. - I rejoiced greatly that your Excellency has perfect health and security (I rejoice .... at your Excellency's possessing the perfection of etc.).

Second Part.

240

Lesson

Thirty-fifth

Nouns \

and Time.

of Place

Nouns denoting the Time

.

j"*^

Go,

O-o,

..

from ^Jb- "to ,

,

sit":

"O

s

The

'!XAA, e.g.

^Ji^* "place of sitting, assembly";

^

from r*jtf' "to write": from

6,,o,

and

Jou/> 9 o,

,

"to bury": jli

-

o -

^j&*

"office,

school";

"cemetery".

s^Jj/i

Plural of these three forms

Note

an action

the Simple verb

(**"*)'

are of the forms Js***, " -

or Place of

when derived from

is

J*Lix, e.g.

These nouns, when derived from verbs, which

1.

O

o-

have kaara or fatha in the Imperf. are usually of the form Jou^J those from verbs with damma in the Imperf. are of the form -oBut there are many exceptions such as JuAftx.

<>

O

o

Go,

,.

-&/ "place ofsnnriae, East", v_jJw" place, of sunset, Weet'j,

9o-

'

O

o -

all

from verbs, which have

Note

2.

^uCT "to write":

>

book-shop";

in the Imperf.

is used e.g. G -o. G--O , i^Ji&Q "office" and iyJlXx "library,

Go,

,,

-

from

damma

From some verbs more than one form --

-

from

\

"place of praying, mosque," ^J***A "dwelling place",

\\^M+A

*3$ "to place":

O-o,

*>j* and

g&j*

"place".

6,0

Note

3.

verbs whose

A

rarer form

first radical is

in

use

is

oL^

(especially

from

or ^5), e.g.

O , , -, O -o from JOj "to bear children": J^Ly(for ^_^) "time of birth";

241

Thirty-fifth Lesson.

"to promise": OULAX (for oLs^s) "time of fulfilling

from >Ac promise, term"; so

Go.

c^

from the noun

also

"time"

G , oliu/

G (for

.<,

C&**)

time''.

"appointed

1

2.

(Less.

These nouns formed from verbs "not sound' 28, 1) are subject to the laws which control the

forms of the verbs,

e.g.

2.-

,

from

"to settle:

G,o-

yw

S

5 -

J^

from

.

J^

"to alight":

(for

JJb^) "place" and

O^o-

G;,, aJL^

.yw) "abode"; V 9 -O-

(for

8

for

from

jJULs^)

"city-quarter"; G-, G.o-

"to rise": j.15

from

(JJw (for j.jju) "place, position".

"to pasture":

J^

^^s

"pasturage".

In the Derived forms of the verb the Part. Pass. used for the Noun of Place and Time, e.g. 3.

is

from

"to meet: of meeting"; ^Jtik* "place ,.o,o O-o,oj "to collect &uC*v "marsh"; ix*4 (of water)":

jixJj

from

from JJ> "to pray": Nouns 4.

Jjl/> "place of prayer". of Instrument..

Nouns which denote the instrument used ~

u

o.o

action (iJ^t

and

it,

^J)

are formed after the patterns:

in an G .o

^Iw,

idxix, e.g. '

G ,o

^ --

from

"to open":

gj<s

_.ljci

"a key";

from JJtf "to sweep": x^llCo "a broom";

from

oj^

from

^

The

"to weigh": "to ascend":

Plural of

e.g Arabic Grammar.

^L

o tj,y

(for

a |j_^)

sliy (for KxSyo)

and

il*L>

is.

"a balance";

"a ladder".

i*GC; of

Second Part.

242

The

Diminutive.

The Diminutive (i*kaJl

5.

*J)

formed

is

from

Oo,,

nouns according

triliteral "little

In

Weak

to the pattern

#&,

e.g.

dog" from the case of words derived from Doubled or verbs the usual changes take place, e.g. from Go,

shadow": G

from

is

G

-

,..

y^j) "door":

v_j|j

(for

from

j&

"youth": j&.

From

quadriliteral

nouns the form of the Diminutive

JJUis, e.g. f'

O

,(i *

o , )

from ^.St "scorpion O

Or

more

there are

if

letters,

c - J

the form j^JLoe

is

used, e.g. G

from

o

)

O

,

o -

,

^tas. "sparrow":

If the noun has a Feminine ending, this ending attached to the Diminutive, e.g. .

is

from

iuUi "fortress":

from

"Salma", (name of a woman):

-*-L (

The

following Diminutives should be noted:

from yl

from

(for^I?)

2

"father":^

(for ^i-1)

(for JIJj) "little father";

"brother":

J^i

(for ^Ii-|)

"little

brother"; O

o

from c>^>! O

from

o

^j^

:

Gs,iJL^>| "little sister";

O~ (for _^o)

Go

Go^,

2 ,1

"son":

^^

(for

^^vo)

"little

son";

G s,> i-ut or v^ivo "daughter": iuuo "hHtle daughter";

O-o

from

"sister

243

Thirty-fifth Lesson. *

o ,

from "a ij^i,

9

J

little

Note.

"thing": ^e^i (for ,^-i) or

at the

from xjjli;

are often used to express endear-

The form

i3_^*s is

,y^

from

jOlaJf

>o

,-f

o

Axe;

used with Proper

.i)JLi

^S

JOb

i-o

v-o

ol

e.g.

rr ^_y^

&JJt

67.

^u

LJJ

i

Jc

-

/

ij| .Xs*

,

ll! IJ^

^>^f- from

*>.'
--

Oc!

(*oJI

often

present time to express endearment,

Exercise t

more frequently

thing".

The Diminutives

ment or contempt. names

2,s

, >

^

L^c

U^i

I^'L^

(Less. 30,

*.*>

11)

JLJ!

tv3v^

iL

UU'UM c^oli" ^AOA

L

5cloi

(Accus., Less. 16. 4) 16*

Second Part

244

LJ

Exercise 68.

This little very watchful. dog I went to sweeps the room with the broom. Beirut my house and opened the door with the key. is the residence of the Wali. Boy, weigh the wheat This

is

little

man

The visiting of mosques and tombs I saw the not allowed during the tune of prayer. dear Fatima, give me a horses in the pasturage. The customs of the East and little of this bread. When those (the customs) of the West are different. the king arrived, they fired the cannons. little I bought this book son, I ask success from God. in the bookshop. in the balance.

is

Thirty-sixth Lesson.

(o^S

J^

u^O

The Relative Adjective.

1.

The ending

^

attached to a

noun denotes

that a person or thing is related to, or connected with it, generally in respect to a tribe, land, city, business etc.,

e.g.

s --

vjj*

S --

"Arabs"

(collective);

So

1

yax' "Egypt, Cairo";

Oo

^^OA "an

"Arabian, an Arab";

Egyptian, a Cairene",

S"*.* "scientific";

fie "science"; ^^JLc

jl "day";

^^

"daily".

245

Thirty-sixth Lesson.

this is If the noun has the feminine ending dropped in the formation of the Relative Adjective, e.g. ,

o,

2

,

o "nature";

j

5

+Ay

Uo

"art";

"natural";

"artificial";

..

..

"Mecca"; J^> "Meccan".

iJc

added

Letters

to

the

in the formation 8 , oe.g. i^ux/> "city"; J.jw

radicals

noun sometimes drop,

of the

"pertaining to a city", but not always,

e.g.

Js-Oc> "iron"

2

"iron" (adjective). 6E

The words

i_jt

j

"father"

and

+\ "brother", take S

their original 2

wdw

back

-c

again and so form ^c^j! "fatherly",

-

^5^1

"brotherly".

noun ends

If a

in a or

an

(I

,

>j=

I---

,

r

o

^_1_), this

is

changed into tiaw before the

*o~

2

JL*X>

"meaning" forms 2

e.g.

-o>

-o,

^yjw

^ __

"abstract";

Loo "world"

o>

forms I^^AJO "worldly".

The same \JL-,

e.g.

is

the case with the hanusa in the ending

sUl "heaven" forms ^lil "heavenly", but s

SUi

"winter" forms

-

^x

..

"wintry" (without 2

From L*J.9 "France" 2

are formed

o_ *o

2

o?i/}. .

o,.

os

and

.

French".

The e.g.

Plurals of these adjectives are usually regular,

jrfltl "the Egyptians".

Second Part.

246

2.

adds to e.g.

The Feminine of the its ordinary meaning

O^o oL*o[

2-o

"man",

"God", '

2

^

X-uL*of "humanity".

"divine", x

J[ ~

"month",

Ga^o

"human",

j.l~oj.

*>**

Relative Adjectives often that of an abstract idea,

"deity".

Oio,

o,

"monthly", 'iLt^ "monthly

(.%

wages". Adjectives. 3.

The

following forms of the Adjective

have been already mentioned

(*>

^-J)

10):

Active Participle.

a) Joiii

o'

(Less.

-

b) J-oii (sometimes also

used in Passive sense,

e.g:

!uxs "killed"). c)

3^6.

d)

o^*.

e)

JJ^T (for Colours and Defects).

f)

4.

Pass. Part. (Less. 17,

']j

The

4).

following forms are also of

common

occur-

rence: g)

form

Jo6 JJti,

especially e.g.

^JM>

from intransitive verbs of the "difficult"

from

^ju^>

"to

be

"to

be

difficult".

6,^

6

i)

iS,

"beautiful" from

f

*

^--J*

Jj^ especially from intransitive verbs of the form

e.g.

j)

*

,

h) jje, e.g. Q-JS* beautiful".

^

^ii,

"joyful" from e.g.

^

'^

"naked".

"to be joyful".

247

Thirty-sixth Lesson.

G a, k) v3l* (intensive)

from

^S^

"to

o s v.jLxi'

"addicted to lying"

lie".

The verbs whose 'second

Note.

radical is

So.

G

oL>

(j)

" (^5),

G-

G- r

-

from v-jtb

^

change

e.g.:

"to be excellent"

"excellent"; ,

^ or

G-,

J*A9 which becomes Jy3,

the form Jojti into

from

e.g.

to

b

good"

vv^3

(for

G

v^s-Ja and

"good".

The form &*$

5.

one who

also used to indicate

is

exercises a trade or profession, G s

e,g.

Jlr (from J^r "to G

-

s -

carry")

"a porter", and so jl^> "a baker"; J?L3- "a

tailor";

9UL, "a

water-carrier".

These words use the

'

Sound

plural, e.g.

The

6.

o j&, o-5J^

Elative (j-y^ixjT

etc>

L\ see Less. 10,

always formed from the three radicals, 9 >)

"long";

more

Some

* o

3_>^>!

e.g.

37)

is

Ju^b (Root

G * ^ "longer"; js-o* "excellent"

excellent".

such as the Participles of the

adjectives,

Derived forms and words of the form

Joist cannot form such phrases as the following

In these cases Elatives. are used:

G-OJ

,,0x>>-o

j^gJcs* "diligent"

more as

tol$a>f ytft

"more

diligent"

lit.

to diligence.

#.*.*.,

>-o &}*,\

"black" !ojj*

j^i! "blacker"

lit.

stronger as

to blackness. 7.

If the

second part of the comparison is not a or an adverbial determination,

noun but a whole sentence

Second Part.

248

it

is

preceded by

^ with a

Preposition (If.

(J

*\

U*

*'

-

&

o

Li*

U

^

with a verb or the

suffix of the Personal

_0,0,o

}*(>.

j^Jl

sjikll

pleasanter to-day than jlj^J?

(for

it

v_ftLJ!

*W lit.

"than

Li

jJb

(Proverb)

(Proverb)

xxiL

^1

UJ

is

or: it

yesterday".

Exercise 69.

S\

e.g.

"the weather

was yesterday" l^5l

Pronoun,

-,G

c,

LljN!

249

Thirty-eeventh Lesson.

Exercise 70.

more diligent to-day than he ink is blacker than yours (thy The Egyptian We arrived in Cairo by rail. ink). If God will, the weather is cleverer than the Syrian. This will be better to-morrow than it was yesterday. This water-carrier

is

My

was yesterday.

prouder (stronger as to pride) than that The porters are more diligent than the The crowd at the festivities was greater than tailors. We went further away than we inwe thought. This wine is excellent, it is more excellent tended. than that, which we drank yesterday. is

Englishman Frenchman.

Thirty-seventh Lesson.

1.

Words may be divided according

into: a) Class 2.

The

names ^lf\ names

Class-

(,.

Concrete

a)

6

o^.

(

~

>

JLJ): b)

to their

are divided into: e

o

>

*

Nouns as Jo^ ^J), whether &

"man", ^js "horse" or Adjectives as

Jjl>

meaning

Proper names (puSty

-

wJ^

"riding",

"sitting". *o,

b)

Abstract

(^*iw

Go. "science",

"ignorance"

J^s* O,

"understood",

Go

id

fp

Q

whether

Nouns

as S

or

Adjectives

as

^le ">'-

^*

,

,&>

"concealed".

Abstract nouns when used in a general sense and without further determination always take the Article, e.g. O-

-

iJLyo=i

>-

so also with

pGjJw metals".

*

5

E

iicl^Jt "bravery

names LLsjlj

is

a virtue

;

of material,, e.g.

L^S\

"gold and silver are two

Second Part.

250

Proper Names.

Proper names are always definite and so can O > , Sobe the subject of a Nominal sentence, e.g. -Jj^ jy^ Zaid is a man". 3.

Proper names are either Simple or Compound. The Simple may consist of three or more radicals, G-o

9 oe.g.

-

Ja'far. AJJ Zaid; ^a*^

The Compound may

Two names

a)

A

or b)

consist of:

placed together,

noun with a

e.g.
Genitive, e.g.

jJJl

.js^c 'Abdallah, !

*

or

A

c)

sentence, e.g.

he carried mischief

t^

Imruulkais,

-

Jajlj'

Ta'abbata sharran

(lit.

a sword, under his armpits.

i.e.

names

Ba'albek;

4.

Personal

a)

The Name

b)

The Kunya (iJS)

are of three kinds: O

in the strict sense or

name

G o,

o

(t)

as

o-o

-

jo

containing a term

of relation such as "father, mother, brother etc.", e.g.

c) The Nickname (<^M) usually given to a man, when he has grown up referring to some quality in him or event with which he has become associated etc., e.g.

ilaj

(properly "a duck"),

Note t

1.

-'

O^lsM

(lit.

iLas

(properly "a 'basket").

Some Proper Names always have

the Article as

the ploughman).

2. The name 0mar ia distinguished from Amr by the fact that the latter has always an otiose at the end in the Go, o, *oNorn, and Gen., e.g. and The Accus. of both is

Note

C

c

+,

^j*^

For

the

see Less. 41.

Declension

*j+&-

tj+c.

of the Proper names and for exercises

Thirty-eighth Lesson.

251

Thirty-eighth Lesson.

The Feminine. For the formation of the Feminine see Less.

1.

2.

Certain Substantives are feminine without a special ending: 60* c* rel="nofollow">)t*

Jjt

%

earth, land.

staff.

viper. well.

scorpion. OJU

war (sometimes

axe.

masc.).

i

house.

J I

coat of mail (some times masc., always

!i

fire.

mill.

sandal.

s | I

wind (sometimes soul

masc.).

6 oC

(with

meaning sun.

|

masc.).

jUl

foot (of verse).

The

is

following words are of G

thumb

(usually masc.).

hare (usually

fern.).

the "per-

son" in counting, it is masc.

/hyena (sometimes

[

means

razor.

*?' /bucket (sometimes \ masc,).

^

2.

it

catapult (sometimes masc.).

"smock").

*)

when

"park").

cup.

masc. when used in the meaning of

^

Paradise (masc.

Common

-

.M

"breath-

masc.).

veil.

finger.

Gender:

Second Part.

252

JjUS G

- -

man.

morning.

breast,

natural

f

^*" I

s

-

^

I

wing (usually j~g

masc.).

6

condition (usually

hinder part.

,

w^

,

1

fern.).

(

J

I

j

3li>

disposition.

fox.

shop.

(masc. nuptials with the meaning "bridal feast").

honey. neck.

_1^L>

shop.

&j

8 P irit

Jus***

path.

spider (generally fern.).

~

G w-s

-

horse.

dUl boat. ifjui

night journey.

so

knife.

^

(kettle (generally \

fern.).

Us neck.

weapon. (masc. with )

f

(

;*_^*

^

meaning

"roof").

market.

c\S shank. o

,

O LJ "^ "***

G , -oui barley. G

,

fa measure used for corn etc. I

o\^o way.

tongue.

(night (generally i

j [

, .

^ ,JU f-

peace.

people.

Js^f liver.

JLk ladder. - heaven (masc. with .

Go,

meaning"Sultan").

peace.

**

^^5 bow.

,'

f

(

masc.). (generally masc.). intestines (general-

musk

ly masc.).

salt (generally fern.). f

u-M

people masc.).

(generally

253

Thirty-eighth Lesson. 3.

Collectives denoting irrational living beings and y (Less. 2, 4)

from which nouns of unity ending in

_

cannot be formed are Feminine,

J^o- "horses" Joj

e.g.

"camels". 4.

Those Collectives from which nouns of unity Q O-

can be formed are of "a bee"

idli"

etc.

Common

gender,

The names

alphabet are also of

used as Feminines, 5.

C-

or

)

o^e>

>

Io

a^oai! oaJ^I

e.g.

(the *UJ{

Jill

*

} ya*

2

3

see Intro.

^Ll!

a-jj^aiLo

but are gene-

gender,

The Feminine ending ^L. jo.,

,

"bees",

of the Letters of the

Common j ,

rally

J^

e.g.

Note

6,

2) is

used in the

following cases: a)

Some

Substantives have

it,

e.g.

^$^

"remem-

brance"; LJO "world" (properly fem. of the Elative of J,o

"low";

LjjJt

in contrast with

is

used

for

present world"

"this

Sy>^! "the future world"). '

b) Adjectives of the

minine

jjti,

e.g.

form

o ^>

otlcafr 9"angry",

take as their Fe-

Fem.

(jr

-o*.

adjectives of the form

*x=* (but not O

O^U3 (with nunation),

e.g.

o

l

"repentant", Fem. c)

<M

The Feminine

of the Superlative

is

of the form

e -g-

Ly

"great";

_^H?

"the greatest" (masc.);

^JJ^I

"the greatest" (fem.).

&

r

"high'

;

highest" (fem.).

jI5T "the

highest" (masc.);

LuH

"the

Second Part.

254

d)

following should also be noticed:

The

Masc. i^5! "the

first";

Fern.

j^M.

"the other"; L

ill "feminine" f7j

J^

(no Masc.)

"pregnant"

The Feminine ending

6.

"the lengthened alif") a)

with some

is

G s (the so-called JjJI

i.\

used:

Substantives,

*L^w>

e.g.

"desert",

v "greatness, pride b)

.

with Adjectives of the form 9

lours or Defects (Less. 10,

2),

e.g.

Jjii! *

denoting Co-

ti

o_^wi

"black", Fern.

ib^J.

Some

7.

Adjectives have no special ending for the G

those of the form .J^*i when they have o _ 0,0 a Passive meaning as J^os ii^l "a slain girl"; also

Feminine,

e.g.

those of the form G

ing

as

)

.

'-'

9

f"

Jye when they have an Active mean-

- o

J _^^*^ x*jl "a patient girl"; also certain Adwhich can only refer to women as Jw*Ls <3

jectives

O

"pregnant"

O

(,}

^-to-*

-

"one who gives suck", jsL "barren".

Note. Foreign words are treated as Femininee, even when they were originally Masc., "protest"

e,g.

_jj^Lai3 "consulate",

(legal).

Exercise

^5/6

^

(Less. 15, 3

a)

U3

71.

(supply:

J

b)

Us

255

Thirty-eighth Lesson.

^S

u

^.i

to

aJ

LkLji

i

i

LI U3 l> Us

I

Jo

i^u!

ol^l JJU

U

$

Js

L

vJlS

^JJ! Us life

T

oU Jfe

^

Lajf

Jo

1

0/ JI5

oU

Le

J Jis

:

JO vl^

^La

Lo

JIS

<

J^cl

cUu]

A-oUJt

^

l

U

ib> us JS

256

b.lj5 auvXi

(jo Q* J^s

k>Lto

UaxJij

aJ

*ju

JjJs

ulS

.tjot

Exercise 72.

When

went out of the

I

city,

I

met two women,

the one of them (was) white and the other black. The lazy girl has not done what I commanded her. This world is the house of transitoriuess, and the other world is the house of eternity. The sheikh gave me The memory of the friend will be many horses. No tree is found in the desert. The lasting.

not djlJj) good. My soul Hind is a thy meeting). The pride of men will be punished. patient girl. The minister has received the highest grade of this order. condition of

my

friend

yearns to meet thee

is

(for

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

JST Jjijf)

(oj&ai;

Number. 1.

For the three Numbers: Singular (oJL), Dual (e&) O

and Plural 2.

used

end

ci

*

(^>)

see Lessons 3,

The Sound

Plural

4 and

(JL,

5.

|^)

Masculine

is

for: 1)

Masculine Proper

in

g),

e.g.

^iC.

Names

(except

those

which

257

Thirty ninth Leason.

Diminutives of Proper Names and Class Names

2)

which indicate rational beings, Plur.

111),

which form

3) Participles,

"writer", Plur.

j'

"little

^I*I; J^>j

O >*J'^; jy& >

of

(Dimin.

,-^t

e.g.

man", Plur. Q_jJU>jtheir

in

Fern,

"official", Plur.

s,

e.g.

OJy _y>U;

J

"believer", Plur. ^^j-u^.

'5s-

4)

Nouns

of the form

which denote workers

,31*3

O

at

trade

a

"tailor", 5)

or

Plur.

Relative

profession

e.g.

^l

o

Plur.

Adjectives

O^!

(Less.

36,

1),

e.g.

5

-bLi.

o &f*. jJist

denoting Elatives,

a /^Ti. O--

son

i *

(for yj), Plur.

o yLj

<>

(also

slLl)

-*- .

- -

,J!c

e.g.

following Plurals should be noted:

o

^1

5),

Adjectives of the form

The 6

36,

>blli.

"Egyptian", Plur. 6)

(Less.

world,

^^^

earth,

o-^9

Q ^f

Jpf family,

^

also

^!;')

(also

master, o,,

Also the Fern,

Arabic Grammar.

iu**

"year", Plur.

_^*/ (as well as

Second Part.

258

Plural Feminine

3.

The Sound

1.

Feminine Proper Names,

also for Masculines ending in

used

is

for:

e.g. Jvi>, Plur.

e.g. xilk,

,

Plur. G-

2)

names ending

Class

Many

in

g,

e.g.

o^b

f

\.

sjb> "city-

quarter", Plur. 3)

o^L>. The Feminines

of Adjectives, whose Masc. takes G

the

Sound

Masc. Plur., G

-

4) Adjectives the

or *!_^ (Less. 38, 5, G ,.* > Plur. o'y.*/ (rare); 5)

Names

S

c

o^a*

"tailoresses",

6),

*

Letters

(fern.),

O^,oPlur.

i!y^> "green"

(fern.), ol^^ai-. of the alphabet and of

O^SOs^j

Ot

Muharram,

"greatest"

^'^S

e.g.

"-

the months, e.g. vjji "alif",

6)

"Egyptian women".

Feminine of which end in \$

of the

Plur.

,

oLjtf "female writers",

e.g.

Plur. olllt;

^-^

month

the

oU^.

Verbal Nouns of the Derived forms, O

^

Oi

i,

"written work", Plur. oLaJu";

vJyaj

But the Verbal Nouns of the have also Broken

Plurals,

e.g.

e.g.

J^Jtl

"disposal",

Plur.

, -

II.

jj_^xaj'

and IV. forms Plur.

"picture",

'

C-

-

o

,

,

"false news", Plur. 7)

Diminutives of words denoting things and G

tional beings, e.g. 8)

e

o-*

^*

"little

Foreign words, even

dog", Plur.

i>!_^

lit

G

..,

-

- -

(Turkish) "Aga", Plur. oJ_^t; (L^lyi-)

(Persian) "Sir",

kish) "Bey", Plur.

irra-

>

when they denote male

*

persons, e.g.

,o-

oL*K.

Plur.

ol.

ol>!^;

J^o (5La) (Tur-

259

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

Note.

(Less. 38,7, Note)

^iXoJLS

Another form

is

A-Ju^i, PI or.

makes

Plur.

oL *

Note the two following words: u ~j.Us>

or

bath"

cf.

o!_^)

Note

Plur.

3

Less. 36,

The Sound

1.

cially of the Pass. Part.) is

Plur.

"heaven",

SL^,

1.

Fern. Plural of the Participles (espeoften used with a Neuter meaning, O , o^

G > o ^ G - ^ oLufc' or o!oy>-jx "existing things", ' .-

e.g.

oULU-;

olijL^

"created

things".

Note typical cf.

Of words derived from verbs that end in ^ or ^5

2.

Fern. Plurals are: from

Sound

Intro.

Note

6,

G --. girl", Plur.

oLxs

3) "prayer", Plur. G ,., or oj^Xs.

o - o \, s^Lo (also written H^Jlo

o!_^>; from

U6 "young

Broken Plurals.

The most

4.

Plural

frequently used forms of the Broken are:

(jZ&t i^>) A.

From 1.

O

Fjom

triliteral

jjd

Jo:l5; e.g.

From jJS

fects),

e.g.

3^1;

^f

Go,

wobo

b)

"blue"

(fern.),

Plur.

(fern,

j.

w^

5

.

ji'.

Plur.

"white", Plur.

*&

"companion", Plur.

(adjectives denoting colours

^]p 'blue",

From

(rare).

G

,

2.

a)

nouns.

^j;

JL>

!>jTi

(for

and

de-

"black", Plur.

ja^);

of the preceding), e.g.

Ms^J

Second

260

From

c)

jJS, e.g. jslTl

Plur. Jjo) Chouse",

J

3.

Ga

e.g.

K*La G

"G-O

iJU (for idUU) "religion", Plur.

Ja3;

of

G-o

*!),

(rarely

Plur. oJLf; jfo (for

to 5.

3i.

G.o-

From xUa -

"lion",

Note

3 o, cf.

G-o G

Part.

^;

From

iJLi,

G

x-^>

From

b)

Plur.

(fern.),

,>

"rank",

x*^

G^

_>

Plur. G

j

v^J,;

s

iU

- >

s,^^ "form", Plur. j^a.

(cf.

Less. 38,

5),

-l

e.g.

"other"

^>\ (without nunation); ^jIxJl "the greatest"

Plur.

(fern.),

^^3-.

-o> e.g.

vJ:

"dome", Plur.

H^ "manner

'G,'

"tent", Piur.

-OJ a)

O^

JJU;

G-'G^O-

life", Plur.

Plur.

"piece",

'

j. G*o^

From

c 3

^

or

Plur.

e.g.

iJixi

(especially

Plur. 5JJ; xl/o "dynasty",

i^S

"village",

^. From

d)

xlls (rare), e.g.

5.

a)

From

5l*3

second radical 3 or

from words with medial

^)

t

e.g.

is

iU

"beard", Plur.

^

Jo

(but not from words in which the

doubled or from those that end in

olir "book",

Plur. wJb'.

o b)

From

J^oe (but not from words, the third radical *

of which

is

^ or ^5), e.g.

From

"way", Plur.

G *> GJw*. iJu*9, e.g. xjjj^i "city", Plui\ G.

c)

^^

261

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

From

d)

Flur.

9

6

Jjja, e.g.

J^

,

,

"messenger, ambassador",

jJJ. G

Go, e)

From Joe Go* Joe

Note.

G

Go,

, ,

or Joe

(rare), e,g.

u&~ u roof

',

6 ,, often

is

met with beside

Oj> Plur. ^jJu,. G ,E

Jots (see

e.g. ^X**l

1),

G o "Jion", Plnr. Jsj*l or %Xw5. tt>

6.

G

Jue. ' Go.

oi

From

a)

"lance",

Joe, G ; Plur. _.U

;

v_Ji

e.g. s

-

,

"garment", Plur. LjUi; g-^ "wind", Plur. b)

From '

c)

3u>; Plur.

From ili^

G /G >Joe, e.g. Jcj^ G ,G,--

Joe and

"neck",

Go,

v

"wine-skin", Plur.

vj '

;

'

GPlur.

"dog",

iJLs,

O *. Plur. JLa*,.

"man", G

e.g.

Plur. vji,;

l^.

- ,

Jsx> "mountain", Plur.

^b

(for

j^3) "house",

the meaning "land"). jlo (with A d)

From J^i

(but not

when used with

Passive

O meaning), e.g. ^..y "generous", Plur. ^ty. G ',

e)

From

f)

From

a)

From

b)

From

a)

From

idi', e.g. sS,' "piece of paper", Plur. OoO^o-. ^ixs, e.g. iLs^j "sheep" Plur. TL*j.

jJJ, e.g. vXxc "slave", Plur. ^^c.. G G , G Joe, e.g. ; 1^> "ass", Plur. -tg^s*8.

Oo^ Joe, e.g. 'O

"science",

G-

Go,

Gfc,

^.

Plur.

,._^Lc;

J^i.

O>jOo

Oci--

vIJ| O

o

"heart";

Plur.

^^

v-^JLii;

G

,

"troop",

Plur.

j >

jjlc g

/

Second Part.

262

"right",

Plur.

>

"house", Plur.

"king", Plur.

o_^-o.

G

G ,E

Js~t

e.g.

Plur.

"lion",

>&

G .,

o^t;

^^JU

^Ju.

From

c)

>

G .Jj*,

From

b)

^

"bead", Plur. JL3 ,J;

tH> gj&>\ G

when second

not

(but

J^tli

radical

is

G

doubled, or the medial radical

is

,

or

j^>lu, L?), e.g.

"witness", Plur. 9.

G

From

G

-

Joib,

e.g.

"sleeper", Plur.

Joe.

G=

.

judge

,SLs>

,

Plur.

G

,

^s>\

-

(JU

JJ 10.

G

Only from

G

-

Ju;l5,

e.g.

3& -

^tf

5 s> "writer", Plur. oUtf.

11. *l*i.

Only from

.j^'J

when

it

denotes rational beings G

and has not

if;

Plur.

or

5

^

as third radical, e.g.

Plur. &j) ^5L "seller",

,

^jK

"writer",

(for -^11).

12. xiii.

Only from

J^

and the word denotes Plur.

s%

when

the third radical

is

^ or

^

rational beings, e.g. j!5 "governor",

(for xljj); oais

"judge", Plur. sUaS (for 13.

iU*ii).

Si.

Go. a)

^

From

Joii

"ox", Plur.

s

in words with medial 3 or ^5,

e.g.

268

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

b)

From

(for^l)

when

Juis

the third radical

*

G

-.

From

jbe, e.g. ^l^. "gazelle", Plur.

d)

From

Jyje

when

the third radical

G

G,

e.g.

is

iJ;c..

3 or

^,

e.g.

o

*x^o) "boy", Plur. iU*x3.

14.

a)

^,

0- o

c)

(for

3 or

"brother", Plur. *y>i. O

Plur.

is

From

Jj6, e.g.

^'

Joel.

"sea", Plur.

^111

b) c)

From From

JJ6, e.g.

"foot", Plur. J^-jt.

jJ^,

jli, e.g. jJs "bolt", Plur. JJsl

From Femmines, which do

not end in s, and d) which have a long vowel between the second and G

third radical, e.g.

G

-

^o

"arm", Plur.

j

oc

5

^

^o!; ^-^^ "oath",

>oE

(and

iL

jJb

16.

From

(rare).

jli when the second

radical

is

doubled,

e.g.

G,

"uncle", Plur.

u.

n. a) is

From JJ6

(jJii especially,

^ or the middle radical

is

when the

^ or ^},

first

i

e.g.

ja^

(

radical

"person",

264

Second Part.

.

o

Plur.

G

og

c^o

u^Ls^t;

Plur.

O tjj]; ^ o

Plur.

o

,

"time",

*Jj "day", Pliy.

j[CT (for

-

c,

O>

plj!,]);

"colour",

J

?^Ji "thing", *O o

(without nunation,

ui;

"suckling", Plur.

From

Less. 41,

2

Joo

a);

, ,

"cause", Plur. ^^ O^osOei

e.g.

Jjii,

cf.

"spirit", Plur. G

6^-

O^, (for

o

^&s

oli^5;

j:

i'uui!

b)

Plur.

,3^) "condition", Plur. 3[^>!; ^jl

(for

Plur. 9Uj

From

c)

o

From

d)

^^L^

J^li, e.g. '

with Passive sense);

J^ots (not

"noble", Plur.

"friend", Plur.

-

^

\3y'

t

(for

^^)

Note specially ^xc "enemy", Plur.

e)

e.g.

"dead", Plur. 9t

18.

From

a)

5lii,

Plur. ^Ij^ "food",

e.g.

O,'c6

O

"physic", Plur. iu^ol; -.^L- "weapon", Plur. >4

leader

Imam,

of prayer", G,

"vessel", Plur. lyoJ; b)

From

radical of

O

^,

3

or

which

is

13),

e.g.

proof, Plur. Sol =

S

pl

v-jf^'

"dust", Plur.

c)

(for xMll); G^ oc *jy>!.

G,

,

Uuc,

"loaf",

(for S?of);

bj^t).

G

j

G

,

From Jyd,

e.g.

Note specially

j^ "valuable,

dear", Plur.

> ,

,

o^+c "column", Plur.

ot3 "valley", Plur.

O

os

ioul

Plur.

G d)

9^

doubled, or of which the third radical

G- oS (for

'xj?

-

^[

J^*i (especially with Adjectives, the second

G is

Plur.

->

G

z

,

K^JUt;

(i

265

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

19.

From

J^oc (especially from roots with doubled second

when

radical, or with final ^ or ^),

O

of

male

to

refers

it

O

.

persons, e.g. (jJvX-o "friend", Plur. iUxot; <~**+L> "phy-

*LJI); Jet "rich", Plur. *Lji].

sician", Plur. illbf (for

20.

ji.

6 a)

From

Jyjii

usually

-

-

xs "slain", Plur.

with Passive meaning,

o-

C-

,

Jj6; *0j> "wounded", Plur.

dead", Plur. b)

From

Sui, e.g.

a)

From

j, 'idle", Plur.

^i^J

21.

iiis.

(f ma l6 persons but not

J4**

u<

in

words

with doubled second radical or ending in 5 or ^},

^

''minister", Plur. i\^.; e

c)

Note specially &L)J> "Caliph", Plur.

j^li,

Plur. ^cui "poet",

e.g.

22.

a)

From

;ii.

o.

Joe (especially from

:

e.g.

Jb

jy)

(for

"brother", Plur. e b)

Plur.

. *

b)

From

O

J,

^J&

From

e.g.

"poor", Plur. t\A.

^

c-

,

e.g.

,o, ~> *:

"fire",

Plur.

words with medial

J^J;

J

(for

.

o

0^

Joe (medial J,

e.g.

o^s

"large

fish",

Second Part.

266

From

c)

"boy", Plur.

u,

Plur.

O

2 e.g.

-

^^ G

-

oL

"boy", Plur.

'

O

G

-

e)

From

J^cls,

a)

From

Jy*, e.g. jJb "district", Plur.

b)

From

J^tli

e.g.

^5), e.g.

J^li

"youth", Plur.

From

c)

d)

Plur.

From

JaiL> "wall", Plur.

-

^

3 or

i;

^Uii.

From Ju^,

d)

"gazelle",

f

e.g.

^

.

JjJb.

(used as substantive, but not medial "rider", Plur.

o'il^; C.U

(for sljJb)

^Li. ^lii,

e.g.

ll^

JjSi (Colours

"brave", Plur. ^1*^.

and Defects),

e.g.

^1*

"lame",

*^. Exercise 73.

^ ^5

ij txi *j

L

(see Less. 38, 7)

^

x

J-i

j to

Thirty-ninth Lesson.

267

cr *

--

.*

&S

,

^ G

fyj

Jj.0*!

^

g '

j^j

ioj^j

i| 3

(supply:

"good!" Less. 47,

6)

>I Exercise 74.

to

The Commander of the Faithful sent ambassadors the kings. The governors are the officials of the

Caliphs. worlds. years.

to God, the Lord of the have not seen my friends for (since) five There were many vegetables in the market.

Praise (belongs)

I

We sat down to take (3(S VI.) the food and drink we had with us (what was with us of foods and drinks). - Five prayers on each day are incumbent on the Moslems. The highway robber (cutter of the ways) demanded money from us. The manner of life (Plur.) of the first (Plur.) will

A

be a warning to the

last

preacher wished to say, "Improve your We said hearts", and he said, "Skin your dogs". farewell to our (the) dear friends. Kings have pages In Beirut there are many (youths) and slaves.

(Plur.j.

schools for boys.

Second Part.

Fortieth Lesson.

Broken Plurals

of triliteral

nouns continued.

24. ifcty. ' o

o a)

From

j^clj,

e.g.

-

L^'6

.-,d

"rider", Plur.

^ly;

Jj

coast", Plur. J*=>[^*. O^ xiobs- "novelty", Plur.

O- '-

b) i

From O

~

A3_>

jJUli,

e.g.

^

>

i^-

,

(for XjLix3L>)

"nobles", Plur.

u^^

"slave-girl",

Plur.

^ty?-)

ty>- (for

(for

Less. 41.

cf.

25. JJUi.

From Feminine nouns, which have

a long vowel *"

between the second and third

e.g.

J--O,, woman",

Plur.

> >:

radicals,

^_^ * ,

>

*

.

old ,

Plur. _J^S; xJw^ "letter",

"wonderful thing", Plur.

^o^.

Note specially -^xa "pronoun", Plur. 26. a)

Article b)

From

(with Article

Ac

"maiden", Plur. J !L\C (with

,^3

"legal decision", Plur. 3 ji

^Sils, e.g. ^!^

^lA*!?).

From

jjJ, e.g.

O c)

Note

specially

"people, family", Plur. Plur.

{l "lands".

*G oS

o-

A-J

fy

"night",

Plur.

"inhabitants";

JLJ;

y^J

J^l

"earth",

Fortieth Lesson.

269

27.

used with 26

a) Is

b) lative),

From JoU e.g.

jl>

Plur.

b; so

and u^Ls.

^!Ac

"pregnant", Plur.

JL>.

c)

From

^i,

d)

From

ijL*i (with final ^ or ^5), e.g.

Cup; xlu

Plur.

^ilr

e.g.

From

"fate, death", Plur.

xitli

(with medial ^

"corner", Plur.

'i^

"idle", Plur.

ClU;

iLLr.

pJ>

"gift",

iUc,' "flock",

"subjects".

jilej

e)

e.g.

(

a,

(Feminine, but not that of the Super-

and

also final

s or

^c),

bl^'.

Broken Plurals of quadriliteral nouns.

B.

1. The three forms that occur have been mentioned already hi Less. b.

28.

"star", Plur.vlj'ly'; slbli "bridge", Plur.

o,

Nouns formed from triliteral roots by prefixing take the same forms of Plural as quadriand t

j.

literals,

and

hence the forms: Jodtf, J^l

iJ^p' "experience",

J^

(for

Plur.

^f^', c*-^

"place", Plur.

JJb?)

"the greatest", Plur.

^'

e.g.

"school", Plur.

JL#

(for JJi>');

(31 "the nobles".

29.

From

quadriliterals,

which have a long vowel O

tween the third and fourth Plur.

^xki-1;

Ju^*

radical, e.g.

"lamp",

Plur

-

o

be-

I

ol^i*-

"Sultan",

Second Part.

270

o

- -

,

"coffer", Plur.

~

^U

/-ijjUjo;

"window", Plur.

"throne", Plur. ^~\j>', '^.^ "desert", Plur.

^c~

(

So

from

in 28)

(as

the forms J^Ui', J**fcUx and Plur.

(cf.

Jjj'uai'

JtgclsT, e.g. jj_^oj'

Less. 39, 2);

news", Plur. also a

is

Plur. JLyo!^>;

Note

^S

specially:

"crown", Plur.

U^f,!

(cf.

S~

>

There

"picture",

ZliL "key", Plur. ^oUx;

"letter", Plur. J-uulX*; jwJl/t

"false

^U.

with prefixes arise

triliterals

Less. 39, *

form J^cl^s,

>

JuJI??; 2).

,

e.g. u-ysls- "buffalo",

"law", Plur. ^-Jl^S. Plur..

^iLo "dinar",

_J-ota;

O |^JO

"diwan, collection of poetry", 30. a)

From many

So,

xJJ

Relative Adjectives

G,

,2*' S

.

j^t

From

O-

certain

1),

"Armenian", Plur.

o-

Xix^h ^50! job "man of Bagdad", b)

Less. 36,

(cf.

O-^S-o*

e.g. jj^w "Moor", Plur. /O^'UM;

--

Plur.

quadriliteral

nouns

indicating

persons (whether with long vowel before the last radical O a

-

or not), especially from Foreign words, e.g.^L> "giant", e.

Plur. G

.,

,

o

,

o

G..-S

*

oLcwl (Persian) "teacher", Plur. BjjU^; '

^,^

j

"philosopher", Plur.

x&l!; SSi Note

1.

Plur.

In nouns that contain more than four radicals O fall

o

,

O

i-ie,

"bishop",

"angel", Plur.

the extra letters generally v

^aiu-t

Ka^iLs;

but not always,

e.g.

out, e.g.

, >

>

*

o-

o^Xxc

"spider", Plur,

,

-4^-J' "interpreter", Plur.

>

271

Fortieth Lesson.

Note

Many nouns have

2.

Note

5, 3,

G,oc spring, notable o , 035

"eye,

G

> o

and Oy^t

"slaves",

Note

3.

e.g. ,-**.

2),

G

,,

"

and n,***

,-rff-^

GO.

"notables"; ^Xxt "slave,

springs", (J-kcf

G

person",

Plur.

of Broken G o.,

forms

different

Plural with different meanings (see Less.

eyes, G .

Piur.

servant",

Jy^

.

oUc

"servants of God".

From some

Plurals a

second Plural G

is

formed,

..

sometimes Sound, sometimes Broken, e.g. /afjJs "way", Plur, G. G,, G.,, 02 Plar. of the Plur, olS-b; Jo "hand", Plur. Joi, Plur. of j^jto, .

,S

a

O,

-

Plur. Obi;

Sli[

_

5

,E

"vessel", Plur. &-u!, Plur. of Plur.

^1.1.

2. In many Relative Adjectives the Feminine ending gives the sense of the Plural. (Properly it is an

abstract Collective

cf.

Less. 36,

iJ^. "mariners"; ^^o "Sufi

2),

^^

e.g.

(mystic)",

"mariner",

iUs^o "Sufis".

In like manner the Feminine of some words of the form 3ls

is

used,

^{JS "bowman, Cawass",

e.g.

"bowmen, Cawasses".

X-w5y>

The following Irregular Plurals should be noted

3.

G

G --

2

*

"mother", Plur.

.1

"mouth" j

(cf Less. 7,

G

9U "water" *aJi

(for

U

i^i.

G

O ^oS

and

for y),Plur. s^xj

G

,

!

uyo (for

"lip" (for x^i), Plur. $lLi.

lw "sheep"

G-

9-

G,,,

-

(for *P^ii), Plur.

G< iixi

Plur.

2),

G^_

.

and

Lii

G

-

six*;.

--

"maid-servant", Plur. Suj and ot^oi..

s- o

Hlt "woman",

-

Plur.

G

-

o

9LJ and s^J and

G

, o

8!

:

Second Part.

272

Plur.

^Llj^* "man", Go, "bow", Plur.

^Gl usually

2

>

H> and Exercise 75.

*lj ofj

15,1

U

^

.Xj

*

viUi5

a*>

ji

U,

v^jJ! ^U

kl

IJ^P

JUil

^A;/

i

UJU

Lo

*>

s 0^*0

j.yI

[>.

oli'

lbJ

^1

Li

5

I^-

U

!

yUi

L

Fortieth Lesson.

tot

273

jiJK

cr '

u Jo

Exercise 76.

A

had a slave (from the slaves), and one day the philosopher said to his slave, "I wish to go to one of the baths." The soldiers bound the This man was one of prisoneid with (the) chains. the dearest of his friends, Who will pay the expenses of the journey? In this land I saw many schools, in which the scholars learn the sciences; and their teachers are of the learned. Inform me soon of th hy certain philosopher

condition (Plur.), for thy friendship is dearer than all Kiss the hands of the brothers andexisting things. The most honourable ruler and the most sisters. noble Sultan, possessor of the greatest happiness and

of the highest (Superlative of

U)

rank,

God

perpet-

uate his days and raise his standards! Amen. --- All the travellers both men and women (what was between the men and the women) were smitten with seasickness.

The

of the wine-skins.

Arixbic

Grammar.

rains pour

down

like

the

mouths

Second Part.

274

Forty-first

Lesson

Declension of the Noun. f-cl)

Nouns

1.

Q

7.

are either Indeclinable ({/**),

"Cautionl", ^iLi clinable

and

8ee Lessons 6

e.g.

"Qatam" (name of a woman), or De-

,*o>

(uyt*).

The Declinable

are

either Triptotes

(O^AO**) *e

having three case-endings

man",

or

Diptotes

endings only "idle",

(Less.

(OJAOJU 6,

.*i)

2.

The

a)

Broken Plurals of the forms

9^

^SUsf,

JJUi and j^JUi

"first"),

^1

(from

also

(Less. 38, 5, 6), e.g. t\*Je "desert",

tl>

"angry", \gjf& "remembrance",

is

Plurals

and

"thing").

jli,

c)

j.*i

the

^T "other")

The Feminine forms *S&,

b)

e.g.

following are Diptote:

(from Jjf

(from

1),

"a

two case-

with

i.e.

2 b and Note

J^

e.g.

a),

i.e.

,

"Omar".

*c

S,

3^1

(Less. 6, 2

>

Nouns

of the form

jjd>],

^Jl/

jis and "white",

"greatest".

the Feminine of which

slxs or joe (denoting colours, defects or elative), e.g.

i3j*f

"black", ^S\ "greater".

Forty-first Lesson.

275

6 -OS

On

the other hand

"widower" makes a

J^f

Feminine

6.,o

"widow".

XJLs.1

form

d) Adjectives of the

which

is

On

jS,

e.g.

OL^

the other hand

(Fern,

^Uxi

the Feminine of

oSL*i

"angry".

lafc)

xiUxi)

(Fern.

"companion

at table". e)

The Numerals which end

alone as pure numbers, the half of six". f)

e.g.

in

when they stand

s

xx~ v^*aj x&Li

"three

is

Most Proper names (see Less. 37, 3, 4) includthat end in whether Masc. or Fern. e.g.

all

ing

tejo (masc.), iuJal^ e.g.

*E/j,

J&*\

x&;

all

that end in

those that end in

or

t>\

^!_,

e.g.

^JL

^ulll,

names

that correspond in form Uii; with a verbal form whether Perfect or Imperfect, e.g. also the Proper

o

^Zii

(name of a

^J^

1U,

tribe),

J^>t,

^-jjj;

also

(name of a woman). ^>^\&

Proper names on the

other

"e

and so with

ful").

o

G

Amr", -jj "Noah", jJ0 (but

other

names of women);

or Adjectives,

e.g.

^-

2)

.

etc.

also

il*

originally

(properly "beauti-

iAl(properly "happy"),o{jj (properly (properly "praised"); 3) certain

6,0-

are

Triptote o i O G, are 1) of the forms Joe, Jue, Joe, e.g. *x^,

"Zaid", 3 !iU

Participles

as

.

hand

G o- S

when they

others

many

single

"desired"),

names

as

Second Part.

276

3, All Diptotes, when they are made definite by the Article or a Possessive suffix or a following Genitive are treated as Triptotes (see. Lees. 6, 3), e.g.

ftl*37

^

from the matters,

,

from his matters,

**

from the boy's matters. 4.

The nouns, which end

iwun, iyun and uyun) "judge",

fcls),

in

_

(arising

cto (for _^!o) "caller", 6i

e.g.

O (for

in

(for

^

from

yds

."wish", change:

iwun, iwin, iyun, iyin, uyun, uyin into In, iwu, iyu, uyu, into o, iwi, iyi, uyi, into

i,

iwu, iyu, uyu, iwi, iyi, and.uyi into Note 2 and Less. 28, 2) e.g.

"judge"

Nom. and Gen.

I (cf.

Less. 6, 3,

Sing.

Accus. Sing.

,,

"two judges" Nom. Dual. Gen. and Accus. Dual. li

''judges"

Nom.

Plur.

Gen. and Accus, Plur.

With

Article:

Nom. and Gen.

^liff "the judge"

or "of the judge"

Sing. .

Accus. Sing.

The Broken

Plurals, which are Diptotes and are derived from ver1 3 .--hose third radical is 5 or ^5, have the Nom. and Gen. in, in the Aceus. iya, as endings

m

e.g.

from slU- "slave f

girl", Plur.

Nom. and Gen. ,U>

Forty-first Lesson.

Accus.

277

from ^^s& "legal decision", Plur. Nom.

(^f^s-;

(

and Gen. j&, Accus. ^Lxi. 5.

Nouns, which end in an (written

as Uac "stick" (for j>oc),

"Mustafa"

JtL*2s>

^vX^ "guidance"

(for ^0*3*) are alike in

(

the Singular;

J_!L

the Diptotes

so also are

as

or ^5-

(for all

)

^JN^),

cases of "re-

(j^o

membrance", LOO "world". o 6.

The noun

"son"

jt

cr conies between the

its

drops'

when

alif,

it

name of the son and that of the The Proper name preceding it loses its nun-

father.

ation, e.g. jj+s.

^1

^j

happens

retained

It is also (cf.

Intro. o

.,

begin a new line the

to

11, }

a

4

if

the word

^1

is

alif is

"Zaid

-

>

^ - ,

l3

^vX

the

retained.

e.g.

b),

c

is

the son of Amr".

Exercise

Less. 7, 2)

if

used predicatively

Go,

22+B ^jj sXfj

(see.

But

"Zaid the son of 'Anir".

j^

>

af-

.a!

> *

77.

o *

(jf^Jb

o> -J/

,

^U-JL,

e

Li

o,

(oJlXs tjai^

^

, (

c5Ul

A-JLt

bf

L

ol

s , ,

jo^i

Second Part.

278

&U!

Js+c

Ll

b

Exercise

him with

Strike

J,

78.

Five

the stick.

is

the half of

The Caliph el-Mu'tasim was acquainted

ten.

L.I?

C

and Imperf.) with AH, the son of el-Junaid el-Iskaft and el-Mu tasim said to the son of Hainmad, "Go to the son of el-Junaid and tell him to prepare to be-aguest to me" and he came to him and said to him, f

"Prepare to be-a-guest of the Commander of the Faithful, be a guest of Caliphs is a great thing (is great). It was said to a boy, "Does not thy teacher cloths thee?" And he answered, "Verily, if my teacher had a house filled with needles, and Jacob came and with him the prophets as intercessors and the angels as pledges, to borrow from him a needle with which to sew the garment of his son Joseph, which was torn, he would not lend (Perf.) him it; then how should he for to

clothe

me?"

_______ Forty-second Lesson. The Use

of the Cases. 6

(A word in the Nominative Accusative

O>o^ wa^a,

is

called

6join the Genitive

>o

p^y>, in the

s? or

jo-

279

Forty-second Lesson.

1.

The Nominative

a)

The Subject

used for:

is

(jsj)

in a Verbal sentence (Jcli)

of a Nominal sentence (sSoJLo). b)

The Predicate

See Less. 11, c)

and that

See Less. 11,6.

Nominal sentence

of the

6.

The word

following the Particle of Address Ljl

(always used with the Article) and after G (in the Sing, without nunation), when it is not made definite by a See Less. 48. following word.

The

d)

Attribute

word

or

of,

in

to

Apposition

another word in the Nominative. a

The Predicate of sentences beginning with

Note.

kindred particles (see below

2 h)

G 2.

The Accusative

a)

The Object

or the

put in the Nominative.

o -

(v^xaj) is

4^0),

(

is

,-.t

used

for:

e.g.

"I struck Zaid".

"Thee we sJiijio

Note

1.

serve".

"I struck him".

In Arabic most verbs denoting w

transitive.

The

intransitive

^j^OT JoUII.

transitive

verb

is

called

*'to .

-.'Go

^.Xjuii

come" are > O OS J*ftJl, the

Note. 2. For the government of theAccus. by the Verbal Noun and the Participle see Less. 34, 6, 8. b)

The Absolute Object

or

Cognate Accusative

see Less. 34, 7.

Go,

c

Determinations of Time and Place

Less. 45, 5, e.g.

^jf

"in the morning",

O&

see

"to-day", {j; "to-morrow",

xL

Jw

"(during)

a whole year".

Second Part.

280

"he looked right and

left",

t^ U VsU,

"he travelled by land and sea".

To

class

this

2

Determinations

^3

Ul'Jl

sL>.

\Ls\j

of the

Aim

(cf.

"above",

Less. 34,

(3ls-) for

and Verbal Noun are used

e.g. 6).

which the

generally,

e.g.

"he cauae riding". O

o,

Specification (j^i) with the

f)

*i

or Purpose,

"I rose to honour him"-

Determinations of Condition

e)

Participle

the Accus.

in

^jtL> "behind",

e.g.

etc.

^^=' "under", d)

many words

belong

used as Prepositions,

meaning "in regard

to, in", e.g. o

o -

>, o

O

^1

Jv.)

* o

cr LJLc

3J

c.

"

Zai d

is

greater in regard

c

to

knowledge than Amr". ill!

w^3

"be good in regard

to soul"

i.e.

"rejoice

heartily". g)

The

Predicate

and

(^>] of

its

sisters

(cf.

Less. 30, 12), e.g. yj>.j

JJj

^ "Zaid

h) The Subject

o

\

oa

"truly",

^

^1 "that", v^yJ

"for", ^yCJ "but";

"because",

"0 would

*jfe LXJ-' ."{ "J C'g

or tSu:

The noun

jJL=S ^^IlJ

^'

i.e.

^

"as

if";

that!", J*^ "perhaps"; e.g.

'V

l^ i)

was a man".

after the following particles:

after

^

*jl5

...I

l^

iwJs

the ^

for

"truly, Zaid

that

denies

the denial of the

absolutely class)

cf.

Forty-second Lesson.

3 p

Less. 45,

yu $

"there

The noun

3.

jo i "there

"the matter

i.e.

The Noun

j)

"0

e.g.

is

absolutely necessary".

Address

jJI

Jj?

Note

*

or in

of,

2.

The Accusative ,

it

Appoe.g.

often stands in single expressions is to be supplied, e.g,

where a verb O

^X>

"welcome!", where

is

understood, t

have come

where

when

"I thought Zaid (to be) a physician".

G?

^5>t

&$*2

+,

G o^

%,

verbs take two objects in the Accus.

Many

especially Exclamations *

is

"Zaid with his brother". l.t3 Oyj,

e.g.

oUik

, *

it

jOrf,

O,

*

b if

"0 Abdallah",

G

word, which is an Attribute sition to another word in the Accus. 1.

no escape from

is

A

Note

e.g.

no doubt",

is

the Conjunction

after i

means "with", 1)

nunation,

ruler of the Faithful 1"

The Noun

k)

its

after the Particle of

followed by a Genitive,

U-^jlT ^J!

loses

no escape", JLi ^ "there

is

xJLs? $) *^JiJI ^, (or

the matter"

281

to

friends

and an agreeable

i.e.

"you

O -

place''; ^Lj-* "slowly",

^J^A\ "go" is understood.

2-

The

3.

Genitive

>

,

or



is

used

iu

the

following: a)

A Noun

which

"

is

connected with another by

^

Annexation (wU3|), see Less.

6, 4.

Note. Arabian grammarians say that the force of one of the prepositions u, o-

or

^5,

e.g.

J^

.i
>

jo^J

^

Xi^/tot,

1,5^X1 '

,

o

1

*X^ = >

(^UJ "the boy who 60, "a garment i*.^; !

has the

(belongs) to Zaid"; o,o

of

silk';

5 Z

"the prayer of sunset".

Vj*

'

'

Second Port.

282

b)

A Noun

(^ ^j>} see Less. 44.

after a Preposition

A

Noun which is an Attribute of or in Appoanother in the Genitive. In connection with a) it should be noted that some nouns combined with a Genitive in Arabic correc)

sition to

to English Adjectives,

spond

3^

1)

o.

fjj

i

"whole",

i.e.

"all, *

.

JJ" "every

day

Js^f,,

;

Adverbs

"

{,

every,

men"

city";

^

"everyone who"; U ]s "aU that

JJ"

Similarly

**=>

>

e.g. (jJJJ?

Go-'

2)

*(JL$

,jaju

J^

or

,0.0

^f

(also

idbtf

properly "a part",

LT^O;

for "all",

men".

"all

QajJ "one of the poets"

e.g.

,

(Rel.)".

and &$ "whole" are used

^iLT

i.

juuxlt Jj' "the

;

whole

yJJJl

:

-

i

^S "each

a^

etc.

the whole",

i.e.

i.e.

"one,

some",

e.g.

"a certain poet" or

"some

poets". Q O 3) JjLo "likeness" corresponds to the English "as,

like",

e.g.

jjj

JJU "like Zaid",

"like

idi*

him", or

"as he". 4)

^^

properly "an other"

means

"except", e.g.

science" jjjjf <j^*> "except 5)

"an other than" often corresponds j*L properly

to the prefixes non-,

non-Arab";

^1* "

6)

Gen. Accus. E.g. gjjb-^rt (cf.

Less. 7,

& 1).

^

un-,

im-

etc.,

e.g.

L-ytIT

^i

"a

"im-possible".

#*-<^>^

^-^JL^

..

both .

Fern.

"both the men";

U^ir

"they both"

283

Forty-second Lesson.

many of

"a

7) Ctj

by an

Indefinite

Noun,

i.e.

"many "

vJ^Jil OsS f* '

a" always followed

e.g.

Vj

Jw>j'

manv

man have

a noble

I met".

Emphasis.

4.

A

a)

Repetition (JJaSfT js-^LJjf "literal emphasis"),

noun can be emphasised by:

''he

*[=> 'fj

"I

The use

b)

came running

saw thee" of

(cf.

special

jUb

(Plur.

^

Such words

x**sixj

of

"

'

f '

The words Emphasis

(see

^13)

(Plur.

8' ,

5

JJ',

5-^*> and KsU

above

Oa

3,

are:

1

"self

x*ii j^j zL> "Zaid himself came". say

3).

(^jjuil OvJ'UJt

"emphasis according to the sense"). ,JJ5) and

(quickly)".

Less. 43,

words

e.g.

,

e.g.

One can

also

-

used

are also

for

1).

The Permutative.

(ixln "the substitution") 5)

The Permutative must

follow immediately the jo

word

for

which

it

is

substituted

(*.;

)

, p.o

OvXi!)..

There are four kinds of substitution: a)

(j^IT

^

The

substitution

JjO? ixl)

equivalent to the

j

i.e.

word

of the whole for

the whole

where the Permutative for

which

it

is

is

exactly

substituted, e.g<

sL> "Zaid, thy brother came";

gecoud Part.

284

"the

the

city,

b)

came

the great and the small,

The

part

is

people of

to me".

substituted for the whole

((jzauJ!

JjJ

e.g.

xLS "kiss him the hand" j v_ju Jt jw/i

"he ate the

i.e.

"kiss his hand";

half of

loaf,

it"

i.e.

"he

ate the half of the loaf". c)

A

possession or quality

name (&*&&[! i3o

i.e.

is

substituted

for the

Permutative of inclusion"),

e.g.

garment pleased me"

i.e.

'

J ye, *

joy

f)

o^

vXjj

, ,

og

^*>-^!

"Zaid,

his

v^^^ssOwo "I garment pleased me"; Ijyjj praised Zaid, his beauty" i.e. "I praised Zaid's beauty".

"Zaid's

d) (JaiiS!

&JL*s>

A

word

is

used to correct the previous one

^ Jo "the Permutative of error"), e.g.

"I passed

(j*o s-Jio

by a dog (no, I mean) a horse". Exercise

79.

XJLJ

Jo

"^

xi!

c>>^U->

'i-*J

-^j^

285

Forty-second Lesson.

JliJi

3^-

.

J^

3

yil

xj^

LX^ olyuaJl

Ji

Second Part.

286

r5 ^ L (used as

an exclamation) fJaJ| (be comforted!)

jJfflj

ll^e

tJt

^

^

t

V^>

^

3y> ^ wJ?

ill!

Exercise 80. It

is

necessary

to

is no escape necessary that I give thee The captain was extremely

go away (there

It from going away). what thou demandest.

is

astonished at what (Co) had happened to me. sea was calm and the atmosphere

I travelled in the direction of

still.

Egypt and you pray

clear

(3tl)

God

travel

in

that he

The

and the weather

(making

for SJaa

the direction of Syria.

may

I

bring you safe to your

We

country. wept bitterly and that hour was a That man was intelligent, pious, very grievous hour. of noble character, of noble soul. Verily calamities do not cease following me, since I went out from the She sighed in despair (the sigh of the despaircity.

and her sighing was increasing my pain and I have no (me as to pain and sorrow). We have only death power to withstand calamities. ing)

sorrow

before

us (there

Throw us both

is not before us except death). into the sea, or preserve us both.

Since the main purpose (most important of purposes) of our high dynasty is the rooting out of the causes of encroachment and of evil by sea and land, we are legally

on

all

and morally compelled ships of the Corsairs.

to (that we)

make war

287

Forty-third Lesson.

Forty-third Lesson.

Pronouns. o 3.

The Personal Pronoun (jt+*o)

is

either

Independent

and may be in the Nomi-

or Suffixed (cf. Less. 8, 1), native or the Accusative.

For the Independent Pronoun see Less. Note.

^ the

fixed to_^S> or 3.

O "and",

If the conjunctions ^,

sometimes loses

its

The Independent Pronoun

6.

3,

6 "verily" are

vowel,

_^,

e.g.

pre-

^s

etc.

in the Accusative is

as follows: 3.

Masc.

j

him. her.

3. Fern.

lfl>j

2.

Masc. SCt thee.

2.

Fern. ^JU

U]

them both

UflT[

you both

IfCt you.

4. a)

With a verb

"vsHjj

b) If >

e.g.

a

U

^U

in the Accus.

is

used: e.g.

two Pronouns are Direct Objects of a verb, - o

J^LLft!

"he

gave

it

me";

(to)

but

it is

also

oS

a Verbal Noun, him". c)

-

emphasise the Pronoun,

to

possible to say xollacf.

(to)

us

Kj

"Thee we serve".

-

after

"a

^Cj

^tj me. The Independent Pronoun

j>l*jtj

them.

^bj r

"s

1.

?uj

It is also

e.g.

used as the Object

JLJott

C| ^

"my

giving

Independently as a Warning, without a verb,

"take carel", see Less. 48,

2.

it

e.g.

Second Part.

288

For the Suffixed Pronoun see Lees.

5.

Note ,3.

The

1.

"my Lord I"

letter

(cf.

^5

Less. 48,

3.

2,

Note),

and in the Pronoun

J,, e.g.

>*

>*

(for

"fear me".

JsjSi

Note 2. The Pronoun a a is

1

8,

for often omitted in the cry v.^

is

often refers to a whole sentence

s

and

i

then called a ^L*J! j*+te',

translated "it" or omitted in

it is

translation.

6. If the Personal Pronoun is to be emphasised it repeated in the Independent form, whether it has already been contained in the verbal form or expressed is

as a Suffix, struck me".

e.g.

\&AJO "I struck",

fi|

The Emphatic Pronoun

^jfo "he

Gt

"myself, himself" etc.

ex-

is

pressed by the use of U*AS (Plur. (j^aJt), ^xt (Plur. S G ^ o or oU> (Plur. ofy>) with the Pronominal suffixes .,

(cf.

Less. 42, 4

b),

e.g.

himself; so also ^^-ijf

Jw

or x*-^j

x**aj

"the

($?.

matter

"Zaid this

itself,

same matter".

The Reflexive Pronoun

7.

o

,

o^

in the Accus.

is

also ex-

r-,

pressed by ^^^j, ^AC, oto (with their Plurals) and the

Pronominal If the

suffixes, e.g. j^wii

jJs "he

Pronoun depends on a

killed

t o

enough

to use the

Pronominal

himself".

suffix, e.g.

>

-

LA

-

J,

is

it

Preposition,

p -

5

oJe>l

"1 took something for myself". 8.

The Reciprocal Pronoun "one another" is expressed

#.-*..-*'-

o,

by the use of ^a*j "one, some", "we have helped one another". G

After peated, e.g.

Prepositions

the

e.g.

ui*j

'uL*i=ju

'Jj^Lw

o-

^>aj

need

not

be

re-

Forty-third Lesson.

r

(

^Ju*jJl

Ijj

"the

289

soldiers

approached

one another". 9. For the Demonstrative Pronoun and the Interrogative Pronoun see Less. 9 for the Relative Pronoun see Less. 31. ;

Exercise SI.

&..

Ug

5-

^

S

,>-*-

o'liuxll J^it

ju|j^ UoLaS'

-

Joa L*

Uu

OS

^

o,

Q^

lil

,

L,

ik>

o/ c^il J

U

*

1

L^

U>Lj

^UJt

^^JiL

Arabic Grammar.

j

fH^i

, ,o

Second Part.

290

Exercise 82.

You have manded

ourselves have

com-

The beggar demanded an alms from

this.

us and we gave

You

We

struck us.

will

him. My giving it was yourselves to destruction.

it

offer

(a)

good.

You

have demanded the same matter as we have demanded. The two parties were entangled with one another. Those shepherds asked me if I was the person sought. I began to comfort myself and cheer my spirit - (raise myself) with vain hopes. Truly, what has befallen me is by reason of my deceiving thee. Let us throw ourselves into the sea and die at once. The captain commanded a sailor to separate us from one another. Remember my freeing thee from the hands of the robbers.

Forty-fourth Lesson. Particles. O o1.

The

2.

The

are divided into Prepositions, (^_iy>) Adverbs, Conjunctions and Interjections. Particles

Prepositions.

Preposition

is

called O

by a

verned

preposition i

with

its

noun

>

O

^c,

is

~^\ Jy>-, the word go>'o

,

^^*, and

the preposition

,>

i.

is

^yfd^ jL=M. A. Inseparable, consisting of Prepositions are: one letter always attached to the following word; B. Separate, which stand alone and are either true particles or nouns in the Accus. 3.

A. inseparable Prepositions. 1)

uj "in, by. with"

Verbs

denoting

"to

etc.

adhere",

"begin", are construed with

[jo "to begin with".

o

e.g.

"attach", /sic.

"to

"seize",

hang on",

Forty-fourth Lesson.

"To in

believe in"

^

is

291

e.g. *JjC

^\,

vJUT

"To swear by" swear by

my

After

vj

is

^J,

Sometimes the verb

head".

^

"See! Behold I"

lot

^|^ ^^^\

e.g.

Nom. may be used), e.g. Behold a man came (or Jo-j ^J). In negative sentences, often prefixed to

is

y

u^lfc

ylJ he U they

j?

Many

a thing,

e.g.

is

not a rider

i.e.

omitted.

jj

is

ji-j?

&

a noun,

(or

are not aware (or

are followed

which the motion

jt

the predicate

if

it,

intransitive verbs of

when they

tive,

is

"I

used (but the noun

is

alone in the

vj

"I believe

God".

refers,

he brought

^

(This vj Of

transi-

and the object

$>**

e.g.

it.

^

Note. The expression

motion become

by

Jt he is

to

came with

called AJjuJcft *U)

S

oaf ^L means

"at the price of

my

father thou art to be redeemed", i.e. "thou art so dear to me, that I would redeem thee at the price of my father". (This is called

JujJxi

2)

and

!

*L,

the ba of redemption.)

o

3)

and

'$

"by" hi an oath,

"by God", (o occurs only in

&&

however a verb 4) J "for,

& sion

is

(=

is

to,

e.g.

: dS and

this expression.)

used in the oath,

o

must be used.

because of".

used to express the Dative and denotes posses"have", see Less.

8,

5).

As a Conjunction

it

If

(with the Subjunctive of the verb) denotes "in order that, so that". 19*

Second Part.

292 It

denotes the English "of, G

o,

determinate noun,

e.g.

JojJ * '

G

^oLo

follows an in-

it

v^ a

friend

DO ^

me

of

f

(belonging

one

of

my

used especially for the editor of a book,

e.g.

Zaid";

to)

a

when

,

J,

i.e.

friends. It is

*W"

^*2tt of

(i.e.

jot)

and

denotes

Cause,

"for

the

benefit of"

(opposite

of

so denotes a creditor (j^ the debtor), e.g.

f^> v_J j It

Stories of the Prophets

written by) Tha'labl. also

,3

u^*^ The

tikllc

vi,

thou owest

me

a thousand dirhams.

used to denote the Purpose and the

also

is

e.g. >

I

Js

for this reason, therefore.

.

iJ JJ Note

I

3

1.

Passive, "to

Note

3

o'j'

2.

^

e.g. a)

p e rs.),

e.g. *I,

after the particle of address

J^

(&&>)

changed to

is

1st

especially in the

"to say to" often means,

name",

call,

(except with the to

rose to help him.

be was

(is)

called.

before Pronominal suffixes

i3

l^

U

It

etc.

e.g.

is

v^sSJJ

L

also

changed

"0 wonder",

^

Jojj

L 5)

"O

Zaid!"

3

"as,

prepositions,

(i.e.

like"

is

although

"similarity", e.g. It is

-come and help

joj?

usually it

is

Zaid!).

counted

really

a

among

the

noun meaning

"like Zaid".

not used with Pronominal suffixes.

293

Forty-fourth Lesson. B.

Separate Prepositions.

1) lj "to, unto, until". nearly related in meaning to ^ and serves to

Is

express motion towards a place, iJjjCtl

he came

sLa-

j,f

In relation to time a certain point of time, *loofcST

tLph\ Si

Notice specially

"and so

16)

With

It

is

to

Q, from beginning to end. ^5 (abbreviated

"to him",

j^- "up

used with

gjf

,

see Intro

to,

"Jl

"to me", etc.

as far as".

suffixes.

sometimes used to mean "even" and then no influence on the case of the following

L^

J&> iX^J? vilf?

word, -e.g. even its head".

3)

With

up

forth", "et caetera".

2)

exercises

expresses continuance

e.g.

^M

sufiixes: xJjt

Is not

it

e.g.

to the city.

jc

ate

the

fish,

"over, on, against".

suffixes: *llc

Used of

"I

"on him";

($*& j*

place.

he

J^ "on me"

etc.

on the way.

sat at table.

a city on a

river.

Notice specially: t^jb

j*

^

&'^S>[

o

IJaj'

to look (with pleasure)

}

>

to

at

examine into a thing.

a thing.

Second Part.

294

iudc (or

'i

-J^i)

he fainted

(lit.

it

was made

dark upon him). ojo*,

>,,

Peace be on you! (the greeting of

fXJlc j.XvJ!

Moslems

one another, the answer being ..^LJl

to

&Iic

x^

ajff

&IL.

jJL^

Jj|

ftlL

God

jjj

peace (see Intro.

Used

^Xlitj).

God's mercy be upon him.

him

give

blessing

and

16).

in a hostile sense:

-j:>

he went out

war) against him.

(to

So with verbs denoting anger:

was angry with

tiUlc OVA^CC I

thee.

Used with Adjectives: a-/J*

"To

^ J^

6-

O

o ,

v_^suo

( J^w)

,

incite to" ,j^

Jdr

tie

also

is

I

i

dU -3 that

cx>;

is

too hard (easy) for me.

"to induce to" jst j^, e.g.

have induced him to

(do)

something.

used to indicate that a burden, duty

or debt lies on one, e.g. , ^

Jkc vc

\}

0*

(jto^s

v^?.

a duty incumbent on a man.

it is

the duty of such

o io^ you owe me ^

.

this (see A, 4).

cT-

Jvc Jv*u5 a preference over.

Common

expressions with

jfi gU? according to

o J^ t

j*

are:

...

on the supposition

and such a one.

that.

Forty-fourth Lesson

295

so far as possible.

bring him here to me. lit:

on the head and

-

tlie

e^ e)

willingly, with pleasure.

conjure thee by God.

I

^

4)

With lie

^1^ "from me";

etc.

Used of place verbs denoting to hinder,

il^ "from him",

suffixes:

"from us",

"from, instead of".

=

away from, and avoid,

flee,

defend (with

so is used with restrain oneself, forbid,

of these verbs

many

^

can be

used), e.g.

^ ^c ^^

(or s

-

to prevent

.1*

(or

to avoid

vwixs^

J O"*^ o^

....

^ e ^en d someone or some-

^

'**^

from

....

thing. It

reveal,

is also used with verbs meaning open and ask, e.g. *.

J^

QC

0,05 o, *.^ .\ Ooi^

to

^jt^iS

o-

-f-

to ^c. JLv

to

uncover,

uncover something. ask

about someone or

something. In the sense of the Latin de "concerning", it

To

is

e.g,

told concerning Solomon.

indicate the source of information, e.g.

^iLsl Q* ash-Shafi'l.

lf=>

it

is

told

on the authority of

Second Part.

296

It

used

sometimes

is

of

time,

e.g.

voy>

QC-

him

(see

"shortly, soon". Notice specially:

ST '^o} May God be

11^ Intro.

pleased with

16).

^

apart from.

^Le

"in".

5)

With It

*o

suffixes:

expresses rest in place or time

questions "where?" and "when?", house, iilljl

JsJ>

Sometimes - )9*

*

^1

J,

it

e.g.

and answers the J |3jT &

in

the

in this year.

motion to

expresses

a

place,

e.g.

into the cistern.

fell

jj>5

denotes "among",

It also It is

e.g.

^ who among us.

*

-.

g

.....

speak about

to

-&

LLo

used with verbs of speaking and thinking:

....

to think over ^

J^obf

to consider something.

Also after the verbs of desiring: for

etc.

~~

he

3,

^

me

in him, ~& in

something;

^

r

J

"To multiply by" iiSls

6)

With

jJ,

with him,

is

v-Jytot

^jJ,

suffixes

to

_h

^

,3

v ^; 1

*

after.

v-j-xa,

e.g.

multiply three

by seven.

5jJ "with" (Latin "apud").

aJLxJ

^xl

yearn

with him, J,jJ with

with me;

is

rarer than

me

etc.;

Forty-fourth Lesson.

With It

^)

(rarely

5^8

7)

'297

"with".

suffixes xLs with him,

^

with

me

etc.

denotes association in place or connection in

time, e.g.

lL he travelled with me.

^x

I

means

It often

XeLw (j^ It also

Lo^

came

to thee at sunrise.

have something with one",

"to

e.g.

have a watch with me.

I

translates the English "besides", e.g.

besides his being a stranger.


tSjl

Notice specially: tiUj

o?

,* in ^A

spite of that.

in spite of the fact that, although.

S) (lr

With

.w

suffixes

"from".

from him, Lx from us

etc. o ^

Used of place

(often interchangeable with ^c):

cr T > he went out from the It is

used with verbs denoting

to

go

tent.

out,

to free,

to fqrbid:

yL't

me) from

^

B1I

J^cl

take refuge in

I

God

(to

evil.

Used of time: cr

Sometimes used

from mornin g

(like

j^)

^, since two years

to i.e.

to evening.

mean

"since".

two years ago.

free

Second Part. It is also

employed witn verbs and nouns denoting

nearness, as iL,

^ji

0^3

e.g.

I

approached the enemy.

6

near us.

3

Notice specially: xi/> o

*

e>

s^

l

he sold to him.

',

..a,-..

Q^ (v^j')

v^

wonder

to

at

something;

so with other verbs of feeling:

^

'

e

o

to rejoice at

^i 1*

.....

}

Q. J?;**** pleased at ......

The word "than" ty

after a

is

Comparative

expressed

e.g.

Ir; ~ O

.

OiO

"A

^

J

_.

O

JC

Q, e ^1 swifter than the dog.

v.JlXJi

certain"

often expressed oy cr preceded

is

by

a word indefinite in the Sing, and followed by the

same word

definite in the Plur. e.g.

a certain merchant. It is also

used partitively

noun

in the Plur. or quantity, e.g.

definite

number

o

~A

o j ^S

<*

(jjixoJJdl)

to

indicate

followed

by a

an indefinite

-

o

he has already shown you some

of his signs, and to indicate material, e.g.

or It

what

is

j^

^

wood.

very often used after U to explain intended by the particle, e.g.

is

(p^^

Forty-fourth Lesson.

o of wealth

U what

me

with

is

in the

way

the wealth, which I have.

i.e.

*01

l/

299

J>0

'

U what you have done us in the way of kindness

you have done

Is not It is

i.e.

the

which

kindness,

us.

9) jJJ, 5J> "since" used with suffixes.

(for

^3

^,).

sometimes followed by the Nominative,

.20.0

o,

.

?

\>

>

JUO)

JU/>

*>-

-

<SU1. "^

U

,*.

.

-

(Jb.)

,

<,i

JOLx

.

dUj^ U

e.g.

\

(

01 _

to

f

,

,

I

have not seen since Sunday.

you

j

Nouns used as Prepositions. 4.

Of the Prepositions, which are Oo

really

nouns

Accusative (oJ>), the following are the most 1)

2)

fU

common:

"before, opposite" (of place): jLuf

before, opposite the castle.

*U

before the judge.

jou "after" of time or rank (opposite of

oixR jJu 3)

^A

When

in the

.

jjjs):

after the birth (of Christ).

"between".

two words are dependent on

^,

then

if

both are substantives the not be repeated, but ^^o need if one (or both) is a pronoun it is always repeated, e.g.

between Zaid and ^j

c

Ainr.

between thee and thy brother. between

me and

thee.

Second Part.

800

^ ^

U and

^.

meaning as

U and ^.o sometimes mean "both

"partly

and" or

partly":

U

^eJ^ yfj& ^.o 4}

;i#

M 5)

l'f jLftJj

(SL>.

both poor and rich came to

us.

i

I

"under, below" of place or rank (opposite

6) v^Js?

to

UAS are often used with the same

^jll

y). -s2*

ci^ under 1

'

a

tree.

below the king

(in rank).

7) sto^- "opposite":

jfjJ?

siJo> opposite the house.

3^> "round

8)

about".

i^5> round about the city.

idjsXtl

JjU- "behind":

9)

behind (jtfb v_IL> 10)

"on

^o

j^

be under thy

back.

under, without":

this side of,

JJJJ

%jvc

my

on .y^o

dU>Jo ^+,3

this side of the river.

may

the cheek of the

enemy

feet.

With the meaning "without" QJ jo* * **

or

o ^i

J

may

be used instead of

o

(or

^^0

^

or

3 o;

g 3 Jo) o ^o

without that.

^ "

Forty-fourth Lesson.

301

For the meaning of tiU.^ and

Note.

JjO see Less. 48,

2,

11) ,kie "with, at":

Used of jJji

place:

^Jl>-

I sat

with (beside) him.

Used of time:

h e came fj&> ^ic d->

jw^iJ! It is

iu

often used with the

^

(or

Note.

ttXi^

or

J,)

^kXic means

^

12) (jto^c (or

oj^i

iy

over,

(opposite of

"on,

I

"to have".

meaning

have wealth.

"according to

Itojc)

tiU5 otolr: tJ^P 13)

I

^OOLC

at sunrise.

''instead

my of,

opinion

it is

so".

in place of":

took this in place of that.

above":

of place

and rank

o^?):

a^wixJl viVllt

-*js

on the

tree.

ijs above the king

(in rank).

14) JJ3 "before" of time (opposite of JsjJ):

oi*Il 15)

Jjo

jbJ! 16)

^ J.5JO

^

before the birth (of Christ).

"before" of place (more often *UI): before the house.

"towards":

o-iJl j^? towards the West. Note,

j^

is

used as a substantive in

all

Cases with a

following Genitive in the sense of "like" or "about". o, jo- Oja like Zaid.

j^

^

Jc?.,

man

Second Part.

302

J^.

AJlo

>s=o o. -A I passed by about a hundred men.

on the

17) s]jj "behind,

far side

of:

behind them. behind (on the 5.

Two

case, if the

^

L** cr

mountains.

In this prepositions often occur together. second was originally a noun, it must be

put in the Genitive, JJU.J

far side of) the

e.g.

from between them i.e. from the midst of them. fr

m

ver

i.e.

from under

above.

i.e.

underneath.

from with. cr from on

^ or

o j)Jo

i.e.

down

from.

without.

before. ij^ cr, after.

Exercise 83.

xUJ *JOUc

^Las

^ yolj Uj" oJo^ A)

ifiiLLw

L^JC?.^'

^50!

i^SU

Jlsj

jijJ!

^i *J

/Jo'

Forty-fourth Lesson.

03

_

XxS

xJLc

ilf

,

UG

3 ?

JlJ

^

iS

L

Second Part.

304

U

A]

oc^w* Jo

Exercise 84. I

have

(in)

able joy (what

this is

day experienced

indescrib-

(jtiUs)

not described in the

way

of joy).

I shall speak to thee about this matter I was (^U;). very disturbed on examining your letter which came

(o^

Part. Act.) to his Excellency our lord

(the excellency of our lord the father),

and father

may God

protect

him!, and although I almost turned away (in spite of my being I turned away) from the mind of his Excellency what disturbed him, yet I was not able to content my thoughts with the least (of what is) possible, and for this reason I find myself disturbed (of the mind), hoping that you will honour

noured

Verbal

Noun

of

by

^Jjuj

formation (sJbl); and we pray ance of health and wellbeing.

me

for

(the

being ho-

giving

me

in-

you the continnu-

What

I

have learnt

Forty-fifth Lesson.

305

of thy indisposition hps grieved me, and I have prayed God that He will clothe thee with the garment of recovery, for He can do all things (He over every thing is powerful). Perhaps our lord will bring thee what The sheikh was extremely astonishwill rejoice thee. ed at our answer.

Lesson.

Forty-fifth

Adverbs. 1.

Adverbs are either 1) Particles, Inseparable or Nouns used only in the Nom. or Accus.

Separate, or 2)

Inseparable Particles. 2.

The Ad verbs, which

are Inseparable Particles are:

a particle used to indicate a question

a) 1

(=

see Less. 2, 5) (called the -Ljfcu-^T <-Jy>); but only

no Interrogative pronoun occurs |jJ

(or viiii j^)

but

to

\Sj>

JJ

in the sentence, e.g.:

Jjbi! hast thou done this?

^

who has done

pf

I in a double question; see

b)

a particle used

tj

to

the Imperfect (see Less. 13,

form of

Jl

(xLxil

c)

J^p

when

this?

^t.

give a Future meaning 4).

It

is

a shortened

"at the end".

O^MW) xbtdLw I shall do

it.

5 a particle used for Emphasis, "certainly, truly",

often omitted in translation, Arabic Grammar.

e.g.: 20

Second Part.

have done

truly. I

j

Especially with the

it.

Modus Energicus

(see Less. 15):

ejJLutoS I shall certainly strike thee.

Also in an Oath:

3

often used before the Predicate of a

is

which begins with

sentence, It

life.

by thy

dj*ju

often

is

^

(see

Nominal

below 3e).

used to introduce the apodosis of a

sentence beginning with ^J (see Less. 47,

5).

Separate Adverbial particles. 3.

The most important

a)

and KM yj[

separate particles are: to

(related

1,31,

see Less. 46,

2b)

1

"in that case, then' let

y\

b)

sentence

(for

e.g.:

us go then.

and

1

"not"

3)

in

an

Interrogative

:

US


So pi o)

jt

^

*t

do

shall I not

for 1

it?

and.jj.

"or" in a double question:

f

d)

,

,

do

xUsii shall I

U

(for

and

it

or not?

"not"

in

thou not done

it?

f

U)

an Interrogative

sentence: U! hast

ajdtii

e)

.j|

Jj?

"truly, certainly" (see Less.

following in

by

17, 5).

Nominal sentences, the subject the Accus the Predicate often strengthened

introduces

A (see above 2

,

c)

following in the Nom.,

e.g.:

Forty-fifth Lesson.

307

fc

,


^

5

ol

used

may be

It

verily,

with

pronoun then being a

and

^ilf verily

I,

Zaid

is

intelligent.

I

ill

Pronominal

subject,

and

Ujrt

e.g. *J{

suffixes,

the

verily he,

J,t

verily we.

and U) is always at the beginning .t f) Ujt (for of a sentence and limits the word or clause at the end of it by its meaning "only", e.g.: sfjtitt

y

g)

^l

h)

olSJ^llT Ult the alms are for the poor only. "i.e.,

that is"

(=

,yj).

"where?"

^. "whence?"

^.Tf

"whither?" ^Tt l[

ULi i)

j)

"wherever".

Jo "but rather, no on the contrary, but".

jj "yes

k)

^

certainly" as answer to negative sentences.

"there"

before the Perfect expresses the completion I) JKJ> or certainty of the action and can sometimes be translated "already", but is often to be left untranslated.

With the Imperfect m)

_bJii

it

means "sometimes".

"only" always placed after the word

it

modifies. n) Jai "never", follows a verb in the Perfect with a negative, e.g.:

Jai

iOJ^

u

I

have never seen him. 20*

Second Part.

808

"not at

0) "$S

p)

As

1)

by no means".

all,

"not, no".

*$

particle of Denial

i

LSf 2)

As

I

do

y) before the Imperf.

Future meaning:

Indie, with Present or

not

it

(J&!

(or I shall

particle of Prohibition

not do

(Jtt

it).

^) followed

by

the Jussive with the meaning of the" Imperative:

do 3)

As

not.

it

particle of

ty

(j-

not (no)" It is followed a noun in the Accus. without nunation: "there

(see Less. 42, 2i)

by

Complete Denial

yu y

there

is

is

no escape

(at all).

q) .J "not" is used before the Jussive, which then has the meaning of the Past:

b j he did r)

not.

UJ followed by the Jussive means "not

s) ^J "not" (see Less. 14, 3 Note) the Subjunctive, which then has the Future:

iL2? t)

^

I shall

U "not"

is

followed

Note.

For

u) J^o

"when"

Q

not do

say)

is

it.

either Perfect or Imperfect

as particle of Denial see Less. 46, 2c) Note.

also used as a Conjunction.

v) p*i (rarely f*l)

you

by

yet".

followed by meaning of a

is

agreeable".

"yes" derived from

^

"(what

Forty-fifth Lesson.

w)

809

Jj> Particle of Interrogation (see Less. 2, 5).

jjdta

J^

haet thou done

In an indirect question ^y^^IsAJ?

^&

,3^*3-1

it

it.

denotes "whether",

me

tell

e.g.:

whether thou hast

expected me.

$&

(for jJ>

Up

x)

and ^) "not" in an

"here",

or in

Interrogative sentence.

a strengthened form uib>

(sometimes written U$P).

y)

and iiJU? "there" Nouns used as Adverbs.

nouns, the Accusative of which are used as Prepositions, are used as Adverbs and are then

Many

4.

Indeclinable ending always in u, e.g.:

U

o'

or

"not yet".

jJs^ "before". '

^^

^^

"whither".

"wherever".

"above".

1 "below".

cr "whence".

^

in the ex P ression

"nothing

else,

^*

only this".

5. Most nouns used as Adverbs are employed in the Accusative (see Less. 42, 2, c, e), e.g.: little".

U

^LJLs

"seldom"

"much, very". "often".

~*l3

^,^ IJRX

ik^

^ -

verv T

"inside".

"outside".

"together". "altogether". f "for ever" (with

!

neg. "never").

310

Second Part.

"by day".

i.L^j '-

"

^

^L^ "on the right hand".

"one day, once".

ol

' '

"on the

<(1

-'

Lxc "to-morrow".

uto

..,

*'.<".

.

^

L*jL

.--

,,,,

^LJ "by night (for

"

U

{

i "there

^^

how "'

("often", (later

4,

.

hand".

of Future

((sign

^

"always".

left

.pe^pV-). is

nothing

like")

"especially". G

noun

yrj> (from the

at that time", so also

^>

tl

O^i^

"time") in

j&*&- "then,

"at that time".

XXrJt "altogether".

one time

at

jo,

"alone"

I alone, aJos^

Note.

is

he alone,

e.g.

oJ

suffixes,

e.g.

etc.

^^-^

etc.,

and jjJ "perhaps"

!J

with

For some Verbs which are usually translated into

English by Adverbs as

jj:

used

at another time.

see Less. 30.

are often used with suffixes,

perhaps he, JkJ (rarely ^^al) perhaps

"would that" with

xX-J (rarely

suffixes &;oJ

^^1 whould that

I.

I.

would that

he,

Forty-fifth Lesson.

311

Exercise 85.

&* cr 34-

USli

L

?

V

1

^

t>

LolL

Lit

jc^J!

olLl?

U

Second Part.

312

t

Q^Diitt

liiLi

^f

,utttJf

^)0o

LLM fJ^[s

y\

oju

i*3i

v^OLfii

JJ^ f ^^^^

viJUl ul UiL

il^o

i^XJo

%^s-

Oo

f

1

L5->^*l5 ^-^j^

^?

jx 'uij^f

o^,

iii

Truly, he can both speak and write the Arabic language (he knows the Arabic language speaking and Permit me to see from time to time that writing). friend Sa'ld. You Jainila said: Art Sa'id? and he said Yes.

trusty slave, nay rather the true must have patience my friend.

thou trusting in that O hope that (Perhaps that) the journey will be pleasant to you, for the land of Egypt is a cheerful land especially I beseech thee by th in the winter season. head of thy father, that thou deliver me from this trouble and command thy men to carry me from this place whither you wish. He gave us permission to dwell, One party of us travelled wherever we might wish. northwards and a party of us travelled southwards. The prince said: Is she the How can that be? I

princess

Salma?

He

said:

Yes

prince.

Then

the prince turned pale (the paleness came upon SLc The best is that we return the face of the prince).

where we were. Bonaparte (o^Li^j) journeyed from Egypt secretly to his country in the latter days of the year 1799 A. D., then the Mamlukes and the people of Egypt prepared together to fight the French, and they were not able only to drive them out of it. to

Forty-sixth Lesson.

313

They two journeyed together to the pkce where he had Some of prepared for them what was necessary. the inhabitants of the village came to us and began to ask us "Whence?" and "Whither?" I alighted then from the back of my horse. I said to her: What do you think? Shall we show enmity and resist them, or not? And she said: No, we shall not resist them. And I said: What shall we do (is the deed)? Shall I hand over to them my weapons and myself, that they

take

may

me

captive,

and perhaps

kill

me?

Forty-sixth Lesson.

Conjunctions.

The Conjunctions

1.

are

either

Inseparable

of

Separate.

The Inseparable .

and

a)

b) s

are:

and ^J "and"

(called in

Arabic v_Lc <_L=>

"particle of union".

v_j,

two independent words or sentences, while

joins

5

which usually joins sentences only,

indicates

a

development in the narrative and may often be transIt is also generally used lated "and so" "and then". to join two sentences when there is a change of subject.

With a following verb

in the Subjunctive

o means

"so that". For see

2

o

as

with the Predicate of Nominal sentences with

f.

Por'O in ^13

means

U

the Apodosis of Conditional sentences see Less. 47, 5.

with a following Nominal sentence or a Suffix "for".

Second Part.

314

between two sentences, of which the second

^

a Nominal sentence often means sentence introduced by 3 tence of condition", e.g.: JS

Jsj;

>

viJb

also with

is

Such a

G, o > Gs called a iJJL> ^Ju> "sen-

is

) (

.,, GO- -,

o,

"while".

Zaid stood up, while he wept (Zaid stood

/

up weeping).

change of Subject: GO,, GO, - -

,

Zaid went away and 'Ainr f

remained

Amr

(while

remained).

The follows ,

^

is

usually dropped,

when

a Verbal sentence

:

Go, jo:

o ,

.

(^^*iij

zL> Zaid came,

while

he laughed

(laughing).

The waw

of Condition

$^\

is

sometimes used

Nominal sentence which has no

before a

Imperfect Go,

Participle or

:

,^Go, sL> Zaid came, and in his hand

yi

a sword (with a sword in his hand). For

as Preposition with Accue.

_5

with the Genitive see Less. 44, 3 A,

For c)

=

_j

j "so that"

with" see Less. 42, 2 e. 3.

(for the Prep, j see Less. 44, 3 A, 4)

with following Subjunctive: -

^ .,0-0

(3U!

demand

>

o *

v-Jdj-J

J,sL> he

the wealth

(to

came

demand

to

me

so that he

oE

With negatively:

same meaning are used ^.^

the^ !^

!

,

^LlXJ

might

the wealth),

"so that not".

& ,

jjj;

and

Forty-sixth Lesson.

315

3 with the Jussive (nearly always in the 3 rd Person)

demand:

expresses a

,_^Lj

him

let

write

I

With the particle sJ the (see Less. 14, 3).

loses its vowel:

The usual Separable Conjunctions

2.

are:

because" with following

"when, since, after, Verbal sentence.

a) ot

wJ&Jb

r

if" originally

"when,

b) 16!

of condition (see Less.

in

47);

used of time, but often indirect

questions

=

"whether".

and

31

mean

also

lot

"behold!", in which case the

always followed by a Verbal sentence, the latter by a Nominal sentence in which the Subject is either in the Nominative or takes (see Less. 44, 3 A, 1): former

is

^

o .

(^) ^ o

~

>

jo

,

'

.

y[

"if,

man camel

j

means "whenever" c)

behold, a

}

jo!

(see Less. 47).

whether" introduces Conditional sentences

or indirect Questions (see Less. 47).

= " verily if o 5 means"and if, even if, although". C7^J ?

Note. &

juo*c|

There oE lycl

is , o

LAX

'.

also a particle of Denial y[, e.g.: > os o 1

vi>uL

...t

I

have not seen anything of

her, that I despise.

d) 5] (for

is

^t

and

5C

i)

"and

has the following meanings: not"

"otherwise".

1)

"if not",

2)

"except, only" preceded by a negative.

called a

zJi^\ J!>

i.e.

if

i.e.

(This

^

"particle of exception"), e.g.:

Second Part.

316

2? ^1 e)

lt\

*K (for

f)

'

-

no god except God

(Allah).

C) only in:

)

"either

\

or".

ui |

with a following Nominative, the

"as for"

Ui

is

and

^1

H

^ ufc

$ there

Predicate being always strengthened with a o, e.g.: C, *>OS-o > * ^ *9 - SS 1*1 as f<> r Mt. Hennon, .\*l& j^s- _^s g^-55 *>

J^

a

it is

lofty

(jj^kJf

him on

mountain.

j

ajL^* vsJbJ!

the road.

U

as for the dog,

I

met

(According to Arabian grammarians

vlsij? is the Subject, all the rest is Predicate.) f "that" with following Verbal sentence, the g) verb being rarely in the Perf., nearly always in the Imperf. Subjunctive (cf. Less. ,17, 6 a).

^=

^

"as though";

With Negative: 31 "so that not".

(for

h) ^5 "that" with a being in the Indicative.

With 'JJ!

suffixes:

"because".

^T

and

^) "that not"; 5ii

Nominal sentence, a

21 "that

he",

^f or

j.1

later

verb

"that I",

or Qf "that- we" etc.

In

Note

1]?

the suffix

is

often JULi? '^Jo

(cf.

Less. 43, 5,

2).

In compounds: ?.

"just as

if",

"it is

as

if".

Forty-sixth Lesson.

^ ^,

Q*

"except that, yet",

U

"or"; jf

3!

i)

"because".

A

^1

With

the

817

"either

Subjunctive

^

or"

(see

means

above

"unless

e).

that,

until that".

Ulo

j)

(more rarely

JLs

1)

&s> "until"

(

~J

(= o?

^1);

by

^.

with a Nominal sentence

J.

^

m)

"while",

"then, thereupon" often followed

k)

often

iJLo)

or

J^jG

"in

order

with

that"

folio whig

Subjunctive.

With Negative n) Jj\J

and

*f

and il*J "hi order that

not".

^& "but", the former being followed by a

verb or noun in the Nominative, the latter only by nouns in the Accusative or Pronominal suffixes: *I*J "but he",

^yld o)

or

"but

^JXJ

LJ "when,

translated usually p) _jJ "if"

I",

llki or lk! "but we".

after"

by the

with following Perfect to be Pluperfect.

in Conditional sentences referring to a (see Less. 47).

mere supposition

with the meaning "would ^f JJ often nouns and pronominal suffixes:

^=

''although".

With Negative: q) is

U

that!" before

UJJ; $Jj;

"so long as" (kj*j JJT

often used in

py'"if

not",

U "the U of

compound Conjunctions:

continuance"),

Second Part.

318

U jJu

"after".

Ulu and

UAJ>

"while".

U

,jJi

"before" (always with the Imperf.).

It is

often used also to generalise, e.g.:

U3I

I

U

"whenever".

^yl*'

UJ[

"whenever".

Lilf "as often as".

"if ever". )

In these cases it is followed by the Perf. or the Juss. in the sense of the Present. r)

s)

jo

"when",

JCL* or

t\x>

Lo

-*x

"whenever".

"since".

Exercise 87.

LJLs &I

o

cr

-,,o

,c

!

A-JLc

*J

j^, J3

'ui!!

A]

to

l^JLij JJJ

JeL

319

Forty-sixth Lesson.

UJI

11

4*

Lattt

j,

iLir oliUf

^Lj

J^c

joiii

liiit

1

iJoLt

JsiJl

"

*5

J

Ub ,

to

^

il ^y9

!jj>

*I

bi

.

!

Second Part.

320 j

o ^

*.

-

U

o jo.S Igti^j ^f *JUi Ojiils ~

sXjLA2t

.

~

ii\J3

,3

j,

e

.Jot

*i)uJ!

I.

L^JU

(UI ^toLaJl

aJ

6ls

^

'*&? "^ Us

JO JU? ^J

uudt

LJ

l

j

^J lots

Exercise 88.

As

she went out of the hall into the inner court, and behold by the side of the door of the No one sees him without being hall a large door. for Jamlla,

Forty-seventh Lesson.

attracted

to

love).

As

him

he

(except, an'd for Sa'ld, he was

321

is

attached by his at the prince,

amazed

because he had not seen during his life a man like And when the prince had determined to jourhim. ney to Egypt, he called his two sons to accompany And while they were so engaged (were in that), him. there was a knock at the door (the door was knocked) I have not seen any good and behold the servant.

And the in my coining that (o) I should return. two, and those who were with them continued travelling, until they came to the pool of the Ezbekiya, and behold a park, which a canal encircled. And it was, when he rode his steed, as though he and the saddle were one piece. While I was examining one of the After books, I lighted upon the following sentence. had

went

chamber. I had not heard the sound of the firing of a gun, and I prepared to defend myself as soon as I should see the first person of them, because it seemed to me that there was no deliverance possible (that there was not of anything which was all

finished

I

left,

my

speech,

possible to us in the

to

when

way

my

(until) I

of deliverance) except that.

do not permit that, so long as thou hast not said to me what thy name is. Before I finished my Inform ine when thou hast speech, I saw my friend. returned hither. Then I commanded Hasan to bring me large stones that we might build for us a fortress safe from the weapons of the enemies. Joy came upon me until from the excess of what rejoiced me, it I

made me weep.

__

Forty-seventh Lesson.

Conditional Sentences. Conditional sentences consist of a Protasis or seno

&

.

tence containing the condition (Jb-i) or

main sentence Arabic Grammar.

(?ff>>

o - , or (jl^s-

=

and an Apodosis "answer"). 21

Second Part.

822 2.

The

(J/Jjf

Protasis

v_3j5>)

o

[

is

or

possible or likely;

introduced by the Conjunction the condition

if

fcM

if it is

by

is

regarded as

purely hypothetical or

impossible. 3. In both parts of the Conditional sentence the perfect or the Jussive may be used in the sense of the English Present or Future.

There are thus four possible cases: a) The perfect is used in both parts , - ,

i

SJM

o , ,

O

o,

,

vi>^o Jo^

:

o

, ,

v_*03

o

Zaid goes

if

I shall

go

with him. b) The Jussive in the Apodosis:

c) The Perfect in the Apodosis:

d)

The

Jussive

Note. After scarcely ever used. is

!3[

is

is

used in the Protasis, the Perfect

used in the Protasis, the Jussive

is

used in both parts

in

a Conditional

With

sense

:

the

Jussive

is

"*i

_jJ the Perfect (rarely Imperf. Indie.)

used in both parts. 4. If

press the Perfect

the verb in a Conditional sentence

meaning of the

Past,

and be preceded by

^

^JiyLf ^JS committed a crime.

jjJjf

it

is to

must be put

in

exthe

'^jf\

js^

excuse (me),

if I

have

The Perfect is used after Jj in the sense of the English Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive or Potential.

may

When it has the meaning of the Pluperfect be placed before it:

*]?

Forty-seventh Lesson.

823

*Li _P

wished, He would have ran 11, 120.) 5. If bis

thy Lord had

if

made men one

the Protasis begins with

o

,

(Ko-

people.

then the Apodo-

must be introduced by <*J. a) If it is a Nominal sentence: *1

matter

y5' is

4\*\

tfjji

his

he

do as he

to

(i.e.

if

ul

wishes that, then the likes).

a Verbal sentence expressing a Wish, or Prohibition (the verb being in the Impe-

b) If it is

Command

rative or Jussive): *J

c)

JJb IJJ^ vl^l^ ^j if you see Zaid, tell him. If it is a Verbal sentence which begins with

one of the particles \J^,

iS

* *?

'*

*

(^^

Lo

oo,

*&

or

(not),

he

if

of his brothers has already stolen before

^J;

steals

one

'

him (Koran

12, 77).

Instead of

vis

the particles ot or

t3t

"behold" some-

times occur. If

the Protasis begins with

the Apodosis

_^J,

may

be introduced by 3:

^

U1^JT Ix^T

had wished

to

the purse in

LXJ

its

it 3

shall be killed.

3|J|

^J

if

he

would have taken

entirety.

Sometimes the Apodosis be supplied from the context: 6.

on your word,

y

j^fe.

be treacherous, he

^i

e

omitted and

is

Ui>J

(good); otherwise I

if

must

you go back

command

that you

Second Part.

324

7.

"If not"

If

a

is

_^J

is

expressed by

p

,

^

Nominal sentence follows

also used with the

^J,

meaning

or

i^3

one can use

only" to ex-

"if

press a wish.

A

8.

words

sentence introduced by any of the following treated as a Protasis:

is

o-

(

**

^

^

o

"he who, anyone".

if

'-j

'^^

j

"which;

if

any

'-

^

)

,

U-f 1

"what, thing"

v "when

n

^ ^ ^

"whoever". if

"wherever"

U** "whatever"

1 '

/..

(

any-

^fj

^'everyone who".

U

.

|"

when-

I

ever".

"where".

wherever p..

ULf "whenever".

if

where".

when

"however".

In both parts of such sentences the Perfect or the Jussive is used in the sense of the English Present or Future: it

3li

has a general sense.

3L>

(j*

^ anyone

seeks,

Note. Sometimes an Imperative

he attains is

(will attain).

used in a Conditional

sense as a Protasis:

IXLo rv^J

(JL&

live

(ji**

contented

tbou livest con-

(if

tented), thou wilt be a king.

Exercise 89.

'^ 3& J^

'^J

]

CJ*

Forty-seventh Lesson. .

.

825

.

cr

.

O

*U

U

J

J

=

ill-

826

Second Part.

o]

"

cr

lib

Js

<J

t

3 (good)

j

Lfc,li

^^

cr

i]

Exercise 90.

honour thee greatly and If a man passes men. by you, tell me, and God will requite you with good. I said to (in) myself: If God makes easy for me a way to escape, it is well and if not, the matter is his and He will do what He pleases. When the light of the morning had dawned, my spirit was refreshed, If I had although I had despaired of deliverance. known that I should happen to meet thee in this place, I would have experded all my energy in receiving thee. If the matter is so, I will

make

thee chief over

my

all

;

thou fulfillest my need, I shall be indebted to thee such a pleasure, that the kings of the earth could not pay the weight of a grain of it; and if you reIf I ject my request, then thrust me into this sea. demand thee (fern.) from thy father now, there is no If

for

Forty-eighth Lesson.

327

will send me back disappointed. When age thwarts us, then there is nothing for us but

doubt that he (the)

to

take

refuge in (the) fair patience and

When

God.

she shows rebellion,

to rely on stub-

he shows

bornness.

Forty-eighth Lesson. > ,

OEO.O,

>

i

.o

(o-^b cr^

>

u

Interjections,

The Vocative

1.

is

Fern, l^ui (but the Masc.

Fem.)_or

the particles b

expressed by is

often used for the

b.

ijjt

,i,Z

-i.e.

,

and l^j| b are followed by the noun in the Nominative with the Article: i$j|

Jo-jGjI l>\ b Less. 42, 1

scholar!

Less. 16,

(see.

4 and

c).

by the noun in the Nominative without Article (and without Nunation in the Sing.) if the perspnaddressed is .present and tne~ noun is not b

followed

is

determined^ by any following words,

jjj

but

S$

b'

b

boy!

O

j^t^

e.g.

b

Mohammed!

boys!

is absent or the noun is or words after it, then 'thjT determined by some word noun is put in the Accusative, e.g.

If the person addressed

:

b

O

ticular person).

careless! (not addressed to

any one

par-

Second Part.

328

ujJLa G

jJ^I

I jJI f

Note

1.

sometimes

is

[>

word begins with

following

->b

climbest the mountain!

Abdallah!

C

!

who

thou,

my

without

written

alif, e.g.

when the

alif,

:

^y>

brother!.

welcome!

Notice specially:

ciot

^

O my

'rf

Note

2.

s!-^-

ending

Note 2.

t^

For

Some 1,

father!

Lord!

The noun (see

3.

1,1,

\

my

[>.

s-et

(see.

Less. 43, 4 Note

that follows

below on

by i

of the

commonest

*\

JuJ\

\2

T,

1,

or sLiLl

1^

O

has the ending

sorrow!

suffixes:

iLj

Alas for

O o-

Go-

^u.

*x>

with suffixes) as Interjections,

Woe The form

tothee.

jjj

JL'

e.g.

See there!

tJli See there he is!

theel O

and

o-

AJ

:

Woe

^LI with the Vocative ending

be used. IP

often

grief!

Alas! also with

(also

4 Note).

\$ Ah!

Notice also the Substantives

used

A

Interjections are:

in pause, e.g.

lL*c>

^

often takes the Vocative

see Less. 44, 3

Oh! The following noun

oder

1).

!^).

L followed

T,

'rf

O mother!

li

to Zaid.

may

also

Forty-eighth Lesson.

LP Come! with

the Preposition

ol^lp Far from Jf,

it

329

o: Come,

let

us go!

I

Fie!

vJI

-o and ^o ;so Bravo! c c* o' u

(Fern, of the Elative vlujLI

or also

j

^1

j^

!^>

(Zx^

\i&

Hail to thee!

and

best") Hail!

in the Plural J^jt "Hither!"

olP (properly the Imper. IV. of

\

"to come")

"give, bring here!" also used in the Fern.

^Jjj and Less. 44,

4U and 3.

(jCJuo

"Beware!"

(from

Perf.

Jj.j

see

4).

Jjlit

"Beware!"

Certain nouns are

Interjections

(cf.

(see Less. 42, 2).

used in the Accusative a$

Less. 42, 2 l,~Note).

Welcome! Strange!

Slowly!

Welcome!

^ Welcome -

^

((lit. (

service

iJ Us Alas 4.

Many

to thee!

"Hearing and obeying".) At your i

for thee!

religious

expressions are

used

interjec-

tionally,- e.g.:

aUt or

JSr LJ

S

or very iffi.

5B?^'

Commonly

By God

!

^1

God!

Second Part.

Thanks

God

If

God!

to

will!

name

In the

of

God

the

Compassionate, the Merciful!

God

or

Jit

forbid!

(lit.

"I take

refuge in God").

There

no might and no

is

power, save in God the Mighty (Expression of astonishment and alarm.) !

What God

if

iiilt

I f

will

!

(Astonish-

ask P ardon of God! (Used

to decline a compliment.) Praises constantly appended to the name of God: |

Praised be He! Exercise 91.

UL>

(Proverb)

viJLai

'ul

Lo

L

Forty-eighth Lesson.

U

^

,5

Ul U oL?

(3

UJ(c

via/

oJ

^J

ef

L

-d- Jo

jT j^Ji

U

^J

Us)

Jif

LI

o

K>J>

fl

idU

381

^eaJ

u

Li

jJu

Second Part.

332

Exercise 92.

Arabs, and follow (Jll) in the track of bold man. Come, let us take a walk in the

Hither, this

Ah, my God, what is this strange chance garden which has united ine with my friend in this raging sea ? Woe, truly misfortunes come upon me and strike me; Ah, why dost thou threaten us, O sea? O would that I had been slain among the Arabs! Praised be the Exalted, the Mighty who has protected us from dangers and guarded us from troubles and brought us back to Beirut safe from harm (Plur.). Ah, O my precious, who has brought thee to this Alas for his (to him from) disturbing dream place? !

!

Forty-ninth Lesson

^

tT^

Arabic Verse.

o^

Prose

1.

Oo is

Poetry

called

(see Intro.

Arabic

j&

("scattering"), O o-

pu

^) o^ An Open syllable (

in

("ordering").

Arabic Poetry

2.

Metre

is

-

or

13,

(J^

Rhymed has both

Prose

is

^s^.

Rhyme

(ilils)

and

the latter being quantitative.

1).

is

short, a

closed syllable long

Forty-ninth Lesson.

The Pronominal

Note. Lit

may be 3.

suffix v

333

and the second

syllable in

either long or short.

Every Verse or Line O

(o^

O

o -

Plur. olL?) consists

- o

of two Half-verses (J&* or

At the end of the Verse i.e. in Pause is dropped and sometimes the vowel

Nunation

(>_aij)

is

the

omitted

altogether.

In long poems the the poem.

half-verse

firet

must end

in the

rhyme of

Sometimes in poems in Rajaz metre (see below 5, b) is no common rhyme, but the first half of each

there

verse rhymes with the second. 4. The number of Feet in use indicated by means of the letters forms of the verb):

is

o

eight.

? 6

are in the

They '(as

b)

c)

d)

e)

b

f)

%***

-^

- -

g)

h)

These Feet are subject a)

b)

L,3jj

-

-

to certain changes, e.g.:

becomes

4jje

-

-

~

Second Part.

~

_ becomes

g) M

If Catalexis

(rejection

,

(rare)

of the last syllable) occurs

at the .end of a verse, then w _ _ is changed to w _; _ _ to These are also subject to the etc.

changes given above.

A or

verse

is

formed by repetition of the same foot

by a combination of several feet. 5. The sixteen Arabic Metres are:

335

Forty-ninth Lesson.

a)

"'"

J

usually with Catalexis _^*s also in the first half- verse:

in

the second,

sometimes

"How many an

evil hast thou warded off, and a dominion hast thou protected so that it

how many became b)

firm."

j>^t

being called

(especially in didactic

sj

"Said Muhammad ibn Malik: God, the best Ruler." In

^

^.

w

poems; such a poem

I

praise

my

Lord

(Beginning of the Alftya of Ibn Malik.) metre Catalexis of the last foot (change

this

_

to

^

rhyme common

-L

)

is

to the

very common.

whole poem, the

also has the Catalexis, e.g.:

If there first

is

no

half-verse

Second Part.

336

"Says he, who hopes in his forgiving Lord, Yaliya ibn Mu'ti Ibn 'Abd-unnur". (From Addurra al-Alftya by Yahya Ibn Abd al-Mu'ti az-Zawawi). c

***

"Poor d)

J^

is

I

the greedy

cr

man,

rich the contented."

(usually with Catalexis in both half- verses)

:

^S 'UojJt

to

"Thrust away the world, for it is of its customs humble the exalted and to exalt him who is low." e)

\j)\ (almost

e.g.:

always with Catalexis):

337

Forty-ninth Lesson.

is

"When thou surpasses! men musk were a part of the

as if f)

j-oixft

(also

whom thou art, it blood of the gazelle."

of

with Catalexis of the second half-

verse):

e.g.:

o-o. 0-*J

my

jj

- G

o

V^S

pi

"My

heart

soul

is

knowest

it

tells

me

that thou art

my

destroyer; it or

whether thou knowest

thy ransom,

not." (

Umar Ibn

al-Fari4.)

g)

At the end of the

first

half-verse

the

^

usually changed to ^ic.^. Catalexis

may

occur at the end of the second

half-verse.

JJ Us

"Stay (both of you), let us weep over the memory of a beloved one and a place at the edge of the sandhill between ad-Dakhfll and Hauraal." (Imru'ulqais.) Arabic Grammar.

22

Second Part.

388

h)

4j"*fi

(sometimes with Catalexis of the second

half- verse):

^j

e.g.:

t

"The soul said to ine: death has come to thee, and thou abidest in the house of rebellion; provide thyself with piety; and I said: cease, provision is not taken to the house of the Generous." (Aba Nuwas.) i)

Jb

^t (often with Catalexis at the end of the

second half-verse):

e.g.:

"Night and the horses and the desert know me, sword and the guest and paper and the pen."

also the

(al-Mutanabbl.)

Forty-ninth Lesson.

839

a> e.g.: .

-a

i E

&

m

"Imagine not that tbou in the future wilt he for the hen has feathers but it does

poetry as we; not fly."

(Ibn ad-Dahhan.)

k)

As a

rule the oS|^*a/>

at the

becomes oiUax, and the

end of each half- verse becomes

X-^JU?

^

"The furthest distance of the fair maid is the miserliness (of her affection), which consists of a distance such as no camel can undertake to travel." (al-Mutanabbl.)

Second Part.

340

"And when passion pervades the heart of a lover then every eye has a proof of it." (al-Mutanabbl.) "

m)

.

u

JJic ^Si

"The youth has intelligence wherewith to live, so far as his foot guides his leg."

The

other three metres

;k=JI,

^ioo^I

and

are not used by the older poets. Exercise 93.

Examples >

,

- jt/t

O.

1

Se

Leas. 30,

5.

of the

more usual Metres.

in

Forty-ninth Lesson.

_.**

1.

O,

-a

cr

^l

AJSJX

L#

used parenthetically "stranRe!"

Uaed as a

triptote

by poetic

license.

341

342

Second Part.

il

*

l

U

r^ir 345

u

See Lees.

7,

2.

u

Forty-ninth Lesson.

(Riddle.)

(Solution:

.s?

f

fix

Exercise

U

94 .

iuL

1

^ A

o

collection of four letters.

See Less. 44, 3 A,

1.

Note.

344

Second Part.

ol

urff oi

lb*t

.;jyT

c

i

345

Supplement, Selections.

From the Koran.

Sura

1.

l!|

X. ft

Sara 112. -O.

.XL

,J

ft

0*

j^Ji

>,

jftl

ft

O

Jc^! &\ .

Z

J>

J

Sura 113.

^

U

^^

ft

131

846

Supplement.

Sura 114.

,5

Fables.

(from

oo

1>J!

kr

jCJLc

1

S!

JliJl

_

U


ju

>

_

joti

til

U

Jo xli

;3U

I^JlSi

347

Supplement.

to

UlaS

xllij

j

idlftJi

sA# U**J

to' 3 3jJj|

U,

:

i

U

It>i

J

>

i-

A>b

to

LU.U

*JJi'

V '*\

- -oft

sLxAJt

J^JJl

vJjo;

*

to

*J

^'Je

sti'

.-& Joai "j J^^l

U?

348

Supplement.

O K u $% Utj ^3l Ss

iuii

^

ia)d>

Ojl

e^j U-o

wJjJl JjJ

JILJI

I

b jJ'JS.vxi

v^J% jl^

to

oU>

tiUUijJ

I&Jf IvXP (iCl^

'

UiJl ,

to

| l^J

(yUUI j

UP

>

U

J

oJUe /JJ jS

JJii

(From

See Leas. 30,

5.

xj'

iJLJ

f).

349

Supplement.

jiaiu

(

lii

dUo

^I^

^ftxiuto

,jU

d)J

U

xx.lJs.Jl

350

Supplement.

Us

f

Jo

oU

> Jo^S

^15

jSx

iJI,

^UC>

jjU

to li

JJuJJ J-J5 Lu^Lc,

i

All^

^jJ!

)

to

*J

U LJ 6U

s

cr%

Jo ^

i

351

Supplement.

LJLs

Q

o^Jt

^5? J^> g^l J^to iUS v^L,

J^i J]

^

ww

L^J

,^JL>Jo o^xf

oUIl

(From uA*lMl vJukLS by Madame Rosa Sahib.)

^^*

&^o 5

*Jj^

^jo

Lo

LC^J

tf

3

^o^.Ji

,5

U

*

O

l

iul

X*

t^lS

LLi J^sJL

J^JL. v^i^Ji u-Ji^ xtf

1^1

^UDj!

LtiJlil

352

Supplement.

U

jls

xotill

iols

s

J

U.

C)

lkJiJ!

^5 JJI K

c>! J

udL-,

'JiJLLx

!A5>! oJL-,1

u

jfc

^

xS

lo lif

J

li

gjJkJJ

cr

J>

i

-Hs

e

cr

o

e

t p>?-jJl

ttbo,

iL

^Jy-

<:

^w

>

^

*J

cr

J^l

*J

I^US O

t

353

Supplement.

oJi UiJUax

iJsj>|

v^i*j

Ic

lil

U

UaufiJl

to

^jXJl

LfLo^J

^

Description of Kairo.

(From

y^l

x2x

J

^

lju

KxiSy^ ^^ax^ by

y^

gvJbs?.

Q !JOJ

Oyu gJL>

J.J jj/UiJl

g/>L5J|

^,|yi

Jou

O

Arabic Grammar.

354

Supplement.

O ux

^

j^

Jo

U e; U

ji

I

Ojtf ^jLi

W/

j^Jt

u

VjLi

L

^ JOI

x

cr

1

See Tntro.

17.

355

Supplement.

U

;

v3>s?. '

LgJ

Ju

x

it

isjiJ{

Jii

cr

lax>o

U J

sjJLJt io-i-

U3I

u^^wo ASj

L^o-i

3

'L

356

Supplement.

eUJ J^j.

oic

,jcJ!

,3

lo

LgxuJLS

xJlt

^oK

U.

8j0LfiJf

&*5-SJl

LLJUJ|

/L,

Ui'L

JOLc

i

Jjih***git

iiiuoLs*.

A-w^jJwa

u^>LxJ!

us

Bj5>'lftjS

4*

J

^Lu JOLc

sLo JJis

^ -

Jv*j

$5 L^LyOo

^^^ 'L^/^J !y!c

^

^

4^

!

5

JUJI

^[p- U^au

357

Supplement.

From

uX

the

Romance

idLJJi

jJl jLa

UC

*Ju

UJ! j,l

JyjJl ^Las

Uo! UJ^I swca9

,5

UL,

oUc^S!

L

liJUc

858

Supplement. iudS

<J

Ujl5

gjo

iwUJj

iLytoU!

^

Ouu3 Xs^jctt

*JL4^- -j

goo Jo,

t

UL

^Jlbi UJL.

x^ O

e.

O

^

t

Ltt

V-Jj^aJ!

iuyuo

i3Uwe iuUXit

^

li^ UJLso

^x

liJoo

^

o!>

8 J^>

,5

J,t

.ot.Liv:^;

x3 U

l^Jis

i

lilxxi-t

j-y-Ji

8jJb ^-

JJJ

liJJsJ>3

J;> J^t

X*

J.

o^!

U^rS

jA**it

ri^J!

,JNJ>

3

^ &\

i^jU! o,

,5

tf

c^a^

U LJU^J

jJLT LinL^-l

JJJI r

^La

-Ato J

lJ^JI

^

JO Jo

f

Q, BL^St

dJLj

jytfl

liUJUIt

aJu^lS

1X

Jc^

Uc

359

Supplement.

j xJu~3

j, fcyCaJf

o/3 UT

LJUcl

UJ J*>

,5

^J

d)JJ tO

^

^.AJIJ

SOo.

^=s

xo

l^o

t

oUT

so^Jl

\^i- Uxj

*

005 ^Ui J,!

jjrX^Jl

Cyo^t>

U^^ls ULa

13^^

S

8p

U tf

xi^

xV

J

cr

J|

coJis

oU

J^-J! J^,!

^ M'^ '4^

'wu^uj, UCc il

^

LJ^3 Juu

c>

Lpls

x

o CT i^

^.Ju-

4 L^jL,

LgaLq

^i

J.I

360

Supplement.

Jo

aul^

v>J>

bUJ! ULo

liJv>

J^ ^ J,!

j

JU ULT, JwiUs

A)

O^u

iOx

Mj'ub

oyllL. lots

oto.fi

j^XJt

UJb

xx-o

J,l

^w

v-^JSi5

*3u*J!

JJis

Jo

a^Ljj

vii^'uos ^3 J

^ o

Li*c

.ijXiu

(J*

*5

^iSJ

*y>!

^

r

bf JC

-

U L^JLc

^ (

361

Supplement.

,5

.IsJl

wlaj

Up^as

U*4i

u,

r

b

&u,

,iXJi

'JJ

,*i

A^O

^JMWO

L<XI

o^Jt

JS

,j

^

Xxlfclt

^sC

LU*^

jd*\

LuJJij

wXJJj

u* l

^5^;

Lo'uS

Ui^.

iuJ5

_

x^5

JO,

^J

o!

wf

U

X.J.S

Supplement.

,i)J

j i

LULflj

LXi!

Ui yj

ijJl vJj

>r

I

J-aiJl

j^

U

UcJj

jjfj

UJL5

^ i4^>

Jb"

iJuias

J^-JI Lb

bXiJ ^L^ U

JO

Q

t

'u3u p-

O ls

eU3

U

^

Xa5 J L^iJ! UaLJj

vXp-I^S!

*Wt

Jyju Lxx4>>

Uil3

363

Supplement.

Extracts from Journals, 1.

From

the Egyptian journal \j&\. f

LUI

io

^ yk Kiui! iT

XJLiU

L^Jl^Xc

jo

u^^

LLJI

ii^>

^ ^L

xJi

o'uCu\i!!

!

LoUi

LoUi :

-^Jlill

LLJt

.iJb

L<.*^g

Lpy

Uo^ A? j

^iUaJ'

,5

JU^iAAJl

^^1

Jlji*

364

Supplement.

xjJsJLJ!

C 3 LJle

8yil5>

AJJL^I!

U

!

slOo X^jJ^JI gib Ut

tf

*

o

l

^

LoLb

Cur LH)

/>

U

j^?

X*aSU*U

^J

r

vX.

U l^xL^ ^^1

JwJ

J

l^Jt L

i^Jjili

oUIali

J^i'

Ul

P.

365

Supplement.

*1JI

ijjJ

if

jo*

jJb ft! Attf

>w-JU

JU j

_^IJ &

^LJ^ x^vXi^

A-JL*Ji

Bo'ju-J!

^10

^ A-JLLJUJi

fel^Ji

o

Supplement.

UJJ U

xLs?

cr

io'Lc

J,

jj'UaJl

Xs

L^,Lju-t

367

Supplement

*jUJ!

oL3j All jSU, J^Utt

cr u

cr

cr

LpJJj

^-

L^KU

U&13

cr i

^

JJo J

U c*lj

oLJLkJt

iL

368

Supplement.

2.

From the Syrian

journal 3L^t

O

Ui-o Co

tf

0^*0

O l^

xJLc

U

U^JLsolS t

Jo

^

j

Jo

.xixs.

iC^cuJJ

!^

JJ!

JLJ!

^ OJ5;

U ij^ ij

^o U=>!

xi!

369

Supplement.

iuo'iiii

j

yJUJI

*-Ji

U^I!

.3

^

*Ji*

*JLc

vs^'

^

Ki>

x!

AS,

-bLSjJJj

iUUJl

^JiJt

B!!

(iLJ!

xolkJUJ!

Arabic Grammar.

(jaJiJ!

VJ'JLS.

l

Us JJ

r.

iU^I a, Sj

O

^5

U

870

Supplement.

yi

it

&XAA

syu

*aU0|j

oU

iJjLLj so^U5

fetyitt

J,!jt

871

Supplement.

U x^S u, i

CT

l

sJoUJl

^

Js^>

L>t>t xJJ ii>-^J^ ^>

oLa-f^-J

^b

V

J ^1^ ^5^X5

&.J5

jj

See Lesa. 34,

4.

Ip

JNJ>

^5^

JJJ

372

Supplement.

^H

jS'waJ

Letters, Invitations.

*!jsAlI

^^L-JI iCcLJi

r

oUJ!

CT

^

XcUaJli

ii

J |jJb

373

Supplement.

Js >iLol

!

^

iJoLc

vc

>J

Private letters.

L,

Lo

374

Supplement.

yCi

&UJ|

O

i

(TJ-^ xU^XJ! dU ,.000 Lo!

^'u^x

fJ*ST

w*

Business letters.

3!>J!

r

b|

r

Luis L^|

jj>

875

Supplement.

xLjij *x* u, vj|^>

SJ^UU!

vJuoJ

J^o

US'

Ifil3

f&4

UJ Ojj

fc

o>Lo

ULi Ut

iJu*

jo

XOJ

j,t

yac. ,

cr

I^L-jS

to!

!

ci

U

yu.Jt

j

sicljli

-j<

or

"^

o^. u

e.

cr

Pt

!

376

Supplement.

^y^U! ,Xjl_xXj

LxSy^io Lo!

^'I

o>j*J *!jxs^l!

J03

lJ

u-o>-L,

goLJl

L

xOu

v

fc

U

U

r^^ Uu

L^J?

j,^

I

ut

J^

o

5

v3Lb!

J

U

Receipts, Leases etc.

^

L,

377

Supplement. XJl

Mv

tJ^

Ki~

B^LJI olSjf

xTt

^

o yCi

8,^13

IT

r..

-XS^LS

*I

c^

tf

^Jya

it

^

o^Jls-

jtll

If.,

Jl

-tf. "$

Jaiis

J*j!>

ii

378

Supplement. 'AsLaaA

Q U*i[s

^Otf

y+1 x

vil

'^J

j&S*

.

.

.

&Lw

.

ail

.

JdJl

JJLJt

^l,! l

KUi

,**

ft]

_^P

(

^

IAT

*J'

it KJuuxit

fe j^> vj wel^l ^ XJUxUt o

379

Supplement.

,4)JU

-

Jl

9

_->

iLo^UJl

iU

^1

380

Supplement.

*-J!

(iJJ iuU

8

1JJ>

J^

Jail

-

Ui/

31

^!

381

Vocabulary words (arranged according

of

to

Exercises and Selections

in

the

in

roots)

Part

II.

NB. The vowels in brackets after a verb indicate of the verbal noon. n. pr, 2nd radical in the Imperf. vn. proper name.

=

^

particle of interrogation.

1

IV. to

0-o

-E

.

=

and

s.s*t

tJot (with negative) never. o-

8jj

hire

plur. j>[ needle.

;L>] reward,

price,

s

^x>!

hireling.

o ,s

10

>

,

o

o-o

X. to hire

let

0^

Ibrahim, f*S>jj| '

Abraham.

OE

Jo-1 period, death

Jo-^

9

Jo j camel

for (coll.).

60

e.

daughter,

sake

for the sake of.

girl

^X>|

fern.

os v-)!

2 (jj|) father

f

fool of

-(jr^i

ULJ sunday.

fatherly.

n. pr. of the court-

Hamn

(with (u) to take, get HI. imperf.) to begin to VIII. to take for to blame

Arrashld.

-E

6

to refuse. Jji (a)

to

come

o

bring

!

,Jc>U

to

move

^i

0-^

plur.

o plur.jli'l

6--antiquities

notable matter.

V. to be late

f>\

fern.

V. to be 0,

influenced

ruins,

conception.

following. '=>]

II.

E

o

*X>I taking

O

with CJ to

--

yi

vn.

oneself

-s (i)

one

-s

)&

j

Jt

that

of),

o

J*>1

S-o KAJ

JJ son

(the

o

iJji'U

jS>\

and j*s>\

c

other

z last,

end

to the last

man.

382

Vocabulary.

S-o o

wO

and

hare.

I

s ->

<,""

o>->t

brother

6 .02

G

plur. s>=>l

lion.

plar.

plar.

sister.

O-E

_

o! II. to

o

captivity

war.

trained,

S -

cultured

be

to

(a)

of

^0!

all,

of ^-y! prisoner

entirely

-s.

^^

training

jo*!

V-JOi

discipline

V.

afflicted

good

^

9

vex

to

training.

oneself

V O? H. and IV. to transmit, Alexandria.

carry out, accomplish. since j when,

(conj.)

&J

3]

'at that time.

o

,

(^|

behold!

when,

if-

the

o ,

permit (with UJ)

-

X. to ask

announce G

permission

- O0l

&

stall.

to

6

,*

Jwot X. to root out

&

J-

o

oo| permission

origin

ear.

IV.

(a

o

IV. -

to

(see

Ismailia

quarter of Cairo).

then. .ol to

os

9Uwt name,

plar.

_ Xo5

altogether.

horizon. injure

sir

(a58vn|0

damage.

my

master. October.

^-

,1

n. to date.

V OC

.. JJ'f ,

II. to

assure

o^l^t earth, land.

assured. -,E

,

.Vj

V. to be

^jfr

plur. (a) to

be sleepless

vn.

J* J (n) to eat

GOB vn. J*l

food.

G,o u^jA^I oc arnants, albanians.

clerus -

Of the definite article.

^t, J^U

Vocabulary.

fern.

plur.

)*! yesterday.

who, which.

to

to

II.

t

AJ| (a) to

become accustomed

-

to edit

II.

V. to con-

hope G ,E

aider

JwJ

III. to

r,

^^.

^U T

plur.

hope.

c

be

Jj]

with G >i.

familiar

G.~

rf

plur. Obit and O^Jt thousand

be safe

to

(a)

believe (in v-J)

IV. to

VIII. to rely

book.

on

^U

!

a

German

J.U German I

,-2

-

true,

God, Allah. c

O

-

^X| to

unto jl

an

S

as

U>!

Q*^

a reliable

5 E

until.

i|

and

that.

Q!

alternative). -

mother

pr.)

person.

jt

(in

(n.

,

>

or

Emin

believer

SI

ij a god

yyt

deposit

reliability,

2 -oS

Loll! Germany.

l{ at

iolot

safety

O

O r oZ

l!

Q^t

pain.

I*-!

,|if-^]ifnot,else-^|-i

-s

|U! before

(prep.).

only

o

!

^] except

that.

LJJ

only.

for.

truly, verily

.]

emperor. to j*l (u)

command,

(with accus.

of the person and

i_J

OoE thing)

jA

\

,

plur.

9

command; G

-

of the

plur.

y

,% !^

Emir,

>o! fern, cio! thon

jA^J Prince of the

yon .

G

>i*

y>Lc

an

imperial ^_5jjyt official.

(dual)

^t

you

rJ! in. to be friendly G E amiability

G

(j***-^

. o

G

, o

woman.

^f amiable

"

...L*oj plur. fjJj

G^

(plur.).

Got

E

S

faithful

L4Jui

o>oc

.^x! matter

Prince

-oS

oE

5

>

E y>l

-to*i< JAnatolia,Asia Minor,

"

man

884

Vocabulary.

j*bo] English English

(coll.)

- (j;j^J

c>!

(adj.).

V. to be slow

5'

^5* that iB >

(Jot

to strengthen.

II.

i)

Suj plur.

*

""

JU4 and V.

^I3

{

vessel.

where

equip oneself

to

-

fem '^ -

5

<

with 8 8n -) what

o.o^ equipment. Ji^l *

H.

to

greet

-

^

^

^

jil

plur.

Jlit family.population^orthy

-

welcome

t

UJ* with,

ability, worthiness.

through,

without Ijlj

Europe. C

XSjl

0*S instrument, machine

fem.

4s

'

first,

yesterday

^^ /.

Paris-

G^ to

Oj)

il)

the

beginning

day

first

to

come

VII. to break out.

(of time^

^ and

<ju

mis-

* (u) to decide.

1

t

(jig

before

- Juthe

(a) to

O

j-

a

be bad

fortune.

il

CM

well.

^

?

...1

,lj I

gjf para (a turkish com.).

jl n. pr. Aug-usta.

-

plur.

-

g8 e

I

G,^

rO

factory.

Ui since
!

pope.

60

-L

o

^b

in

si^i

ah

!

place of refuge.

plur.

seek (with G

^

l^

and

river (the Nile), s

^. steam

,

c.L

^

sea,

385

Vocabulary.

low

.

(in price).

^

JJR avarice =

OLflj'j

avaricious.

.

2

-

Jo

2

O

to

beginning,

Jo

it

must

jtjOj

Jo

cold

begin tJy^o elements

j j*

elementar.

(u) to

J

moon.

(

^

O o.

-

to

out.

about, be restless.

IV. to

lighten

iujo

of

0,0 in. to bless

Ki'-j

pond.

Sjo Berlin.

'

suit

of

^xj G

body.

n. pr.

o

J

space of time.

- o j

...LCwd garden.

J^} iLplj

Barmecide.

- o j

KS>

tJo to appear, seem good Go . 5 . Jo ^Jo Bedouin (coll.) (j:* (adj.)

,_

lightning.

clothes.

Bedouin

(u)

come

move

- - -

^o

Jo

(adj.)

send forth lightning

substitute

instead

to

5-kjJ

an extraordinary thing.

Jjo

J,L cold

be.

^
'~j^\

yesterday.

Q

full o o

(coll.).

leave

powder.

VUL

fJo

i

^ Jo ^

in. to

jj

j

Jo

V. to be scattered

escape

oranges

1

plur.

VII. to take pleasure in

O

> o *

contented. j|_jj desert. -

g

OiXj

J

(u)

(J^2H)

land

io plur.

^i!

.

o

wl^j diploma ~2

^5ji innocent. Arabic Grammar.

good news

X. to

rejoice

t:"*-*

and

outward, n. pr.

UTT*-''-?

human.

-

i^j^ creator

-

to bring

'

^Lio 9

--

II.

o

t^^

external.

o

brave.

to strive.

ioj

desert, plain

-

JJj

courage

yaj IV.

to see.

<**j (u) to stamp. 25

Vocabulary.

*zi

some

&

(3 to 10)

tyL '

JS

Ju

*jl*ccu wares.

plur.

*-

*-

Jdxj hero

Julioj idleness.

^.ybj

t

in the morning

early,

o..

_jj? n. pr.

Abu

Bekr.

r

tJo

to

(i)

weep

vn.

(over Q*)

IV. to conceal within o -

belly.

^jku viiou

G o> ^Xiu distance ..

after-

Oots after

(conj.).

O c

-

J

wards

o.,

sJou

after (prep.)

j one, some, Less. 43, 8).

O

*-b nightingale.

Joo

distant

far,

wet through.

VIII.

G Jyj*J

to be

Jo V.

be distant

remove

to

but, rather.

5 ,

send.

(a) to

(u) to

JoLj

Ju

plur. Q>>-*J-?

XjvXLJ the natives.

native

.

another (see

\

reach

Jb (u) to

reach

to

o -

land

II.

to

make

vn.

jb suddenly,

^b delivery of money.

hatred.

JJb mule LiJ

vn.

^b?

(coll.).

j

be desired.

to

(Persian) material.

yb

thin

(u)

cotton

to

(a)

^yb

put to the test

-

be anxious about m}Bfortune.

lur

ox.

sum

piebald.

TTT, to

xXJb

^JLy>

finger-tips.

to

remain.

IV. to

seaport.

G retain

9Ub Gs

,<w

stay,

and

p i ur.

life

G

-

and X-Jb remainder.

j

son

and

G ^^ Bey.

plur.

oUo

daughter,

girl.

o

387

Vocabulary.

VIH.

build

to

(i)

G,

^

j /md

sLo

:

vag

(

to

i)

sell

and F-t*

build-

on

Beyrout.

(go

'

G,

C.E

o

to

5**J plur.

build for oneself

the

-

vn.

w^

jju plur.

(Turkish) Bey.

of.

ground

proof

explanation, cheerful.

^

clear

J

between

fine, brilliant.

bile.

V. to take possession. 6 -os

j

plur.

v-JljJ?

o

gate u) to reveal

-

Lo woe

tiU

door,

(a) to follow,

v

IV. to

to thee!

to

-

G

P urette

belong to G --

~

H 6-

,o

follower

^L*J'I

P lnr

-

-

iuuli' plur.

post. issue, G-

consequence

,

Kiu

buffet, bar.

.o tobacco. >j

police.

O

I

straw.

,-0'

_jjLo piano.

-

-.. 1

business

^Lf

oL

(c>cu a and

i)

to

6

spend the business

night house.

plur.

o

G

9

white

-

plnr.

f>&

(adj.)

merchant. s

-

become

"'

t

jlsp

to

*

L5j^

.

*&

under

(prep.)

.-:

J,Lx^

lower.

white

tinner

-

'

.

soft, delicate.

-

tinning' (u)

beer

"

3

to

leave,

;

n. pr.

TurkB.

give

up -

388

Vocabulary.

j

thermometer.

fig (coll.). -

ninth.

j to

IV. to

tired

O

- -

>_^*J'

weary

^ jl

to take revenge on.

become G

s

o

revenge

P lur

"

weariness

-

firm, sure.

-o

^*^^

tired.

yy

Pleiads

(stars),

candlestick

o -o, j misfortune.

fox.

J u) to repent.

during

Oji' mulberry

second ^sti (,*)jJ'

-

c ,Lii|

two

-

(coll.).

u) to long for.

xoli'

a second.

389

Vocabulary.

""

>Lo garment. v-jji plur. u.

to run,

(i)

IV.

Go

OX.

j G

s

-

vn.

-

L*J>- giant,

powerful. e , J^*>- plur. Ol*>- mountain. o

happen

flow,

carry out G -- _

to

, ,

G..C,

,

-

i

p-

n. pr.

>

corpse.

-

be new, exert oneV. to be renewed

(also

of a palace near Cairo)

-

^ijii Algeria

jtp-

to

(i)

self ^j=>-

OC

plur. 5fj>S part.

island j_p- plur. jjUs"

cheese.

w>

current (month).

grandfather

-

!X>

butcher. respectable.

very

G reward, payment.

new.

wall

^JwX>

V. to acquire information G ,

worthy.

spy. strife, (u) I.

and VI.

to dare

oar.

boldness, jar.

body,

V. to dare, -

n.

n. pr. Ja'far.

to tempt, try.

&>

*

plur.

(*tj>

bud.

to

make; (with

ing imperf.) to begin -K s

followto.

Geography.

wound. (i)

plur.

to dry.

journal.

hard, rough.

e

-> V.

to drink in draughts.

> OjS* G.o

excavating.

v5ij~7*-

(i)

to

be exalted

journal, announcement.

IV. to

G

show honour- J^i>

,

exalted.

390

Vocabulary.

G

X.

have

to

a

thing

(i)

to lash

II.

to bind

Go (a

book}

GS

G-o..,

Q> and &is>- demon

***=

g

brought.

v>d>

->o ,

j_^$*s>- crowd, public.

G

JJb-

plur.

,

,

mad.

garden

O>Ls-

G

company - ^L>

plur.

mosque

>

to be ready

9s

union, as-

II. o

r

to equip,

G

.

.o

,

prepare

sembly.

high school.

camel a) to

beauty

XJu.-> sentence,

n. pr.

sum

wholesale.

total

be ignorant

very ignorant. :

firmament. IV.

to

answer,

391

Vocabulary.

corrrespond 6, oS answer.

plur.

(i)

IV. to love

O

o

J^>-

friend, beloved

JL.js-1

the poets)

(in

^

vy*J>

OS

-

-

E

>^>t more

(elative

ioj^ beloved (fern.).

loved

excellent.

ink.

t

u) to act wrongfully

towards

O

love

i.

>~ o c

- ,

<

plur.

&>>>- excellence

o!_^> steed

vn.

- *

*"*S

x^

and

HI. to be

(j*)

neighbour to

Abyssinian.

j^-t" tyranny

pi ur Jlls- pregnant. .

'

s -plur. Q'^^T*-

jls-

jj> until, so that.

neigh-

G ,

bour

-

to be allowed

jL>

make

to

2

(^>s*

2

u)

hunger

n. pr.

c

Abd

al-Malik. (u) to conceal.

(v5^> u) to ramble about.

?-

al-Hajjaj,

governor for the Caliph

jjL=

hungry.

Plur.

-

_L>- pilgrim

be hungry

to

o^

p jJ

iiL>-

the pilgrimage

-

vn. <s^>

-

cb*.

(u) to incite.

^s> ( u)

(j>>- u) VI. to exceed.

-

o>

>'

j!>:? neighbourhood.

j^

/\& jewel. come

to

i)

stone

s^^

lap

j^"

room. vn.

G

O

, *

Jc^

plur.

,

Q^^"

it.

vXs>

(n)

partridge. 2 -

to limit

P^r. LJ>^.C> pocket.

*Xs- plur.

up

boundary o

Gizeh (near *"

>

Cairo).

J>jJsJ- iron.

to

J

II.

plur.

iji^>

army.

to

''

century.

to narrate

relate *

to

V.

VI. to converse - S i plur.

892

Vocabulary.

narrative, -*

,

conversation G,

,

burning.

^*^>plur.

v_Jjy>

letter

alphabet), particle.

(of

beautiful, also n. pr.

the beauty.

Vocabulary. 00

,

!..

L*os>- i\i to anguish make oneself comfortable.

Ka-Ji=>

j*a5

-

truth

real.

O O

get (money)

>

wisdom

IV. to

happen

(u) to

*yi>- plur.

>

(,IX4X>- Persian) ruler,

&j*x>- acquire-

O

ment

(ie)

J^oL5>

result -iteS" II.

products.

(u)

to

come

appear,

make ready

to

governor,

judge

government, court wise

physician,

III.

to

~x>

-

court.

IV. to bring

converse with

to

(i)

relate

IH.

to

presence

presence (also used as a

title)

AjLs>

imitate

narrative,

story.

present, ready,

J>

loosen, settle, inhabit

(u) to

railway station.

VH. to

(i)

smash.

z=" happiness. W

to be loosed

entrance (of a period of time) ^bLs> a thing allowed 2 ,-

rf

(u) to

jj| a

0^2^

surround.

plur.

name

quarter (of a town)

of the Caliph

Omar.

place

-

belonging to a place.

(a)

to keep,

vn.

guard

swear

to

(i)

make

X. to

to swear.

Mohafaza shaving,

(province of Egypt).

dark black.

solemnity, festival.

O

V, to be verified

-

P lar

X.

-

,

oc I

dream.

g. to deserve, plur.

be due

,*^-

right,

($> troth

sweet gift

J_jJb> present,

sweetmeats.

394

Vocabulary.

death j

-

u>

fever

^J?

(<>5>) III. to tempt to be cunning X.

VHI.

si

o>

typhoid fev^r.

be

to s^"

to

(a)

O =

> -o O^S~t n. pr.

-

power, year

j

^^5> o

n. pr.

0^>

round about

red

\

O

,

-

carry,

to

^Ls>

vn.

JJ_*^ exchange

pregnant

bearer,

artful

porter. it is

Unavoidable.

to protect.

(i)

fr

o -

5

cunning

^J?

present

-

]

(adv.)

UJls- as soon

.>

as

-

Q>)

induce

-

i

immediately to

(i)

state

condition,

Ol^5>!

become red

plur.

-oS

O

AJLs> condition

J*T

(prep.)

9

vX*^

n. pr.

to

i3-=-

impossible

JC"

vn.

praise

rys-

rf

OyjL> wine

(i) I.

and

VHL to

contain.

shop. xx5>-

D

X^l>- wheat.

where, since.

j> (-c>) H.

V.

to confuse

J+ O

1

Us-

bend.

(u) to

J^

(

VIU.

T ^>)

to

need

'

O -t

,

G

<

x>Ls-

plnr.

,

,

s-

be- confused <5-

,

(^j)

to

perplexity of a city.

..

^

1

,

o^Lo

quarter

ob-L=> time.

and

^J!_j^>- need, matter.

U. to

axis.

IV. to

SjL>

let

make

possession.

be ashamed

greet

live,

X.

to live O - -

O

I

to -

o

o o-

court-yard.

)

IV. to surround

wall.

life

-

^ys- quarter (of

city), 3

settlement,

tribe

serpent

\*s-

-

-

iyp*

animal.

395

Vocabulary. S-

-

Us*

Vm.

conceal

(a) to

to

*Jtj3- cupboard

'hide oneself. gazine, shop.

e~>

rascal. loss.

9 ,*3-

m.

O,

VHL

plur.

>^*isi> WOOd. 2

special

baker.

(i.

-

close

to seal,

-

'

(ji> (n) to concern

specially.

to strike, trample on.

(i)

^>

test

2

OS, jL=>

j^r> bread

(i)

IV. to

to

,

jUi>i news.

Jo,

seal

, o

<3

.,

jC>

news

to get

inform

,

^

VIH.

special.

to shorten

-

compendium.

^-o.

seal-ring.

g plur. ...Ux3J> eunuch.

X. to 0,0

u) to serve

xAXi-

take into service.

i-

n.

to dye.

o

service 'L=>

servant

[oLs>

o^^

become

to

maidservant.

green

green

S

vegetables.

(Persian) Khedive, ^jJo> '

prince

B

writing.

ruin

(,

out bring " G

-

te go ou' vn.

IV. to

-3j3HI.

^

>

tribute -

-,

,L>

to

risk

outside.

<>

danger

(OJ .

-

-'

jH3-

plur.

dumb. heart, condition.

VIII.

to

pierce,

oothrough

vn.

>.

cut VIII. oneself.

to

snatch

for

896

Vocabulary. O fern.

light (in weight),

,

five

fifty

be hidden (from

to

(a)

e,

(j**i*>

fifth

Thursday.

IV. to hide.

c)

he who holds back use a toothpick

V. to

J^> and ,>*>

friend, also

Satan. III.

VHL

to

to quarrel

choke

with

(intrans.).

n. pr. sir

(Persian)

>

canal.

(used

of

Christians).

fear

(a) to

H. and IV.

to

II.

free to

O^j> and

frighten

V. to free oneself. XilJtf fear.

sincere

worship Li-

honest.

(

t

have intercourse VIII. to be mingled.

III. to

with

to

III.

disagree with, V. to remain

contradict

behind

VIII. to go

iiU>

down

up and

Caliph -

successor

--

-

CfcxJ*

,L> Jo

v_il>

betray, deceive.

disappointment.

(jx3-)

VIIL

to choose

-

good, better.

r^>

succession

successor,

other than

-,>> u) to

OS, pU>

thread

r.

J^>

plur.

to

i3_^> horse

.3- (/**>) II. to

to break (of night) plur.

to

*i

(u)

to

be empty

be alone. wine.

pitch a tent,

different

(u) to create.

^>

(coll.).

KaJLi^ breach

odx^

of law

tailor.

,U>

tent.

VIII.

AJ!O plur. v-Jt^ beast of burden. [.

to arrange

jLOJ

flight.

397

Vocabulary.

SjcO

invitation

plo induce-

j.O

(

blood

Vocabulary.

uJ

plur.

Dinar

jAJta

(a gold

o (jjO

Divan.

coin).

3

to

(u)

uij

approach

world

S

medicine.

JO cock.

lowest.

^ol

JO

time, fate.

in.

o, plur. iL

O

02

,

O

Diwan,

plur.

O

and

crush

to

religion

the

of

day

dark-coloured.

judgment.

y>

plur.

O

(.i-jO)

c

misfortune.

wolf.

sickness

o

, ,

oO Jb io

revolve

house

land

00-JO

circle

--

,!o

plur.

languid.

uO

jfj^o

to keep, save.

(i)

to flow, shed (tears).

period. (u) to

j^O director,

(a)

plur. -Jl^O

,

jjJwo

Ji-3

monastery

sjfo

5jjO turn

editor

mention, remind Oo

3^

V. to remember

xjjjjwo Mudiriya

' i/

^y'o remembrance XjJLxit

remembrance

JsJjJ!

9 '

jtX> O,

kingdom

and

(Egyptian

province). <->

, ,

s?

slay

slaughter.

(^jO) (u) to

plur. jjO

o

to

(a)

David.

O.

-

S^stAi'

certificate, ticket.

the Turkish Empire. io

to (jjO u)

so long as

last

S

plo

u

,

^o

'u*jto

this

also

always. ti)Ji3

,^O on

aroused

(j/3)

n. pr.

fem.

tiUJ'

plur.

i^^J^I

side of, before, that, those.

without (also beware!

Oo,

O sin, fault

, ,

wuJ

tail.

399

Vocabulary.

Oi-> 3 (a) to go

vn.

n. pr. of

v_.

month

a

^y

9

GS-J G

w6

square

gold.

J-ys a square

j-?^

mile.

otJ

fern.

30

master, possessor o ,

olo

gen.)

(with

j

j

ol<3 person

II.

(j^j)

to train up.

plur.

to lament.

(i)

o|i3

^J

one day.

^^?-p

(a, i,

to

u)

weigh more

than. -

?

stall.

to return, withdraw ->-; (i) 'III. to look through IV.

C*f3^ u) to taste

^53

make

to

G

IV. to give

back

-

) >

^_^;

return.

taste

to

VIII. to tremble.

taste.

plur. its* (j*\j head,beginning,promontory

ft

^

<3

chief, captain.

to see,

IV.

think good

show

to

VI.

and A

appear

^

beg,

hope

j and

comfort

to

sight to.

(u) to

request.

v-^s-j

CA^> A

spacious

f

welcome! G

aspect.

2

**>

..

^Jj lord

plur.

G u

G

,e>S

journey)

i)

G,o fern.

-

-oEo-o

glx^,^! G

ji

j

j-Jji

.

a fourth

permission, G-oB

5CJ, plur. ffU.I

JJSl

i.

the all-compassionate

Wednesday 00}

fourth

>

*

i.e.

God.

four

o-

|_jj

.

and

T; compassion -^>>H

to bind.

O...OE

ijOj!

'^j

journey. ,o.

(u,

stage (of a

U^_, perhaps.

*NJ, plur. Jjjf gain.

Ja?P

^

i5'u>j

tender.

permit

400

Vocabulary.

to

(u)

4j

give

answer,

back,

I.,

o^j

and IV.

to thunder.

refuse.

E>,

to

(a)

make bad

S0j IV. to

attention

pay

+O, rains.

shepherd correspond with o_ send Ju*^ plur.

III.

J^j

III.

pasture

$o

9^0,

bad.

a

(of

to

clj

A.^

subjects

kingdom)

Cr?r*

.,

IV. to

"5

>

Jo^ O

.>

wish

to

(a)

"*,

} *

lur i3>*^ P

message

pasturage. (for

-

,t)

G^O)

-

wish,

'i^f-j

J

Jw-^, apostle.

c'

loaf.

, ,

halter.

^j-wj

in spite of. l*^j 1 -

anchor.

(u) to

(a)

j

to

lift

up, take

away

ijij (u) to sprinkle. r.

VIII. to raise oneself

o }

Os^

K*^,

majority (of a child)

"3

J

Jy^

upright

5 c

(X^^Si

a raising

=

title

^31 ; exalter,

Harun ar-Rashid one who leads

aright.

III. to

fSpj

_*i>J; Turkish leader.

accompany

xis^

o

rope.

9'ui,

company

* ^j

$

(

companion. lead

i

bullet.

N^J

n.

to set

with precious

stones.

oj

IV. to suck (of a

child).

V^ 'neck.

III.

Jo, "5

-^

(a) to

be content

IV.

make contented, satisfy VI. to come to terms with. to

^i>,

II.

refresh.

to

(i)

jj

to

,

lie

x*J^

down

,

sleep.

II. to

patch

(short letter). j*5

soft.

observe

(u) to sleep,

,

ol^,

jJ,

be tender,

(u) to write.

&jiij a

note

401

Vocabulary. * >

vn.

to ride

(a)

9

a

ft

^_^j

,

understood

is

it

oLx

among

wish, will.

f*i]j plur. ^Q^, passenger

9

'-o-

>

o

;

to

II-

(3j)

;

ship.

terrify

..

terror.

,

centre.

(u) to run.

VI. to be

Rome,

heaped up.

r.,

and VIII.

I.

(a)

to

'

whole, totality.

be

9-

sufficiently watered

-

JSilg)

narrative, piece (in theatre).

plur. -Lo^ lance.

q-

-

j,

sand.

Mejidi = 22 piasters

30 paras. -o_j

pomegranate

cultivated

Plur.

throw

to

(i)

AJ

(coll.).

land.

projectile.

~>

9

monk.

plur. {y-*^;

i

o pledge ^5

1

Joj^S!

jt&j pledged.

u) to

be

u)

to

the Ezbekiyg

.a

square

in Cairo).

plur

customer.

.

9 a-

C'J fe3-' astray to

II.

rest

?

and IV. to permit VIII. and X. to

ic

rest

awa7 or

rest,

ct,; sower,

plantation -s.j\ t *'* / o,, * planter

comfort t

,

field,

name

blue

of a

9 jj plur. .

^

wind

L>

^^|i vexatious.

about to (do something)

*^>j \,

plur,

*

o

>\j (Oj^,)

' .

itJ:

odour

^j^j

spiritual.

IV. to wish

Arabic Gi

earthquake.

9

- ,

-

MJ

plur.

-

9

0$

Q^f

time

-

.

o^j

time. 26

402

Vocabulary.

Go, i

P lur vW-~' cause.

modesty, asceticism. G oE

5>-,

o,

-

,,

.,

plur. obx>

j >

flower

jl-^ji J

Jt^ll

L$j Saturday.

-9

Azhar

the

5tx>Li!

'~

J

j*+^*-* September. in Cairo.

mosque

n. to marry

Oh

(O.:) V. to

G

^ Go^ seven

take as provision

(i.e.

--

God).

**^

wild beast

vdfe.

G

fe

-

,

^

1

plur.

provisions.

,U

u) to visit

(, 5 :

(i,

visit

j (3jy

-

cease

u) to

a,

make

u) to

seventh

P lur

IV.

UuL*

(for

(jf**-

earlier.

-

G, ~, aJyyw) plur.

to cease.

week.

jAjLwj

precede

precedence

lie.

,*

to

*JU*X~ praised be He Go -

,

Oh ,5;

&:

-

husband

;

G

=

oui

.

x*-w fem.

lady A

, i)

to increase

VIII.

sixty

'

,

to increase

G,SOb

' ,

and

-s,L>w ,

excess G ,,

increase

'O^-

-

G

n. pr.

:

Jo tj

--

bidder

0>

t^x.

plur.

curtain. G, s

,

yoLi!* prayer carpet

auction. II. to Tj

(

!^

(^j)

jjj

i)

to

remove.

enter (in a register). 6 })

plur. II. to

adorn.

>--n n. pr. of a a) to

tj

question, request

beggar.

S

,

ask (after ^c), beg

-

prison.

hot.

woman. o

>^

,

dam, stoppage. 'J, s i x th.

Vocabula

453

_-~ (Persian) head, chief. (u)

to

\r

rejoice

-

joy

*.***

^

and

plur.

^

--

secret

foot (of a

J

!

r

couch

,

_

,

_

dining-table

^

-

plur.

glad.

ambassador.

^ plur.

..

j*.

to

go to pasture in p* the morning II. to cause to go etc. (a)

-

low, under (part.).

o^^o' to dress.

-

street.

ship.

- -

Jaa**

(u) to fall

to fall

.-

fw

hill).

IIL to trayel

-

IV. to

VI. to

fall

one

make after

another.

Your Excellency

(Turkish)

happy, also

n. pr.

IV

-

'

to intoxicate

'

O

j

n. pr. fern.

to dwe11 '

Js^ll

be

fore-arm.

oo

o

ji^v plur.

-

o

s

,Lx*vl

current price,

II.

to

o-

,

quieten

i^jC*- dwelling, rest rate.

o to

(a)

to

plur.

exert

L^a

oneself exertion.

dwell

,.jdx> dwelling

.lXw inhabitant,

404

Vocabulary. * *

>

plur. (j\.SlXv

quiet

O oo, at

knife.

Oo to

(u)

rob

plunder,

o ,,

i

and

j^w

AJ

gUw O

,

butter

Q<*

^rt*

oS , plur. x2=ULv! weapon.

name

to

II.

O

fat (adj.).

'GO

,.

U*

method.

Utf*

your service.

^|

plur.

- o

9U*I name, noun

iLfw

heaven. (u, a) to flay,

plur.

{

p } ur Sultan

-j*y^L*

O

1

tooth, age

.

"

point

of

lance- A-M*I Sunnai.e. Moslem

imperial.

tradition.

L*

be sound

(a) to

band

II.

to

i-*

plur.

over, greet (with Joe)

-

year VIII. to take over

2

^^

yearly.

p^U o,

, +

&X~

greeting

peace,

Q_^** and oljJL^

O

, o

p^**! Islim

good condition

^p- n. to make easy easy.

safe, also n. pr.

i

n. pr.

^L

-

n. pr.

n. pr. fern.

u)

^

be

bftd>

^U-JL

Solomon. to

(u)

j~* misfortune.

n. to

forget

comfort. 2

.

A-*"

square. poison. to

^make

to

(a)

a

become black

HI. to

permit

generous present

to.

black

>Xy~

plur.

table-doth.

master r* (a) I.

and VIH.

HJycw,

to hear

authority.

IV. to cause to hear

vn.

lady

405

Vocabulary.

} j~<

a^*- Sura

wall (of city)

l& and *Ul g

(of Koran).

*s

,

^*Ui

,

or

Syria,

Damascus

.

Syrian.

x^j^*/ Syria.

*-

*f-

condition

^Li

lash,

^Ui

concerning. -

hour.

O^*

(.&

youth. (a) to

particle indicating futurity

be

distance.

be entangled

u) to drive (cattle), O <3 ^o ,

^^

lead

o

market

s

plur-

^l^*"'

IV. to resemble

driver. different.

plur.

rest,

equivalent

(n) to

remainder.

VIII. o

to

-

strengthen, bind strengthen oneself

Ga ajui violence

, j

plur. v_5kXAv sword.

plnr. *5JcilJ

cigar.

to flow.

,

o'

i evil

jJ

bad.

o

^X>-X

s

'a

i)

ii

doubt.

make

III. to

_

window. *^i

,

,)*

satisfied.

violent,

strong. o .

sparks

yyi

406

Vocabulary.

,J-i

(a) to

9

vn.

fc

,

and

V_JJM*X

vj|yi

plur.

make known

IV. to

\~)^J*A

oUyi

jui

-oui barley

hair

u;!yi drink, wine

v-yi

-

smoke

drink,

O )

<5

^cLa

poet.

drink ,

stocking.

from

(} _

distract

ur.

business, work. VI. (literally to be

j-i

wide

of the breast) to rejoice.

compassion. i

wander about.

-Xi (u) to

to heal,

u) to cleave,

plur. -bjj^i condition.

:yi

9

be unpleasant <>- _ f

-

brother

&

Oyi

II.

misfortune, hardship

i&? reddish.

honour

to

miserable.

honour

o

o

(iUi (u) to doubt

ftjj^i

-

east

X& (u) to thank

So, jj.-i

eastern

>J

6

o

Vin.

doubt.

_Xil thanks.

, o

plur. jL&ftl

l_3.r

tiXxi

noble, exalted.

^50,

^yi

plur.

V. to

O-&

be honoured v_

*J

street

^ jl^A

plur.

2 o. i legal.

^&

(i)

form, vowel-

sunrise.

to subscribe to (with

l&i

(u) to

complain

'(of

^}.

s -

Jwil (pass.) to dry.

^00-

companion. VIII.

^5j&

smel]

(u) to

to

buy

.

sun.

9tyi

purchase. 5

' r

.

j_y-Si plur.

*'>^bt^M

(u)

to embrace,

surround

coast.

v_^oti; plur. i.J^xxi tribe,

Vin. people.

to contain (with c ^c)

<3o-

<5--

Wi union

^U-i north

u

407

Vocabulary.

-.

2 left

&+J&

side

o,

A*X

the shiitee.

northern.

character.

plur.

grey. salon. i>

HI. to

to witness

(a)

take into consideration O G, , JsJ>U SoL^i evidence

*

*

IV. to be or do in the

*

see,

G

}

o'o

t

^Mjto

j*j^ patience.

VIH.

G

G s

be renowned

to

x^

5

correctness, health

and

plur.

jfrft

morning

beautiful.

Co

honey. tui

.,

j*-W-

,

witness

Oj^A

plur.

G ^

morning

month

VIII. to keep

company

renowned.

G

with one another u^>Lo G O o,oS

VIII. to desire, wish.

L*i

oL^I and v*"^

5

A

(j>i) in. and X. IV.

advice

to

advice

ask

to

plur.

indicate,

\j&

advice.

^ VIII. to yearn O , oS

CJ^A) -

desert.

rock, peak.

concerning.

^t longing.

plur.

name of a month.

(u, i)

to

G

^

i (i)

i

to roast.

(z-.f*" a)

plur.

a

>

to wish

oS

*

l-yit

- >

to

>

man, j

^H_^

sheykh

< -

rat.

satan, devil.

Hermon.

~

JI

-

~"

friendship

sincerity, o

voLo

breast.

VI. to unite

sincerity

old

M

>

^ e Bincere

to confirm

little.

*&

go out from

^a

plur.

^if" V-

thing

master,

possessor, friend.

<~<

sincere

--

op plur. ils^Xxat friend.

(JfjJs^s

408

Vocabulary.

HI. and VI. to collide.

to

(i)

name

IV. to persist in. j*a

expressly

and IV.

obvious. O

- - -

to

(u)

-ryo

-tlo adjustment *

- O -

*J

cry out

plur.

f^

-

>

O

U> H. use

V. to

VII. to

remove

to spend,

(i)

dispose of


interest.

-blyo path.

v-Jj-o

-

&

Saladin

4-tj-o cry.

, *

honest

-^o

J

and

II.

to repair, reform G

,

c.

^y

V. = passive

be sound

to

(u)

declare

to

II.

r,**o

crucify

of a street in Cairo.

o

to

l&o

pray

(or

,

i

'>**>) prayer. .

Mutasarrif turkieh

official)

governmental

n

(a

.

to determine.

district

(in

OOLo

Turkey).

strong, powerful.

^o^

X

difficult

>

chest, box.

difficulty.

O

O-

yua

youth, smallness

#

small.

ULo

VIII.

IV. to hearken.

become yellow, pale

* of

to

to

make, prepare 0,0 ^ **** prepare

KtUA

work

page (of a book). to

(a)

^jo

jju

plur.

art.

0,oE

Oo uj>0 plur.

oLw^l and

?>' O^Xo

class, genus.

yellow, pale.

n.

to clap the hands.

X. \&*o (u) to

be pure,

to

approve

(in law).

XJJUA* plur.

>

V*jLo

g

iUo deed

clear.

misfortune

accident.

'

409

Vocabulary. O

2

- o

Jv&

plur. o!_^iot voice.

opposite.

i -

IV. to listen to.

./to

soda.

to

(u)

*

compel V. to imagine

jf

plar.

t>\j&

damage

j5yto

injury 2

picture,

VIII. to

injure

copy

, >

necessary.

(Sj)}?

picture. *

La

,

(Turkish)

gLa

(i)

^to

a (gold) piastre.

to strike, coin o o

VIII. .

blow. ^-Jyto

to be troubled u) to protect.

_Lo (^yo C ,

J^ '

to cry out.

i)

^

,

jLo

(JS-MO

i)

I.,

O O

V. and VIH.

~

IV. to kindle. lyto r

-

Oo.x> hunt.

to hunt.

jW

(3/0)

weakness

to become,

- (j^ (with imperf.) i)

beast of prey.

'

Sidon.

>

to fart

(i)

happen

weak

to begin to.

_

^,

plar

double ,

Jua (i,

officer

u) to correct

-

(i)

wander from

to

err,

tQ

gather

path.

JajU,

-i

-

^

_

m^

assemble.

^

ce-

hyena.

^^^

interior

contents. j-Uo (^>to u) to to light.

unrest.

f

IV.

shine

,

IV. to lose.

afternoon plur.

-

environs.

^

ftdd

_

410

Vocabulary.

vLto

y) V. to feel oppressed

(/

ji^b

plur.

path,

fashion.

need.

IV. to feed

^*JP

GO.

0,0, ^Jax

^s*Jp cooking

5-*b

to

(a)

o

b

Jix

IV. to extinguish.

.

&b

to agree with

tVi in

P.*

** ;jx

nature

to cover oneself, 1

(a) to pierce thrust of a lance.

vn. *--b

office.

printing

m.

kitchen.

'

print

XJEAXXT

f*b

plur.

physician.

uniform.

VII.

v-^lb G -

be shut

accordance with.

(u) to

require, seek

o.o

-

vn.

G

wOUb and xJLb demand.

,<,

,

J^Lx^lb

journal.

Go,

^lb

(u) to

to

(with

,-y5\b milling.

mount,

j*)

rise,

-

go out

VIH. X.

get information about

G.o . **JLb

throw down or out

to

(a)

o

,

'

prostrate.

Go, (u) to

(at

birth).

,

Ojb

to

.

Jlb star

countenance

^Jyb

to

examine (with J>*) Lilyb Tripoli.

jb

.

'O_*Hi/a

chase away

O-b

to

(i)

f

be repudiated

(of a

II. to repudiate IV. to set free, shoot

woman)

parcel.

o >

O-b v_b

bw

deaf.

(jijbj

side, place.

absolute.

to quieten oneself.

Ub]

GO

,

knock at

(u) to

cast

down

the eyes

O ), plur.

>

IV. to

(a)

to

desire

greedinese.

Go,

and

^b

b way

-

o

II.

to purify,

clean.

,

-*-b

411

Vocabulary. "

s

*'.-

uM^tjI? peacock.

plur.

to

IV. to obey

X.

be able to do (with

accus.)

s

f

JJ&

II.

shade

Lxf*

Jci

j

Jslax shady.

Ua IV. iLcLb obedience

shade to

to give G

become dark

to

G

Go 3

, ^

*^a oppression G - , *JLb oppressor darkness

(xk

ilcLb*

at

service

your

obedient.

j9&

go round.

u) to

yb IV. to be able to

)

S

G

..

and IV.

^*? (a) to

be long

II.

to lengthen

\^o

J*J>b long.

show

get the upper

hand Go,

y$s and Sj-^

5^

G , r^u? external.

Xcb

enclosed.

^c

^o

i)

to

be good, calm

G

1>

to

i)

cloak.

LkC in vain.

jlxb!

IV. -

to

Go,

*** (u) to worship G , slave plur.

^**

Jub and j*b

cause to fly G , os

kXow

n. pr. e.

*

juijb plur.

iiJ!

temple.

bird.

VIII.

gazelle.

jib

be anxious about

good

fly

G

5

pass, to

hail!

(jxb

plur.

(a)

SeUc woollen

w ,

vv^3

oneself

,j^b

midday

1

fold

j_j^*J

-

JjtL table.

Jo

IV.

X. to G , ,

j^a back

appearance Go> G-

VII. to contain (with Jsc)

thought.

seem, appear

to manifest,

o length

,^

Q_^k

plnr.

AJiLb power, u) to

esteem

(u) to think, believe,

O^3 do

oppressed

--.i

perienced

to

esteem, G.o8;-*^

tb^y witty person,

sjUc agreeable, comfortable.

expression.

be extears

412

Vocabulary.

n.

*Xe

u*

pr.

the Abbasids. 8 -oj Osman Turks.

cease to exist, be

to

(a)

IV. to deprive 6 - -

deprived of (with 2

r*^*

accas.)

want.

L

raging (of the

sea).

TivXc)

plur.

^vXc and

I.

^fc l^c

ed

at

(with

G

L^

orfv.

beside.

Go,

IV. to

Q,)

v^tXc sweet

,

v^ astonishment

please

G sweetness

jtAc

Go effaced

(i)

wonderful matter.

3

.

:

^

II. to

hurry o s-

plur.

j^

bedouins -oE (3^^ an arab,

(coll.),

joi*.

pr.

old

a bedouin. G

>.

do quickly

X.

to

bride,

J^ and iJL

haste

throne.

young woman,

^

to

(i)

offer,

give

over,

communicate, happen to V. to interfere in VIII. to

-

adv. quickly.

G 0-

,

iXc

excuse.

S

paid beforehand

w

jAc

S

JjLc

_j^ ^e) woman.

V. to be

>

,

J-t arabs

be unable to do (with

to

-

<

v-jl^Xx: anxiety.

excuse

to

(i)

*-*^^

i

$

(water)

wonderfully

wonderful plur. v_AjL

enemy

V. to be astonish-

(u) to coi\nt,

IV.

X. to prepare

to prepare

6 oneself

number ,

III. to

be equivalent

O oolfc temperate.

0*Xc

to,

justice

G

(J&f-

breadth

-

broad.

BXe

JoJui numerous.

correspond to

6

-

O^Xc and G

number

oppose

11-

Oc

(i)

know

to

II.

to inform

VI. to be recognised VIII. to confess, grant (with O r o,

*j^w knowledge

k_j)

o t

good, pleasure.

just

arak

-

413

Vocabulary.

Lac

battle.

$>/>

OL

stick

(jH*e)

rebellion. t

be powerful

to

(i)

Sjc

(

^a

a

u) to bite

<3

valuable, jjjc dear,

power jc

on (with

to determine

(i)

to be thirsty.

o.o

dinner party.

^Vj^

(jkc)

IV. to support.

-

&&LC

turn, side street

comfort.

II. to

.

v_Abljc tender

plur.

n.

make

to

Ubc

difficult

to

difficult.

Joe

troops

o,

feeling.

IV. to give

VI. to give

one another

SUacj gift

to

II.

GO

show honour ,


excellent,

to <j

.L^tc l*h,r plur.

soldier.

-

* -

bone

t^^r

extraordinary

honey, greater part

perhaps. O

,

OS

oUxc!

plur.

chastity, trueness.

herb.

c xc

III.

to

G

with

-

be

rel="nofollow">

company O o

* ~ *

ayiXc

-

in fern,

(u) to

O

yixc ten

O

O o to

(i)

summon O

AC V. to eat in the evening,

,

health. --

ic

o3j Ae. twenty.

,

*-^Lc good

pardon

_^ac

-

pardon (with Q*)

J o

contract

,

O

oj

Joic

.

vXftc , j

plur.

knot.

evening meal-time. J*ftc

plur.

,

-fi

chief city o, OJOE

sparrow.

plur.

plur.

f

and ^xajtX^I t n. pr. of Caliphs.

intellect

intellectual.

Acre -.".

and JoO perhaps.

414

Vocabulary.

III. to treat (a patient).

make

to

II

o

o

oJLc fodder

to feed

general or uni-

_

..

..

versal

^c

father's

uncle (on the **J|

side)

manger.

o Jlc II.

to

kindle

-

IV. to

hang up

V. to hold fast to

hang

(with ij),

be

together,

cousin, wife

(_^ S

common

jLt and

people

general

public,

IV.

inform

to

Go learn

O

*JLc plur. '

generally.

VIII. to rely on.

) >

f^f- science O

.,

^ ,

e. (i)

*Jlc wise, learned O

,

^Lc very learned

life,

Go *

3 * >

>

J*A Omar

age ^x+e diminutive of the preceding

, J

Jbw

-+.

to live long

xa^tc.

doctrine

O S

t

V. to

<s

mark

x*lc ,

,>

to teach

II.

public, '

'

S

know

\^J^

.>

pj+c

universality

dependent. lc (a) to

*>

C>

O

o^

3j+c

Amr

j*lc flouriehing.

teacher.

f^** deep.

*Jic plur. ...^Jle world. -4-c

Q!C SLe to.

-

(u) to

~

V.

^Lc high

os

S

highest,

high,

have

do,

effect

summit

AH

loud,

IV. to hasten- VI. to transact business with one another

J+c

action, deed,

plur.

r>

district

plur.

exalted

workman- J^*x* manufactury.

*^ (God)

o-'1

o^Lauc plur. t5L*x

O

o .A

highest aim.

with

-

oLLc obstinacy

, -

^^c on that.

...!

J

(J>c

(n. pr.)

rc from, instead of.

exalted

S

3U*

> >

(jr^JLc.

is

be high, loud

come near

,Jkfc!

S

to

(a)

IV. to advertise, inform.

(Jc on condition

obstinate.

415

Vocabulary.

neok.

i)

to blame,

>

o

address (of a

i_jic title,

^f.

(i)

letter).

plur. ->**?

to concern, refer to

Christmas.

Stic pain

VIII. to care for

oiulic anxiety.

shame, disgrace.

..

iXfc

know

i)

impose a condition,

(a) to

make covenant

III. to

feast

O o

V. to care for

-

-Xg*

contract, epoch.

V. to

to live G

earn

a living

ij*

30

name

^

an(i

'

<5

A-jLc

Ufe

iLci^c

a ,

1

(ji^c.) Ayesha

(pet

(n.

pr.

OLc

(JjSi u) to return, become - IV to make to return, VIII. to be accurepeat

O

..

<Jc

fitomed

of

woman)

J&LjM wages,

plur. jjijLxx provisions.

return cry, howl.

custom

jk>tc plur.

Lc.

take

to

u)

(o_j_c.

(with

II.

i)

refuge

v-i).

determine

*-*-^ specimen,

eye, spring

proof

to need, wish, jlfc (j^e. u)

to

Q*^i and Q^*^

(.jxi plnr.

stick.

i3Lc

((^c

aloe wood,

plur.

cj-^

sick.

vc after.

penknife. si. to

y

family.

lc

Q

G>e

Lc

u) to

^X.j*)

swim

III

to

deceive

to for-

III.

put faith in

II. to

|Lc year.

and IV.

ask

helper.

for

to help

help

-

to

breakfast dfty

_

^

breakfast

^

-

following

to-morrow.

V and VIIL

oneself.

-

to

nom>i8h

416

Vocabulary.

the sun)

(u) to set (of

v->.

fresh.

c-

* "*

<3

^>jC-

sunset

\-jC

c

west

(a)

to be or

O-o,

g'o,

western

-

land

v^j^

strange, o +

extraordinary

P^ 1""'

to

'.

foreign

*-?j

*v^

become angry

make angry

T!'o Pl- O 1*

covering.

*>

Maghreb, western land

ujyw 'O

o

O

_

plur.

Wjl**

':: , r

X.

jac

- *

^

moor.

ask pardon.

to

?:>".'.

*JLac.

carelessness.

O to

sift.

i L and

..

II. to twitter (i)

to

O

,,

o

.c piastre.

plur.

xJLc

conquer

victory e-

(a)

to

vJuc

usual.

make

a mistake,

aim.

be deceived.

o,j

AJ^

plur.

O,i

room.

.-**

aU

IV. to speak harshly.

---

IV. to drown.

IV. to bolt

(a door).

O,o c

Gaza.

jji

dear.

abundant. <5,o

,,

iji plur.

o^ji

gazelle.

2,

0o,

j*i anxiety

rj*x*

t

i

^

^Q) to cover,

(i)

be dark.

to

(i)

to

VEH.

to

*.

iuJU

. ,

,

.-Ac

tunity <5

-

^

-

iU-Ot booty. fainted.

seize

an oppor-

*

wash.

-ixc to cover

he

overwhehn.

he fainted

JLc

J^*c

anxious.

raid

moraL /***

QUlLi youth.

plur.

sheep

(coll.)

417

Vocabulary.

j? ULl? the first sura of the s ^o

X. to esteem unnecessary S

9Lsc song

-

Koran

plur.

f*f.

X.

3

i

and V.

I.

be

to

sedition.

'

sb&

^ii- youth

(_^*9) girl.

distant,

dawn.

j^s2

'

X

Us

*

eo, v^^AC

hidden

^iUs act of

rage

Ue

depart

absence

(u) to

violence. ,0

O absent,

or

to call for help.

u) to plunge.

.

key.

n. to seek (with

rich.

(o

.-

s_*oL& absent. 's

scrutiny.

J*c.

II. to

(jAft)

to

be changed

and ~^Ua^ splendid. other

j-sc O

than, not

,

O *

(,

.*

O.o

V.

change

/*-^ honoured.

(^T

,-j

6

s.

s

without

?

j.jl

'*'.

condition that.

garden,

U (^ f

i)

to

^

(i)

s tix' eijcape.

field.

y

be cloudy.

at

6 -,iuLc highest degree.

to

O5y a

and

so,

^ ^^^

]ook

'

_

(

comfort

-

then

-

^

heart.

to rejoice

'V? f j VH.

JQy

_

to

be

-

plur.

single, alone

Oo.

,

V^AJ II. to crush.

*3ji

o *?J6

(a) to

capture

open o

o .

^O3

-:

opening,

capture

a piece, parcel. G -

*^ P lur U*!/^ -

G

,y

^y3

Arabic Grammar.

.

joy. (a)

Jand,

.

,tJ flight

to flee

'*

j*e on the

U^

-

horse,

j

Plar

-

Wj>\

mare

_ rider 27

418 G

Vocabulary. - -

-

JO,

-

obiA* (upholstered) furniture.

J*a3

II.

out

isolate, cut

iwo3 opportunity.

Go,

divide

to

(i)

to

J^oi plur.

G

c

tributary j> plur. p2J> branch,

,

,,

season

section,

(stream).

c

j detail.

o

3

IV.

to finish (with Q*)

silver.

to

empty G

out,

(

Go,

d empty.

G

J-02J

U3

plur.

to separate, isolate

II.

V. and VIII.

leave

1II. to

fif

Gi,, difference

excellent

j>

Ojxoa excellence,

^

grace

Go, to separate

make

IV. to

3

,

^Uas besides

''""> kindness

J**i=aj

excellent. S. ,

3 fear

.

*t

3 separation cleave

*>23 (u) to

party,

division

ing of the hair.

**^ ,

G plur.

*o

o |3l

n P r of woman -

-

Go (a)

cist

viper.

(coll.)

Jis to

VIII. to seek

lose

Frankish, European. Gm

, O

plur.

O,,

&J^-*o3

french.

G o,

something G Jo*

lost

>Jis loss

OyiA* wanting, not on hand,

franc,

jb

roomy.

3Jtt

plur.

*U

poor, needy.

only.

o

is

jurisprudence.

3

(u) to let loose.

IV. to corrupt, old Cairo.

Jjp

-*.

-.
j3i plur.

~j5Fjl

make, do

to

plur. (3l*l deed, verb.

oven.

Frank, European

-

-,

*i

rub.

(u) to

B-Ias religious

feeling.

419

Vocabulary.

&

and

V.

VLH.

to

think,

^

U*s

in

while.

Go consider (with (5) e -c*' O-o a

Jo

plnr.

^Xs and

IV.

to

" QUOO flood

G

'

thought.

jl&I

i

pour *'

ijajb interest

(on money), fruit.

plur.

e

,

j^-*i bad, ugly.

peasant.

Oo-

-O

grave.

philosopher. (i)

/Jb dawn.

^ii

a certain (person)

a certain

-

shrink

o

cup.

X. to

IV. to benefit, inform ,

j

ojJls plur. JoJ_jS profit.

to acquire (with u>) Jli (j_ji u) o*< (ajjlj) to save oneself.

X. to wake up

-o

(a)

to receive, take

-

x_ji above, on.

to receive

So

O-o &JU5 south i.

with genit. and

mouth.

X.

v3^*^ reception

J^JJ southern

<,<*,><,*&

(J^j^i

J^r'LJ-'f

upper Egypt

o, iJUxi tribe (of Arabs)

J^

before

G

(month

etc.)

^Lo

(prep.) -

coming

JjlS

o -(only

VI.

.advance to (with ^c.) to meet one another

before (adv.)

^9 beans.

(y)

up

HI. to correspond to kiss IV. to to, go to meet

oli (Oj u) to pass by, escape.

Bufiixes)

o-

II.

get information about.

o-

-

Xxoo

money

jLIiO captain.

to understand

oli (Oji)

seiture,

jjioji

receiving of handle.

0,o (a)

(with j^), VII. to

(adj.).

mouth.

^gi

seize

money

e o-

O^ ,*j

to

receive ~

o

,

- i^^&i*** future.

420

Vocabulary.

to

Jcs (u)

O

kill

o ,

III. to fight

vn.

O

Koran.

.,

- Jwy3 killed. JJ3 killing

J_JJ s

of

(particle

reading,

ol>*

sslji

j-

be near o

to

(u)

strengthening to

with the perf.) already (with imperf.) sometimes.

VIII. o

^j* ne igh-

approach

bourhood

jOo

be able

to

(i)

determine o o

G

amount do (with

Xs

(a) to

present

advance,

5

*

plur.

U. to

precede

ape.

*0b

ijS plur. ijijji (=

an d

etc.)

loan.

knock

row

VIn

"

century

JJ (i) to persevere, be refreshed IV. to confess (of the eye) Xl to lead to (with *-) * G ^^

~

J*

-'-T

^

to

,

J

a

plur.

** dry land,

to read

spouse.

^5$

village.

rate (of payment).

determination Constantinople.

consolation

continent

residence.

read,

_

,

(j)

to

divide,

>

plur.

IV. to

make

send (greeting)

-

division.

share

o

jLot

o'

to

a door).

marry

G

!Js (a)

(at

- Sl^S

'*-

yw

-J^) piastre.

l*X5 ancient to ji (a)

8,6 2,-

close

|jOo

in front of.

confess

- oJU

LuJij about.

to

offer,

*^Xi foot

to

^Jilsl relative

able

oli'

V. to come forward, G j >

plur.

r

,E

,

ilo! and

skiflf

coming, next (month

!JO

V*

shortly

~

'

o

-

(Jo:).

arrive

arrival

near O

to

value

j*Xs

.,

to

II.

part

-

421

Vocabulary.

-*s s

endure.

III. to

ioJs

to cut, cut

(a)

through

..

J^

to narrate to (with

j>aJ> (u)

15-b

iUoS narrative,

story

be cut

aim

to

Xjtioi piece

off

. ^

make

at,

.Xoi and

intend

VII. to

fj

-Jai

(i)

II.

waylay

,

?

scissors.

to

jLi

cut to pieces

to

herd

flock,

-i^b"

for,

the

3

purpose, aim.

muqattam

hill

(near

Cairo).

> ~

ai

IE.

to

Joti

neglect

(u) tj

S

J^.t_^s rule.

])!ur.

j&

shortness

down

sit

piur.

castle.

bottom

^-*i

ai X. i

to investigate.

(of the sea etc.).

O

T-o,

<

desert. ^ai plur. jlai

'

as VII. to rush. Jwfii (i)

si=i (a)

to crunch, nibble.

U5

xbls caravan.

to shut

-

VIII. to follow

U5 back

of head, neck. to

(i)

be judge,

decide,

VII. to spend, complete VIII. to deaire, pass away gee k

_ s-LvsS decision,

Jki

be

to

(i)

O

than (with ^5

less

-i,

-

ULs

^)

rarely

iJli

accom-

plishment, settlement,

Kada

smallness

district)

iUxci

_

(Turkish aflfair

(J^S judge.

i)^* small, few '

-

U

S

-

^Uts seldom

,

JJw

poor. fi

wJli'VU. as cat

o

(coll.).

l>lur.

to

revolve

,,

^J^

heart

cordial.

ai

IV.

to

make

to

drop

the

land

Sii

l^lfi

^II

AjiLi

Egypt.

II.

to imitate.

of fortress, citadel.

O

v^*

422

b

Vocabulary.

(a)

to

be disturbed G,.

to disturb

/

IV.

ilfii (in

speech a journal

ul&*

article

etc.).

iis unrest. l5

to rise, occupy one(jyj u)

423

Vocabulary.

S

and V.

III.

endure

to

-

o ^os

Jy/

plur. oLj'!

IV. to honour (with

G

<e)

V. to do one a kindness GO. o . P vineyard *j J" generous.

i,

and O^*/

3

'

liver, heart, interior.

1

.

be or become large or great X. to esteem

J

(u) to

GO

or

important s s

great

pride

_-u/ plur.j

^*J' -

L/ great.

/

on the

(u) to fall

slumber.

(jf , , ,

j^O -

to break

(i)

f

O

/

to hate.

(a)

-*-

beast

jJt

prey.

G

,

idleness

face.

,

&j~S

very

idle. (u)

write

write

to

III.

to

correspond with

to,

subscribe

VIII. to

(i)

uncover, examine

to

\_A<J uncovering.

iuLxi'

Os-

X&

,

oLu

writing

letter

book,

plur.

-

office

^

iUxXx librarv, bookshop

be or become nuraerO.o. and .i^ abundance

Go, ous

J*3

GO,

.

very

"'>,,. in. to gjtf

^

to

(i)

vex

to

-

lie.

hand

fight

^r*^

to

(i)

like '

to

-

satisfy

hend. 6-

satisfaction.

J^

-

all,

every,

whole

5J

UL^

whenever. rich-

trouble.

n

to

V 8peak

converse with * -; *^L3

d

g-

to

_

ni

to

V. to speak

speech, controversy

grief.

cardinal.

thr ne

_

xjUr

S>

Jl^ plur. .

~-^ a

'

--

letter.

fu) to

all.

IIL to reward

P t0

0_o.

i'

collection,

<M

-

n. pr.

Clot Bey.

424

Vocabulary.

(3

how much? how many?

(conj.)

so

!i3J

or

AJ,

II

in order to

that, bill

to

for,

(prep.)

of exchange.

therefore quantity, amount.

^

and t3U why?

^

n. pr.

U^

so that

E

reddish brown.

because.

not, no, there is not.

perfection,

n. pr.

n. pr. Lavigerie.

perfect.

y

January.

(i)

3

to sweep.

pearl

(coll.).

III. to suit,

)*AJ (a)

^

a)

be

vn.

o

^^

G

to ^AJ affirmative. II.

purse

(j*r{^

J

(a) to

G

Gs

plur.

o

's*fAjS

manner,

^J

contents.

J

measure

J^3

particle of

emphasis

Jot

perhaps

rJU even

i)

to

answer

in

the

,

pretty.

how?

milk.

Lebanon.

jLixj

o .wallet,

^LJ

jx] plur.

cognac.

Jo-

clothes, clothing. '*

in his place.

G

u-j^* ad ^j*^JL

trousers

IX* plur. i^Arft place s

clothes,

G -o, G

u) to

(j*^*

(j*^

almost to do.

to.

put on (clothes) O ,

to

Go vn.

be adapted

persevere in ,

icpJ

>

depth

~^>

(of

the

sea).

VIII. to take flight.

IV. to oppress (with j^c).

measure. ,*c^J

O

(a)

to lick.

HI. to remark

if.

glance

-xtii^J

moment.

425

Vocabulary.

to follow, concern

(a)

cursed.

,

..

*Ji5-bS

S>-I>S V^* /

plur.

appur-

tenance.

.

Mb! k*5) language. S

G

.

plur.

6,0

,

,

meat

(yi*J

s

,

v_jJ fold

y>caJ VIII. to turn to.

LkJ! melody.

plur.

beard

"

and IH.

(a) I.

IV.

to

make oa

JuJJ (a)

-

(sensuously)

9Lu meeting.

f

and

pleasant.

be necessary

to

-

ikXl pleasure

necessary need.

^LJ

meet

-

pleasant

y

to

IV. to throw V. to receive VI. and VHI. to meet X. to fall on the back

,

;

Ju

included.

i

a piece of meat.

a a

,

LaJ

plur.

-

-

^

i:^ plur.*;

CT^

bnt

U

(

with

im P erf

when

Ian-

-

nce

'

Bense of

in

-

P*rfO not

plS tongue,

and

-

f

to

guage. S

IV. to haunt,

collect

"*

\

(j.aJ

1

,

v

infest (with VJ).

,

plur. t>>j*i5 robber.

''

to treat in a friendly

yo

way lJ

^t

to

VIII.

beseech

(with

friendliness

W to flash ~

friendly, pleasant.

TV

-

to cause

to shine, deal with.

(i)

flacae

to slap.

(a) I.

and

VI. play

III.

G ,, to

jest

with

G .of

U>LJ5

V_^JL)

plur.

vJkf! ' o-

-

V. to sigh.

_^> if (of

a pure supposition)

<**

play.

J

even

if.

426

Vocabulary. S (

f

to blame. r_jJ u) ' .

-,

.

j-S plur.

^* 3G,) mejidi (money worth22 piastres and 30 paras).

?? colour.

>>>

.^ sff

s? (u)

(^jj plur.

i)

to

(u) to stretch) lengthen IV. to help, reinforce V.

be

vJU

fitting,

night

J house of

to blot out, efface.

-

not to be. v^S

of charge.

gratis, free

-

would that!

-

to stretch oneself, rest VTII. to be stretched, prolonged

worthy.

sJ^o respite, space of time

(coll.).

i>Ou plur. Of*-* s

correction.

material

extended.

lemonade. II.

and Jle what?

Lc

praise.

to soften.

Lo

\

s* what,

that.

U o

not.

* o, xLc) hundred.

,

AJU

(or

^

to

(u)

make

when?

bitter

V.

to

o-JJ^

Oo

-^ bitter.

'

to

obey

5

.

plm

-

fable

resemblance, e ,*

J*i* plur.

ol*t

like,

f'

as

6

jLi

once

iJ-

appear (before a

Vm.

court)

ZjA

time

*>

***

i*

S

,,r

pattern

to

passing

course

by,

IV.

by

pass

Oli4J' statue.

^

l

o woman e " )lur &J* "

-

meadow.

-

n. pr. Mercier. Jwwyo

k^* (u) to be renowned

|

II.

(a)

to

'0,. to

praise

o

glory

LP-*

be or become sick

6, OE plur. t>oL*i sickness

o noble

sick.

427

Vocabulary. =

with, in spite of

Morocco.

o

although.

murmur.

to

>

IV. to be

(a) to enter (in a catalogue

*.%

(u) to tarry, stay.

os <*y*-t

etc.)

the messiah,

!

2'

Christian

J**A

a Christian,

(adj.).

possible.

IV. to hold

to seize

(i)

IV. to enable, be possible -- V. to be enabled to (with

, -

Christ

o

back

JUXx machine

o .

seizure

ii)c**x

&

poor.

(a) to

fill.

O a-

>

n. to wish good evening IV. to be or remain in

2L*^

the evening

i^JU

-.^ta

salted

x>^L

sailor

navigation.

evening,

monsieur.

5,0u

(i)

to

II.

possess

e JL*

(i)

to go,

walk

*&** S&^

walk about

xU

V. to

ii\X possession of O ^o Goj and (iUx plur. i)bLl posseso *iU* plur. sion, property

give

plur. (J*\^A cattle.

,0

2

O

L2/a*

Cairo

Egypt,

_y*ou

angel

Egyptian, Cairene.

^J#*A

(i)

2

to o

to go

away, be

lost

er

*iUu and

_ yjfc kingdom

>

course

(of

time)

mamluke, slave.

past, last. (u) I.

i

and IV.

plur.

jLbil

to rain.

rain

CT who? he who.

white

428

Vocabulary.

Ju (Oy)

from, than.

of,

o favour

>

Qj~-*

Ol^x!

wealth,

LJt_ys (or J-[^x) a

capital

death

kind of poetry.

o.

*

piur.

o

obligation, thanks. 9 to

(s^o) plur.

s,

sLy water.

..

snce.

table.

VIII. to

*.ix (a) to prevent

i)

to incline,

bend

6

refuse.

inclination

Memphis. v-iui*

Manuf

(a city in Egypt).

3s

u

accue.

(with

to

announce to and

of person

fate,

death. blood.

to

and IV.

II.

-

***

JL* V. to wish

.

plur.

mile.

\*J

of thing)

o

barking.

Lo news.

be slow, 3

plur.

journal

profession, trade.

-o

(a,

i,

article

tXj-i

(in

a

etc.).

to

u)

spring up (of

'

oU

die

IV. to

and

and

u) to

(o^x

f' "'

oy>

kill

o

e

,

oL^

death

G

o ,

^*

pliJ"-

dead.

'

VIII.

to

pay G- -iitf'Lo

attention,

wakefulness

G < &AXJ awake, clever.

b

r '^ 1

o

notice

-*-

,

water).

wave.

-^

joiner.

the Muski (a street in

J^j-U

^* IV. to complete. Cairo). fs

>

>

(colloquially (_/&*) plur.

razor

-/*jx Moses,

mode, fashion.

^ ^

plur. v3l^Ft offspring, son.

plur.

|>^

star

o astrologer

r

f^-li

clear.

Vocabulary.

tip

(u) to

sLp

escape

escape,

deliverance.

Q

j-o,

*

^

death

$_ iow*o relation.

r

5

a

-

rf^^

->

^j*L^' copper smith.

o >

-

iLUo

(coll.).

copy.

os-o

,

o plur.

)

/?

-'^

textile fabric, tissue.

O bees

02

-

*^U*o| and tfJL*o

phir.

copper-

So,

^&

-

a

died.

G

'

he

V 0-

*

r C

^ towards,

(plur. of

t0

women.

5y>|)

\ji district

~

forg et

IV

-

to

about.

cause to forget. VIII. to choose.

L&J

LJy*

found

IV. to

origin.

n. pr.

J

bewail.

(u) to

(u)

-

announce

to

IV.

to quote, recite.

o JjJsJw* pockethandkerchief.

wiJ VIII.

A3 r

(a)

to

repent

repentance

tJJ IK.

to

-

-

fjOo

call,

confidant.

summon.

llvely>

^ G

J

Jvj

o

^

u ) to take

,

O^* order

vow o

o ^

-

o

os

v3tXJ plur. i3!cXJ! vile,

G

to spread.

iUt Ju

f

simpleton

lot

happiness.

,

abject. (a) i

badge of an order.

-

,

advise

to

plur.

**

vn.

^.NJUOJ

o

-,, <5 fi (i)

well

narcissus-like.

to descend,

dismount

^ ^ -

Jji- dwelling.

guest

advice

^job

adviser.

Nazarene

=

Christian.

480

Vocabulary.

to divide into halves

.

JSTJ plur. ^ju benefit ' '

being o--

be divided into

to

G

j

*&lj tender.

yes

j**j

halves - vjuaj half -

cjLso blower,

middle.

OJu

fore-lock..

leather mat.

(a)

to be out of print.

<3JLi II. to fulfil (a

wish

etc.).

G

X.

I

to hear a case (of a

fli

JL**->

g ht

-

Go, examining

U*^

ne.

, rf-

G>oS P lur

U*^'

-

G

an d

LTl^

G soul, self

judge

ii (u)

- VDI. to expect

to see

G-, jJcu

and

G-o-tu glance, look

VIH.

j-aj

u~*aJ precious, 'o

to use

ex

]sion

Jo veil.

Go-'

inspector

jlaix

3JU i

G

cleanness,

G

>,

oyij

plur.

cash,

ready

money.

ap-

pearance.

useful

S?

OJLJ _-bli

ii

*<

IV. to deliver ,o-

-

sculpture.

purity

lowest tender.

clean, pure.

^
u H. to put in order V. and VIII. to be put in order G -Ltu order, law.

G,o,

I

plur.

<

ji)

point.

penetrating, deadly (poison)

G-o-

o

j

marsh.

9^*J sheep.

IV. to be kind to (with

G--

Li

.,

ili '

G

x^J

G- o,

f!l> '

**j cattle

to

be good

^

transport.

**>

Vni.

to

G.o, (coll.)

K^o

well-

(

with cr)-

take revenge on

Vocabulary.

431

VIII. to choose.

yoke.

G J>-o Nile.

XXj witticism.

*

"* -S

I

LP behold!

Jtx\ OpCix unhappy.

I

IJjCP thus.

olPcome!

^

IV. to deny.

Go-

G j plur. (j*>*-J ichneumon.

n. pr.

OJ5;LP G

j,

V>*P

lw Austria

blowing

Sj^JTthe w^fj plundering. _-$j plur. _-gj|

and

flight of

from Mecca

O -o

G,os

Go-

(of wind).

jjrjlw Austrian.

A.D.).

river

ji-gJt

Mohammed

Medina (622

to

l? plur. L

r>!^

unrest,

disturbance. etir

(a)

to

up

to.

X.

rise

to ill. to assail, "assault.

liL^j IV. to weaken.

to threaten.

II. -.

VIU.

L^l G

murmur to

be finished.

(of water).

GO

j

^X^J sailor.

(i)

G ,,

to destroy

p^XP

climate. . o

(\)

plur.

j l_jj|

light

j

ii

vn.

.

pJ^>

(plur.) clothes.

to

IV. to

guide

plur.

bestow,

present guidance, Avay of salvation. _jj plur.

li

pi_jJf

(3_jJ a) to attain

III. to

to (with two accus.) to take for oneself

hand over V.

fern.

kind, sort.

plur.

*^0 this.

V.J.P (u) to flee.

G-

-

G

,

oj

j-P plur. jLPt pyramid. g

attainment. a) to

^jP part of the

sleep thinness.

night.

432

Vocabulary.

(i)

send

to

rain.

engineer.

&

particle of interrogation.

^

X. to

appear

first

(new

G

-

.

oU>

ILL

9

IV. to destroy utterly

see!

..

*&$> destruction.

a(Jl3>

and

come

t^>- ^Jb"

be or become

u) to

IV. to offend, affront.

easy

s>-

-

hither!

passion weather.

UJ> they two. O

moderate

to

(price).

moon), begin.

4U2

ne

i

p& (*?

they (masc.).

IL

intend

to be important,

(i)

(with

to prepare.

be anxious about

<*J),

)

(with J,|)

Vni.

great pains

*3> plur.

to

i)

- x>

care 4

_

-

care

'

f L&> important anxious.

to fear.

take to stir up.

to plur.

love

'o ,o. r_^^

, 5>

be Passionately

-

up!

-

.

Lo

Lj>

up,

let

us go!

s _i5> (a) to

be pleasant (of food and, by (with genit. in oath) EL.

etc.)

congratulate

.

U-U^ good wish here

!

and misfortune encet

n. pr. of a

woman.

sXjj peg.

,

evil

conse-

433

Vocabulary.

trust

(3

J%

wild beast.

o

be necessary,

incumbent on (with ,J^) X. to deserve IV. to cause

,

friend8bip

to lay down> leave (only in imperf. and imper.) n. to bid farewell to (with IV. to store accus.) O --

_

affirmation

^L^.j

-

_

certificate.

lo^ departure.

o

Wb^t) incumbent on in

v^si-^j

(Jc)

(with accor-

*

dance with.

.)

Snd

to

G existence e > o^

to

ob?j

existent,

j*>5

-

-

finding

to bring 9

on hand.

plur.

^5!

revenues

paper.

painplur.

i. II.

II.

to

turn to

make

for

VIH.

V. to

^3

plur.

>>5 side,

-^>-_5

vezir, minister.

to share, allot.

to turn

.?*..

)

x>3

*>

,3

cheek.

^

olotjjj

small. ;3

>5

IV.

water) to arrive o - ,

face, fashion

district

balance

-x-ot

budget

-

respected. dirty.

alone (with suffixes) o

e

^Xs>U one ,

aingle. Arabic Grammar.

emiddle

-

Aixwl^ means

alone, ^X^>-5 " -

>

-

,e,S

fern.

o

o

.

middle.

434

Vocabulary. bring into the world, edit

5-~U

.wuv

roomy

wide,

place.

width, comfort.

means

J-l. V. to get the

-

^)

(with

to

w^-*-;

XL-,

for

to tread on.

>}

means.

^fib*

whisper, suggest

indigenous

'

fl

,

c,

native land.

suggester (satan;.

(j\f~

Jt

(Oou)

to

I.

promise (with

describe

to

(N^JUSJ)

accus. of person,

CJ of

thing)

attribute.

IV. to threaten, promise

SUU.A appointed time.

to arrive I

have received

II. to bring enter into relation IV. to make to arrive, VIII. V. to reach

III. to

with lead

to unite, reach (with

o

,

1()

60,

0,c,

jt

ruggedness.

III. to

be exhorted,

Jacj

to

,

0^0^

reception, re-

arrival,

o

* ,

abundant.

i!_

J*s

ceipt

receipt

union.

Jjj

make

a

IV.

to

will,

recom-

children

etc.)

to

to

wash oneself

happen

agree,

to,

VIII.

(jf-^j^

5

fulfil

(with

vj)

-

V. (pass.) to die '&> fulfilment (of a promise), payment

c-

IV. to explain obvious, clear.

n. to

(in

religious ablutions). ^to

III.

God)

success? (from God).

will.

-

V.

to help (of

agree to (with Jj&)

charge

charge (of parents to

A-y<3

II.

be suitable, correspond

to II. to

mend

)

and 5jC

-N^C!^ (of a debt)

sls

plur.

oLs^

S

X2

^*xcj) to

set.

place,

lay,

death

-

j.

perfect, complete.

4S5

Vocabulary,

be eclipsed

to

the moon). e o o,

(of

parent, father

-

oJJl^ mother

-oc

plnr. olij! time

e.

to

fall,

-

- w^3 bi rth -

at that time.

(jJb)

jJl3

boy, son

Sty

plur.

_

happen

9

,-

Xj^* birthday

pjar

-

IV. to

^situ-

let^fall *3l_5.

plnr.

^J^

-

M

*S$3

ated

event, battle

-ju. v; '

6 state

of

name

of a dog.

to

,

aflfairs

^

to

(<)

pUbj

make

ac-

still,

-1 quaint one with (with ^c) IV. to refrain from (with o , e ,^ vJ^ij experience of

X. to

governor, flee

magter (with

to stand

H. to

near

,

_

of g thing)

j^

province of a wali

(governor) S

-

6\$ wali, governor

-

35 master

^5y master

^)

jl)

(with 6 o"~

-

plur.

vjttj

foundation

olij! pious benefaction.

(0

2

,

to represent

-

.

imagination,

A5

SJl^ representation

-

representative. .

,

u

vice-consul.

V. and

rely

6.

Ja

p

prejudice.

- -

trust,

,

wahhabite. G

to support oneself

to

suitable.

^

iXLi cushion.

V1H.

more

(WA*J) to present

plur.

J^ H.

.

**

"J* mentioned.

i

- ^jSS piety.

.

fj

^""

-

-

to fear 5 VIII.

or

bett611

^*5 *

on O

alas! -

o

,

(partic]e of rttoeaa).

,,-

4J) to despair

(oJb) to bear, beget despair.

436

Vocabulary.

Jaffa.

(j^-f

dry (land G

Jo

etc.).

jji-L

oc

.,

plur.

J^il j

hand,

help

G

before him, in his

presence.

*0 be

II.

to

right hand.

January.

,

>. ripe.

>-ft*yj Joseph.

make easy

made

easy,

V. to

possible

-

9*E

e.o-

lj| day r^j plur. r

e

day of judgement

easy, small.

to-day

Jacob. oib IV. to

awakened ^yti

(a)

to

waken X.

V. to be to

be certain

convince oneseli.

wake up.

day

J.J.J

to

l*_j5

day

oi3 one

V. to o*-j June.

Ujj from

U^j once day.

487

Vocabulary.

English- Arabic Vocabulary for the Exercises in Part

G-Able

be

to

able

to

Arab

II.

2 --

Arabic ^JyK. (c61L),

3^

j^

with

(J-j)

about

to

acquaint

with (jof

l~

ask

accompany /&j HI. be acquainted

(a)

astonish

to

V^?

be astonished

V. s

(a)

.

atmosphere _j-> after

Jou

attached

to

Ooage

jO 2

AH

H.

-

^

Back

,J^c

o

balance

alight 3J3 S>

(pass.)

,

...tv

e bath

allow

to be allowed

alms &5.Xo o

be

,.U>

^

befall .-

o>

amazed .ixPJwU (with

before

plur. i\J~<

ambassador

(u)

OLoI

amen

^U!

begin Jci-! (u)

beggar

^^>

Beirut

o

}

angel e^L

(i)t5U) plur.

"

answer V'>?" ~~ - E vj-o.1

to

answer

Desee(

best

3U,

be

attached

Vocabulary.

better

o

between bind

Leo

call

^o

calm

OvJ>

O ,01

JyJ canal

bitter

ii*^j ft ^

j*

o

cannon

o~\x

captain

...'ujuJi

black Oj-w! bold

^y-

book

uUi'

6

,e,,

,

^

plur.

xJ

book-shop

o

carry (>4J-

6

borrow 6

plur.

o Ulc

cease

G plur.

Q*-**

a certain

chain XJuJL..

>

jj^>

chamber

bring J^o, -

5

chance *iA*a character

bringing

G

L

^SL G

- ,

broom *

*^y=-

- o

bring back *=_;

cheerful

s

.

-^ .

brother

chief

buy L

circumstance

Caito

.

u^U

o!j (u, a)

certain

3

Gc,

bread

(i)

,

G ,o

t

boy fbU. plar.

-

~~~

cause ..

s

captive j^*t

y-w

city

xU

G^ , calamity iU**a* plur

clear

9, , caliph aJl;>

clever

JLs*- plur.

439

Vocabulary.

S

-o,

coreair (adj.)

destruction

^

country

determine

60-

die

i)

j

o'u> (u)

O

,

different

crowd jl>OjJ o-

custom

-

olc

diligence plur.

disappointed cut

ji

O, . Danger -La> plur.

dawn

wJL>

(a) r,

- -

disturb Jjui - disturbing

j do J*3 4

dog door

v

(a)

O

01

~^j^

Each

except

j! OS

earth

existing things

make easy

to

easy

^

-

f

-

o

^

Egypt

J^

--* expend

i3t\j

Egyptian ^5-

experience >

s

-o

2,

60,

Jou

encroachment

x>

Face

-

enemy ^.Xc

W>

plur.

fair W

energy

e faith

,

Urf

o tJui to

entangle

be

faithful

entangled farewell

escape

expenses

Ezbekiya '^Joj

encircle

enmity

-

g

f

vn.

^"^ 6

'

no escape -

especially

there is

jt^s a

j

.

^o ^

to say

father

s

UA**

^1

Fatima

x,

farewell to

Vocabulary.

441

442

Vocabulary.

o i health *LS -

2

*

heart

v^

inner

(a)

P lur

'

s

-

U?

6 honourable +*=

..OC

Jwflt

intercessor

J.J

honour *.^!

-

j*a-i plur.

;

-

'

'."

,

Jacob v-^S*^

3wt

plor.

horse J^=> e- -

hour

intelligent

intend

,*

hope

V^*

-

^

hither

jp

-

hear

W*h

fj

ink

Joseph ^A*^J

(coll.)

(j*J

y

journey * * >

iu

O o,

60,

house ^ji* <

o^J

Important

most important

S

,

.'.

Key kill

>>

JJ3 o.

king

improve increase olj

kiss J

(i)

o

knock

incumbent ^=>\ I shall

indebted

to thee j^c

i^J

be indebted ,./

know s

Land

- -

.-y^j

indisposition

inducement pto

language

"&s

large

.

t

inform jx>)

&

^E

inhabitant plnr.

jL5>t

last

*.

^sJ ~_

y>t

*

-

^^4

by land

443

Vocabulary.

lasting -Jt-

matter

meet latter

,

days

learn iLtf

- learned JU plar.

mem0ry

Vocabulary.

need

patience

i

patient

j^o

G,

needle

j>\

G

(coll.)

kS

pay

G

,

(a)

6 oz

noble

people J^?f

northwards

perfection

November J

perhaps

oS

Q

!

w

permit Offer (jto-c

G ,i, official

(a)

(i)

perpetuate

jjA* person

once

at once

philosopher

one X>-!j

fern.

G oanother \J&*j

O

pi.

<

piece

open gJCs

pious

order

pleasant

itf*-*

be

to

^f () other j3-l

Pain

pleasant

^jLiyo o

fern.

please sUi

(a)

pleasure J^.4>>

p! pledge

paleness

Q^^S

plur.

G-o pool

o^

park porter

j

part of j(

possessing e

party

(JfJ

possessor M

pass by

r

pasturage

, . o

possible

pour

down

to

be possible (i)

o&*\

445

Vocabulary o,

o

-

power &Jlb - -

praise

^\A o

powerful jj-Xi o o-

-

-

praise (subst.) J^T

reason, for this reason

- -

rebellion

preacher Jo='.

receive

QU/ar

received

U

;^p

s -E prepare ^Xet

preserve

J^J

by reason of

prayer S^Lo

precious

!

cs-(intr.)

U$j

recovery refresh

to

be

refreshed

^gM

&i--

reject (jaij

prince ^*-A\

princess a-y

o

E

- i.

prisoner ^-v*? plur. S

-

-o

prophet

to take refuge j^AoXc]

refuge

pride JA

*t -w/

-

plur.

1

-

-

-

*

>

.-(u)

rejoice -

S

oE

remember

(u)

* protect lias-

request requite

punish

w.

jt_

(^^>- with 2--

residence TJW

purpose

plur.

2. accus.

446

Vocabulary.

G

-JlS

servant

root out Jwoli

6 ruler

-3-

sew

(i)

Go, ^i

Saddle

eheiVh

eafe

shepherd

sailor

ship \~*fj* plur.

Su c\j plur.

G ,o,

show same

,

-jli?!

JJ^AJ with genit.

G 'side

say JS

(u)

Go

scholar >XkJL) plur.

sigh

,..! ?

e ,,o school

-

AJL

since

io^^wo

plur. sit

O

60

sighing *>

science Jlc plur. -j

down y*Jb

skin

slay

gJLl

(a)

JJ3 6

G

e,-

A^

slave

plur.

Jy

smite soldier

secretly !j~

^**st

plur.

Go 6^ security

,

son

plur.

*x^L* Boon

see

^5^

seek

seem

(a)

^JL>

sorrow G

Go send back

send J-w;i G,o

sentence

o-

BOUl \j*J

(a)

_-

Q ~>

(u)

.

sound

,

*i*>

southwards J^A *?

separate Joe!

~ ~

speak JXi'

.

t

447

Vocabulary.

!L\? fern.

this

speech

2thought

spirit

*.

"

i^fc plur.

(

.,_^J

,,

standard

'/JLt

plur. *

threaten

^

throw

steed

Lac

stick

thrust

^b

e

JuU

thwart

still

(i)

G o, stone

plur.

j^~

time v^Oj

;u

G

^o,c

strange vo^c.

to-day (yjjfl

strike

together l*^*r*-

strong

tomb

Go-'

^X<

,

plur.

stubbornness O o

to-morrov t>Xc

success

torn

G

,

,

^!>X<

be torn JJJ

to

track^!

Soltan

-oZ transitorinesa *U*J|

sweep C Z

>

g

travel

.'

tree

6

s

Tailor

^si"

iu^ -^ Jj' plur.j I^/T

trouble 2

take

traveller

^sL* ^*

Syrian

Syria ptiJl

true

-

Js

teacher tell

36

(u)

with

vi

truly

Q]

trust

(J^

G' s

ten see Less. 32.

trusty ;jyt

than cr sc that (conj.)

think

,-J

^

turn away two see Less. 32.

Oy>

Unite

^>

448

Vocabulary.

Index

I.

449

L Arabic Index (arranged alphabetically without regard to roots). The numbers

refer to the pages.

? 27. 55. 305.

44

-Uitlj

47. 49. 242. 245.

f.

...**

II. 38. 47. 242. 257. 277.

,-|

54. 305.

, o

^| M

8j LsjH

185.

J!

J5T

111

241.

38. 44. 49. 242. 245.

1

OeU

198

l

j

llf

249.

.

-Uo

t

122.

.o-

,

J

o

^|

J^UJI

88. 233. 238.

315. 323.

~]

90.

291. 315. 322. 328.

ix^|

Xv

315.

't

*L>

99.

95.

119f.

Arabic Grammar.

(

j] 244 jo *-

57flF.

249. j

ff.

257. 270. 271.

246

ff.

450

jfj

227.

jllj '

\

233.

usCx* +~[ 249. *",*, o'o

^23.

KW! 202

ff.

SE

^

78.

9.

53.

324.

3j 315. .*.*

197.

iCCJJ 310. 41.

44

ff.

281.

_

202ff.

^JJ! 274

oLc]

ff.

JL!? 2f. 99.

Jkil 95. 112

i?

253.

7.

~*

J54 ' -0^1

^'9 5 .io2

,JO^>

J

Jel 57 os

246. 247. 257. 274.

ff.

*>

j

oi

kj^AJt Job!

I

96. 116ff.

99.

JJL] lULdij

193.

96.

o oS

o

Oc

4^*^^

y'l

-

-*0

205

j1

yl!

r

89

^

J

**^i

j,]

62. 71

e ,o

j

j

58. 257.

>

^j^' J^i

O.

^

j

^UiJ-illeaff.

ff.

-

M^

253.

96. 118.

^'u6|

i

7.

ff.

89.

^

63. 293.

s

-

ff.

Index

V *M-

305.

S* r

t

"

r

329.

o,..

,

46. 271.

316

U] ,

451

I.

291.

-

316. 197.

.'

U

299.

Oc S

y!

62. 84

^S

ff,

197.

? 78. 91. 316.

^

815. 323.

^f

90. 280. 816.

yl

90. 279. 280.

UJj

or 306 f.

J3J - *>-

807.

JJJ!

j

95. Ill

f.

-

-

2g4

*,

J^J!

>-

-

Jju

288.

Index

452 -

I.

-o--

o-

299

^-.J

U*

Jl>'

f.

317.

193.

Sul-j 181. 171.

317. 99-

o

291.

800.

LJ

to s.

L

237. 280.

3.

9'J

G sjlj

o, 7

cr*^

310.

O-Go-

'H

ij-

-

Go-

283.

''.

307.

/*3

f

283.

8 *"188.

-

S

.--

-

290.

2-

300.

y^

40

281

ff.

ff.

'

300Sfj^. 8.

fciji.

321. 6.

8.

-

tr: ^> 5.

108

f.

F^

29. 256.

6o

^

30. 256.

?

?.:

corf.

Jwysiaj 58

.,

^J^

Jt*>

30.

33

247. 64. 90. '

Jauu

95. 107

J*i>

99.

6s

G

o

^

ff.

259

ff.

Index

*JT+S 0*->-

64. 91.

B.

O

***> 6

458

I.

*

xLaX*

282.

- -

5.

4 J

3.

v-^^ ^*5T**

A*J5^/0

5.

321. 8. '

280. 293.

s

6

o>

,

,

5.

^

45. 49.

.V-

800.

v5y>- 300.

290

1.

ff.

315

viJ^

309. 824.

Uixs-

809. 824. 310.

305.

^3.

65. 90. 279. 280.

s> 281

322

327

f.

ff.

Jufti- 340.

ff.

jJi.

^

313.

800<

59 '

197 '

6

f^/^

.

,

us,*

> ,

%=

15

300. 329.

^ i^^O

f.

,

,

5.

!o 53. '

K 5

5.

-

no M

* -

~

o!3

28

^)l3

53.

317.

454

Index


321.

SojL

* 383

^ .S

I.

'

194. 45. 46. 257.

J*f

-

c,

185

^lj

l>!'

332

'

,.

ff.

204. 46.

^/ J>1

>o

oo.

57

*

40 ,o. J

ff.

ff.

204. 246

ff.

279.

o. KJLo 203.

*

J-^

197. 198.

c.

335.

336.

Os3lj

^^

195.

5-

49. 287

ff.

73. 305. 323.

187.

LSJ? ^4-a 288. 316. =>

-

J^ax^i

jA^*to

6. 8.

.

49.

330. 49. _

332. 388.

329.

337. 73. 305. 323.

282.

vj

204

188. 2

279. 299.

'

-ii 59.

olc

196.

-

Index

I.

* 332.

455

,

,31*5 99.

194

-

.

288. 288.

^

282.

317

O^ J^

'

c

^

>*

1^

>

121.

,o.

so

41. 274.

-

^JL. o

78. 313. 323.

,

r ;^ s

95. 101

.

64.

f.

86

f.

246. 279.

^

121-

J-*

o

J-i

279.

121

456

Index

94

ff.

J^S

801.

^65.307.323.

121 ft 144.

60 Joe

I.

f 68. 122. 143.

-

f

Jb3 307. G

o

>

121. 129

143. 167

Uii

ff.

292.

if.

^

*' ,

v

J-9 234 -^U 57.

196.

19

-

-

K*

282. 283.

G

246. 253. 275.

.

Jw.K 337.

JJbe

193.

S^

57.

G

O^^W

246.254. 264.

^ 68

*. 243.

4^*

57.

f.

73

f.

81. 87. 197. 280.

322.

246.

268. 265. 266.

254.

260.

2.51.

S

282. 283. "

308.

242. 242.

242.

307.

Oi3' U2

324.

? J"

.

282.

324

'

55.

^ 0> ^'

250.

'

341.296.

Jil/

^332.

310. 324.

'r-oo 324.

Index

V 3 v3

90.

457

^

Sl7

88.

I.

305

323.

f.

41. 50. 76. 82. 237. 291f . 314.

317. 822. 828. 824.

O* JT 8l7 82*-

^J

280. 310. 194. 197. 291.

81. 808.

U

(negation) 291. 308. 828. 5>

310.

j^>**xrf 309.

U

208 817 824 '

817.

^ m ^

'

280. 308.

r

1

^ ^

196

-

279. {jJou 62. 78. 314. 316.

g,3

(

^{)

78. 314. 816.

-

'

?tJOLy> 64. 90. 279.

*i* i5X~

283.

So. rr^SlS.

,*u* 274. X* 279.

^

J 82. 308. 317.

^J

78. 808. 328.

6.

282 ' !

JiI

29. 256.

'

'

458

Index

I.

f 339. 94.

jJLcUx 99. 0,c.>

278. 290.

Os

,

SJ^x 13

f.

OJk* 29. 256.

O-o JbuU

241,

Index

49

I.

J^

-

27. 55. 305. 809.

&

324.

329

'

832.

j**>

244

i

40

i

f*" ooz

257. 271.

ff.

ff.

279

ff.

U$>

(,

Up

329.

ff.

336.

^slj

283. 288.

y-I^l

^

815

-

^y

gH

280. 308.

*** ltf^3

813

194-

ob

JUi

ff.

J)JUP) 309.

78. 281. 291.

3

(^ 5

10

'

308>

f*

9.

310.

81. 306.

G-,T

302.

4j*

^ft*J 216.

G

,

336 U> 328.

"r

'

11

oo,

329.

333.

sjks

y, 1

00

317.

O o,

i

53.

VHS

336.

li

6

t,,

(g^5.

6 o, ^-5' 328

-

5 -50. 85. 279. 281.

327

f.

Index

460

II.

English Index,

Abbreviations 16. Abstracts 249. Accent 15. Accusative 279 ff. Address, Particles of, 50, 85 f. Adjectives 57 ff. 246 ff. 254, 258. Adverbs 305 ff.

Age

II.

Indeclinables 214, 226, 274, 309. Indicative 71 ff. Instrument 241. Intensives 247. Interjections 327 ff. Interrogatives 27, 54. Intransitive verbs 279.

220.

Alphabet

If.

Article 23

f.

Jussive 77, 80

Metres 335

Months 21-5 ff. Moods 76 ff.

Cardinal numbers 210 ff. Catalexis 334 ff. Class names 249. Cognate accusative 237 f.

Negatives 308. Nominal sentences 64

Collectives 27.

Concrete nouns 249. Conditional sentences 321 Conjnnctions 313 ff.

ff.

Dates 220. Declension 40 ff. 274 ff. Demonstratives, see Pronouns. Diminutives 242 f. Diptotes 274 ff. Distributive adjectives 228 t.

Dual 29. Elative 58

ff.

ff.

Nominative 279. Number 29 ff. 256 Numerals 210 ff. Nunation 7 f. Ordinals 225

ff.

Participles: Active 86 Pass. 90. Particles 90 ff. 290 ff.

Passive 89

f.

238.

ff.

Pause 333. Perfect 61 ff.

f.

Emphasis 283. Endearment 243.

Permutative 283 ff. Place and Time, nouns

Exception 315.

Pluperfect 68. Plural:

Feminine 25 ff. 251 ff. Foreign words 254, 258 Fractions 228. Future 73, 305. Genitive 41

f.

ff.

f.

ff.

Imperative 84 f. Imperfect see Indicative, Subjunctive, Jussive.

sound 30

259 ff. Poetry 332

f.

of,

240

broken 33

f.

ff.

ff.

Predicate 69. Prepositions 41 ff. 290 Prohibition 81, 85.

ff.

Pronouns: Demonstrative 53 f. Interrogative 54 f. Personal 31, 287 ff. Suffixed 49 f. 67 f. Pronunciation 4. Proper names 249, 250.

Index Reflexives 288. Relative adjectives 244 ff. 271. Relative sentences 202 ff.

Rhymed

prose 332.

Subjunctive 77 Syllables 14 f.

ff.

461

II.

Verbal nouns 87, 233 ff. Verbal sentences 64. Verbs 61 ff. Derived forms 94 ff. Doubled 122 ff. Doubly weak 184 ff. Hamzated 129 ff. Quadriliteral 193ff.

Unity, nouns

Weak

of, 27, 253.

148

Vowels 5

Printed by

C. F.

ff.

ff.

Winter, Darmstadt.

University of California

SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRARY FACILITY 405 Hilgard Avenue, Los Angeles, CA 90024-1388 Return this material to the library from which it was borrowed.

000 020 667

2